Sagana Kutus 132kv Transmission Line and Substation

THE KENYA POWER AND LIGHTING COMPANY LIMITED
MT. KENYA NORTH SYSTEM REINFORCEMENT
BIDDING DOCUMENTS FOR

SAGANA – KUTUS 132KV TRANSMISSION LINE AND SUBSTATION
Design, Supply and Installation of Substation & Transmission

Line
VOLUME II
Part 1 Bidding Procedures
Part 2 Employer’s Requirements
Part 3 Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms
SEPTEMBER, 2010
ii
These Bidding Documents have been prepared following the

guidelines of the World Bank Standard Bidding Document for
Procurement of Plant Design, Supply, and Installation of April 2008.
Appropriate modifications have been done to customise to this Kenya
Power and Lighting Company (KPLC) funded project.
ii
iii
Table of Contents
VOLUME I
PART 1 – BIDDING PROCEDURES

Section I: Instructions to Bidders (ITB)
Section II. Bid Data Sheet (BDS)
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
Section IV Bidding Forms
Section V. Eligible Countries
PART 3 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND SAMPLE FORMS
Section VII. General Conditions (GC)
Section VIII. Particular Conditions (PC)
Section IX: Contract Forms
VOLUME II
PART 2 SECTION VI EMPLOYERS REQUIREMENTS
PART 2A: SPECIFICATION FOR TRANSMISSION LINE
1 Scope of work
2 Site Conditions
3 Quality assurance
4 Design Requirements
5 Transport access and servitude
6 Survey, profile and geotechnical investigations
iii
iv
7 Conductors and fittings
8 Optical fibre ground wire
9 Line insulation
10 Towers
11 Foundations
12 Method of Measurement & Payment
13 Schedules and Drawings
PART 2B: SPECIFICATION FOR SUBSTATION
1.0 Scope
2.0 General Specifications and scope of works
3.1 Switchgear and Control equipment
3.2 132kV Circuit Breaker specification
3.3 132kV Isolator specification
3.4 132kV Capacitive Voltage Transformer specification
3.5 132kv Current transformer specification
3.6 132kv Surge arresters specification
3.7 Power Transformer specification
3.8 Local supply transformer specification
3.9 33kV Circuit Breaker specification
3.10 33kV Isolator specification
3.11 33kV Voltage Transformer specification
3.12 33kv Current transformer specification
3.13 33kv Surge arresters specification
3.14 Control, protective relays specifications
3.15 Electrical Protective relays and panels
iv
v
3.16 Detailed Relay specification
3.17 Telecommunication specifications
3.18 Miscellaneous materials
3.19 Civil works
3.20 Test at site
3.21 Site Visit
3.22 Technical Schedules
3.23 Forms and Procedures
3.24 Drawings
v
vi
PART 2A
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS AND

SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRANSMISSION LINE
vi
vii
Table of Contents
1 SCOPE OF WORK ................................................................................................... 13

1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................................... 13
1.2 SCOPE AND EXTENT OF DEFINITE WORK ............................................................................................... 13
2 SITE CONDITIONS ................................................................................................. 14

2.1 LOCATION ............................................................................................................................................. 14
2.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS ......................................................................................................................... 14
3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................... 15

3.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME..................................................................................................... 15
3.3 QUALITY PLAN ...................................................................................................................................... 16
3.4 RELATED STANDARDS ........................................................................................................................... 16
3.5 QUALITY CONTROL ............................................................................................................................... 16

3.5.1 Inspection and Testing ................................................................................................................. 16
3.5.2 Type, Sample and Routine Tests ................................................................................................... 17
3.5.3 Certificate of Conformity .............................................................................................................. 17
3.6 NON CONFORMING PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 17
3.7 MONITORING OF QUALITY ASSURANCE AGREEMENTS ......................................................................... 17
3.8 SUPPLIERS AND SUB-CONTRACTORS .................................................................................................... 17
3.9 METHOD STATEMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 18
4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 21

4.1 PHILOSOPHY OF DESIGN ....................................................................................................................... 21
4.2 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................................................... 21
4.3 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION ..................................................................................................................... 21
4.4 DESIGN CALCULATIONS ........................................................................................................................ 21
4.5 DRAWINGS ........................................................................................................................................... 22

4.5.1 General Requirements ................................................................................................................. 22
4.5.2 Computer Generated Drawings .................................................................................................... 23
4.5.3 Contract Drawings List.................................................................................................................. 23
4.5.4 Contract Record Drawings ............................................................................................................ 23
4.5.5 ROUTE MAPS ............................................................................................................................... 23
vii
viii
4.6 SAG TEMPLATES ................................................................................................................................... 24
4.7 SUPPLY AND INSTALL MATERIAL MANUAL ........................................................................................... 24
4.8 MAINTENANCE MANUAL ...................................................................................................................... 25
4.9 SAMPLES AND MODELS ........................................................................................................................ 26
4.10 PHOTOGRAPHS ................................................................................................................................ 26
5 TRANSPORT, ACCESS AND SERVITUDE .......................................................... 27
5.1 WAYLEAVES .......................................................................................................................................... 27

5.1.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 27
5.1.2 Wayleaves Schedule ..................................................................................................................... 27
5.2 ACCESS TO SITE, NOTICE OF ENTRY ....................................................................................................... 27

5.2.1 Access Routes – General............................................................................................................... 27
5.2.2 Commencement of work .............................................................................................................. 27
5.2.3 Suspension of work ...................................................................................................................... 28
5.2.4 Compliance with occupier’s requirements .................................................................................... 28
5.2.5 Notice To Authorities ................................................................................................................... 28
5.2.6 Route Clearance ........................................................................................................................... 28
5.3 ACCESS ROADS ..................................................................................................................................... 28
5.4 CROSSING OF OBSTACLES ..................................................................................................................... 28

5.4.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 28
5.4.2 Public Utilities .............................................................................................................................. 29
5.4.3 Scaffolding ................................................................................................................................... 29
5.4.4 Live Line Scaffolds ........................................................................................................................ 29
5.5 DAMAGE............................................................................................................................................... 31
5.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 31
5.5.2 Contractor’s Responsibility ........................................................................................................... 31
5.5.3 Livestock ...................................................................................................................................... 31
5.6 PROJECT MONITORING & EVALUATION................................................................................................ 31
6 SURVEY, PROFILE AND GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS .................... 37

6.1 ROUTE SELECTION ................................................................................................................................ 37
6.2 CONTRACTOR SURVEY .......................................................................................................................... 37

6.2.1 Access for Survey ......................................................................................................................... 37
6.2.2 Accuracy ...................................................................................................................................... 37
6.2.3 Profile Drawings – Size & Scales.................................................................................................... 37
6.2.4 Profile Drawings – Details ............................................................................................................. 38
6.2.5 Support Location on Profiles......................................................................................................... 39
6.2.6 Check Survey................................................................................................................................ 39
6.3 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION ........................................................................................................... 39

6.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 39
6.3.2 Level 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 40
6.3.3 Level 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 40
6.3.4 Level 3 ......................................................................................................................................... 40
viii
ix
6.3.5 Level 4 ......................................................................................................................................... 40

6.3.6 Soil and Ground Water Samples ................................................................................................... 40
6.3.7 Geotechnical Investigation Criteria ............................................................................................... 40
7 CONDUCTORS AND FITTINGS ............................................................................ 43

7.1 POWER CONDUCTOR ............................................................................................................................ 43
7.2 Technical details of Power Conductor ................................................................................................... 43
7.3 Conductor Sag Design ........................................................................................................................... 44
7.4 DRUMS ................................................................................................................................................. 44
7.5 JOINTS AND REPAIR SLEEVES ................................................................................................................ 44
7.6 Accessories for Power Conductors and Earth wire ................................................................................ 45

7.6.1 Trunnion type suspension clamps ................................................................................................. 45
7.6.2 Vibration Dampers ....................................................................................................................... 45
7.6.3 Armour Rods ................................................................................................................................ 46
7.7 CORONA AND RADIO INTERFERENCE .................................................................................................... 46
8 OPTICAL FIBRE GROUND WIRE ........................................................................ 47

8.1 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................................... 47
8.2 OPTICAL FIBRES .................................................................................................................................... 47
8.3 OPGW FITTINGS .................................................................................................................................... 48
8.4 OPTICAL JOINT BOXES........................................................................................................................... 48
8.5 FIXING CLAMPS..................................................................................................................................... 48
8.6 NON – METALLIC UNDERGROUND FIBRE OPTIC CABLE ......................................................................... 48
8.7 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................................... 49

8.7.1 Fibre optic earth wire materials.................................................................................................... 49
8.7.2 Optical Joint boxes ....................................................................................................................... 49
8.7.3 Fixing Clamps ............................................................................................................................... 49
8.8 PROTECTIVE TREATMENT ..................................................................................................................... 49

8.8.1 Fibre optic earth wire ................................................................................................................... 49
8.8.2 Ingress of Moisture ...................................................................................................................... 49
8.8.3 Optical Joint boxes ....................................................................................................................... 49
8.9 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................................... 49

8.9.1 General ........................................................................................................................................ 49
8.9.2 Workmanship............................................................................................................................... 49
8.9.3 Fibre optic joints .......................................................................................................................... 49
8.10 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................... 50

8.10.1 Remote Terminal Units. ........................................................................................................... 50
8.10.2 Scope of Work ......................................................................................................................... 50
ix
x
8.11 QUALITY CONTROL ........................................................................................................................... 51

8.11.1 Types of Tests .......................................................................................................................... 51
8.11.2 OPGW Tests............................................................................................................................. 51
8.11.3 Optical Fibres .......................................................................................................................... 52
8.11.4 Optical joint Boxes ................................................................................................................... 52
8.11.5 Non- metallic underground Fibre Optic cable ........................................................................... 52
8.11.6 Fibre Optic cable ...................................................................................................................... 52
8.11.7 Test Certificates ....................................................................................................................... 52
9 LINE INSULATION ................................................................................................. 54

9.1 INSULATORS DESIGN ............................................................................................................................ 54
9.2 FITTINGS ............................................................................................................................................... 54
9.3 Pollution ............................................................................................................................................... 55
9.4 Zinc Collars ........................................................................................................................................... 55
9.5 Insulator Protective Device ................................................................................................................... 55
9.6 Materials .............................................................................................................................................. 56
9.7 TESTS .................................................................................................................................................... 56
9.8 MINIMUM CLEARANCES ....................................................................................................................... 56

9.8.1 Minimum Clearance of Live Parts to Towers ................................................................................. 56
10 TOWERS ................................................................................................................... 59
10.1 TYPE OF TOWER ............................................................................................................................... 59
10.2 TOWER DESIGN GENERAL ARRANGEMENT....................................................................................... 59

10.2.1 Height of Towers ..................................................................................................................... 60
10.2.2 Design Span ............................................................................................................................. 61
10.2.3 Design Loads ........................................................................................................................... 61
10.2.4 Design Conditions .................................................................................................................... 62
10.2.5 Design of Towers. .................................................................................................................... 63
10.2.6 Materials and Fabrication. ....................................................................................................... 63
10.3 Tower Accessories............................................................................................................................ 64
10.4 MATERIALS ...................................................................................................................................... 66
10.5 WORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................................... 66
11 FOUNDATIONS ....................................................................................................... 68
11.1 General ............................................................................................................................................ 68
11.2 Concrete Block Foundation .............................................................................................................. 68
11.3 Special Foundations ......................................................................................................................... 69
11.4 FOUNDATION WORKS ...................................................................................................................... 70
x
xi
11.4.1 Soil Investigation ..................................................................................................................... 70

11.4.2 Excavation and Backfilling ........................................................................................................ 71
11.4.3 Stub Setting ............................................................................................................................. 71
11.4.4 Concrete Works ....................................................................................................................... 72
11.4.5 Piling and Other Special Works ................................................................................................ 74
11.5 ERECTION OF TOWERS ..................................................................................................................... 74
11.6 GROUNDING OF TOWERS ................................................................................................................. 75
11.7 ERECTION OF CONDUCTOR AND OVERHEAD EARTHWIRE ................................................................ 75
11.8 TESTS AT SITE ................................................................................................................................... 77
12 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT.................................................... 80

12.1 Price Schedules ................................................................................................................................ 80
12.1.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 80
12.1.2 Pricing ..................................................................................................................................... 80
12.1.3 Surplus Material ...................................................................................................................... 81
12.1.4 Nominated Subcontractor/Supplier ......................................................................................... 81
12.1.5 Specialist Subcontractors ......................................................................................................... 82
12.1.6 Quantities................................................................................................................................ 82
12.1.7 Drawings, Reference Standards and Records ............................................................................ 82
12.2 SURVEY ............................................................................................................................................ 82
12.3 ROUTE CLEARANCE & ACCESS .......................................................................................................... 82
12.4 FOUNDATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 82

12.4.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 82
12.4.2 Pile Foundations. ..................................................................................................................... 83
12.4.3 Flood Protection Walls............................................................................................................. 84
12.5 SUPPORTS (STEEL TOWERS) ............................................................................................................. 84
12.6 INSULATOR SETS AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS .................................................................................. 84
12.7 CONDUCTORS AND FITTINGS ........................................................................................................... 84
12.8 MISCELLANEOUS .............................................................................................................................. 85
12.9 SITE VISIT ......................................................................................................................................... 85
13 SCHEDULES ............................................................................................................ 85
13.1 Schedule A- Technical drawings ....................................................................................................... 85
13.2 SCHEDULE B- PLACES OF MANUFACTURE ......................................................................................... 92
13.3 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND GUARANTEES-SCHEDULE C ....................................... 93
xi
xii
SECTION - ONE
xii
Kenya Power and Lighting Company 1-13 Technical Specifications and Drawing Part 2A
SECTION 1
1 SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project shall involve construction of an approximately 25km long 132 kV double circuit
transmission line after breaking into the existing Masinga-Kiganjo 132kV single circuit line
to a new 132/33 kV substation to be established near Kutus, along the Sagana-Embu Road.
The line will be constructed in self-supporting lattice steel towers and ACSR-175 mm2
“Lynx” conductor with overhead OPGW shield wires on both circuits.
The scope of work for the transmission line will cover design, testing, manufacture, supply,
shipping, transport from docks to stores, delivery to site, unloading, check survey and all
associated profile plotting, support pegging, provision of access facilities and route clearing,
transportation to site, installation of foundations and all associated civil works, erection of
supports, installation of insulators, conductors and all associated fittings.
The works shall further include, but not limited to, testing on site and setting to work as set
out in the general conditions of the contract and prices stated in the schedules or at such other
prices or rates as may from time to time be agreed, together with the provision of such spares
as directed and training of the Employer’s personnel (if specified) to all works associated
with the transmission line in accordance with the specification, standards, schedules and
accompanying drawings and maps for the transmission line defined in Appendix 1.A-
1,2,3,4,5 &6.
The transmission line shall be constructed completely in accordance with the specifications
and associated design and general arrangement/outline drawings.
Tenderers shall submit a programme of works in bar chart indicating the planned plant
manufacture, delivery and erection programme (as appropriate) to complete the works. The
bar chart shall indicate the various phases of work for all appropriate items of the project
from commencement to final completion e.g. design, survey, approval of drawings, ordering
of materials, manufacture, delivery, erection (as appropriate) and commissioning. The
programme shall allow for periods of approval by the employer and/or any other regulatory
body.
1.2 SCOPE AND EXTENT OF DEFINITE WORK
Approximately 25 Km of double circuit three-phase transmission line on lattice steel towers

with single 30/7 (Lynx) ACSR conductor per phase and OPGW earth wires from the existing
132 kV Masinga-Kiganjo line at Sagana to the proposed new Kutus Substation. The
estimated duration for the project is 18 (Eighteen) calendar months from the date of the
contract award.
Sagana-Kutus 132kV Transmission line & substation project Kplc

SECTION 2
2 SITE CONDITIONS
2.1 LOCATION
The line route runs from the existing Masinga-Kiganjo 132kV single circuit line at Sagana, to
the proposed 132/33 kV substation to be established at Kutus, along the Sagana-Embu Road,
approximately 120 km by road north-east of Nairobi.
2.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The following climatic information is given for tender purposes only:
Minimum ambient temperature : 100C

Maximum ambient temperature : 360C
Average ambient temperature : 270C
Relative humidity- maximum : 90 - 100%
Average Annual Rainfall : 1500-2500 mm
Maximum Wind velocity : 120km/hr (33.3 m/s)
Isokeraunic level : 180 thunderstorm days
Seismicity Coefficient : 0.16
Altitude or Terrain : 1100 – 1500m a.s.l.
2.2.1 SOILS
Ground condition is fairly homogenous along the transmission line routes, being mainly
residual soil comprising silty clay, loam soil, as well as disintegrated rock that should be
encountered at different depths. The Contractor will be expected to carry out extensive soil
investigations during the detailed design stage.

SECTION 3
3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
3.1 GENERAL
The quality assurance arrangements shall conform to the appropriate sections of ISO
9001:2008 or 9002.
The Contractors/suppliers Quality Programme for the Works shall define the system and
procedures adopted to ensure compliance with the contract requirements. These systems shall
include the following.
Hold point - “A stage in the material procurement or fabrication/workmanship process

beyond which work shall not exceed without the documented approval of the employer or
their appointed representatives.
Notification point -“A stage in the material procurement or fabrication/workmanship process

for which advance notice of the activity is required to permit attendance.
The Contractors/suppliers are required to give the employer or their appointed representatives
the requisite period of notice of any notification point for which attendance is required. If the
employer or their appointed representatives do not respond/attend after receiving the
documented notification the work may proceed.
3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
The quality assurance programme shall give a description system for the works and shall
include the following details:-
a. The structure of the following Contractors/Suppliers organization

b. The duties and responsibilities of staff assigned to ensure quality of the work
c. The system for purchasing, taking delivery and verification of materials
d. The system for ensuring quality of workmanship
e. The system for control documentation
f. The system for retention of records
g. The arrangement for the Contractors/suppliers auditing
h. A list of the administrative and work procedures required to achieve and verify the
Contractor’s quality requirements. These procedures shall be made readily available
to the employer for inspection on request.
The Quality assurance programme for the works shall be submitted to the employer for
approval within the requisite period prior to the commencement of the works. This will be a
hold Point.

3.3 QUALITY PLAN
A specific Quality plan for each section of the work shall be produced by the Contractor
and/or supplier. Each quality plan shall set out the activities in a logical sequence and shall
take into account the following:
a) An outline of the proposed work and programme sequence
b) The structure of the contractor’s and/or supplier’s organisation for the project
c) The duties and responsibilities of staff assigned to ensure quality of the work for the
project
d) Hold and Notification points
e) Submission of Engineering Documents required by this specification
f) The inspection of materials and components on receipt
g) Reference to the Contractor’s and/or supplier’s quality assurance procedures
appropriate to each activity
h) Inspection during fabrication/construction
i) Final inspection and tests.
The Contractor’s and/or suppliers Quality plan shall be submitted to the employer for
approval, within the requisite period prior to the commencement of the works. This will be a
hold point.
3.4 RELATED STANDARDS
The specified BS, KS, ISO, IEC standards or other relevant internationally recognised
standards approved by KPLC shall be applied in this project.
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that they are in possession of the latest edition of
the specified IEC standards and other relevant standards specified, including all amendments
current on the defined date prior to the tender closing date.
Materials or equipment conforming to alternative international or national standards will be

considered by the employer, provided that these standards ensure an equivalent or higher
quality.
The Contractor/supplier shall bring to the attention of the employer any inconsistencies
between the requirements of these standards and this specification.
The Contractor/supplier shall supply the requisite number of copies of the applicable
reference standards specified in each appropriate section within the requisite period after the
signing of the contract
Where equivalent standards are offered as an alternative, the Contractor/supplier shall, when
requested by the employer, provide the requisite number of English language translation
copies of the standards at no extra cost to the project.
3.5 QUALITY CONTROL
3.5.1 Inspection and Testing

The prime responsibility for inspection and testing shall rest with the Contractor/supplier.
The inspection and acceptance of drawings, materials and workmanship, or the waiver of

inspection by the employer, shall not relieve the Contractor/supplier of any obligations or
responsibilities to carry out the work in accordance with specification and good engineering
requirements. The inspection and testing shall be documented such that it is possible to verify
that it was undertaken. Records of inspection shall include as a minimum the project identity,
the name of the inspector/tester, date of inspection/ test, operation/inspection, technique used,
acceptance standard and acceptability.
3.5.2 Type, Sample and Routine Tests

Type, sample and routine tests shall be undertaken on all components supplied and/or
installed under this project, in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
The Employer may waive the requirements for type tests on submission by the
Contractor/supplier of the requisite number of test certificates, either certified by an
independent quality assurance organisation, or undertaken by an internationally
acknowledged independent testing organisation, showing that the component had
successfully passed the type tests specified in this specification.
3.5.3 Certificate of Conformity

Prior to the issue of the Release Certificate or agreement to shipping the Contractor/supplier
shall submit to the employer the requisite copies of the completed certificates of conformity
(see Appendix 3.A1). The certificate shall be supported by copies of the appropriate material
test certificate inspection records, type and sample test reports as detailed in the relevant
section of this specification.
3.6 NON CONFORMING PRODUCTS
The employer shall be responsible for reviewing the non–conforming products in accordance
with ISO 9001 or 9002.
3.7 MONITORING OF QUALITY ASSURANCE AGREEMENTS
Monitoring of the Quality Assurance arrangements may be undertaken by the employer

during the course of the project. This will take the form of surveillance of the activities at
work locations and/or by formal audits of the Contractors/supplier system and procedures
which constitutes their quality assurance arrangements. Corrective actions shall be agreed and
implemented in respect of any deficiencies.
The Contractor/supplier shall provide all facilities including access (including their suppliers
or sub-contractors) which may be required by the employer for monitoring activities.
3.8 SUPPLIERS AND SUB-CONTRACTORS
The Contractor shall ensure that any supplier or sub-contractor appointed by them under the
project shall conform to the requirements of this specification. Prior to the appointments of
any supplier/sub-contractor the Contractor shall ensure that their quality assurance
arrangements comply with the requirements of ISO 9001 or 9002 and this specification.
The Contractor’s auditing of their suppliers/sub-contractors quality assurance arrangements

shall be documented to demonstrate to the employer their extent and effectiveness.
3.9 METHOD STATEMENTS
Prior to commencing any section of the work, the Contractor shall submit method statement
in accordance with the requirement of the relevant section of this specification. Submission of
these method statements shall be treated as Hold Points.
When requested by the Employer or their appointed representative, the Contractor shall
provide additional method statements related to specific item of work.

APPENDIX 3.A1
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY
From: (Contractor Details)
To: Kenya Power and Lighting Company Ltd,

P. O Box 30099 - 00100,
Nairobi,
Kenya.
For the Attention of ……………………………………………………….
Sagana - Kutus 132 kV Transmission Line and Associated Substations Project
We certify that the products detailed below have been inspected, tested and unless noted to
the contrary, conform in all respects to the requirements.
QUANTITY DESCRIPTION
ATTACHMENTS
Test reports (details) ______________________________________
(Other details as per relevant section)
Dated ______________________ Signed ________________________
Status _________________________
APPENDIX 3.B1
QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED
1. Quality Assurance Programme
2. Quality Plan
3. Reference Standards (As applicable)
4. Equivalent Standards (If Applicable)
SECTION 4

4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
4.1 PHILOSOPHY OF DESIGN
The philosophy of design contained within this specification is based upon deterministic
principles whereby the applied loading multiplied by the appropriate safety factor must be
less than the ultimate strength of the component.
In tendering the Contractor will be deemed to have concurred as a practical manufacturer

with the design and layout of the works as being sufficient to ensure reliability and safety in
operation freedom from undue stresses and satisfactorily performance in all other essentials
as a working plant.
The transmission lines shall be designed with high reliability and low cost of maintenance as
the primary consideration in accordance with the relevant sections of the specification.
The design shall incorporate all reasonable precautions and provisions for the safety of those
concerned in the erection and subsequent maintenance of the contract works.
4.2 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
In all correspondence, technical schedules design calculations and drawings the metric (SI)
units of measurement shall be used. Angular measurements shall be degrees with 900
comprising a right angle.
4.3 DOCUMENT SUBMISSION
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer all design calculation drawings, method
statements, test programmes and test records of the relevant section of the specification or as
otherwise agreed by the Employer.
4.4 DESIGN CALCULATIONS
All sets of calculation shall be complete, bound titled and given a unique drawing number
(see clause 4.5.1) the binding shall be such as to allow the easy introduction of subsequent
pages if necessary.
Bound into each set shall be fully detailed index. Following this shall be a design information
sheets which incorporates the following details:-
a) The design concept shall be summarized
b) Full details of manual design papers or other aids referred to in the text shall be given
with photocopies of relevant sheets if appropriate.
c) Full loadings shall be reiterated with their deviations if appropriate.

d) Design stresses shall be reiterated.
e) Code or standard references should be quoted and equation written out in full for
initial calculation.
Should the Contractor be required to re-submit amended calculations or additional sheets

the following annotation shall be adopted:-
f) Amended sheets should retain the same sheet number but have a lower case revision
letter suffix i.e. sheet 14 when amended becomes 14a then 14b.
g) Additional sheets that needed to be inserted shall be given the sheet number they are
added to plus an upper case letter prefix i.e. additional sheets to page 60 become A60,
B60 and if subsequently amended A60a etc.
Where a computer program is used for design calculations a full explanation in the
English language shall be provided to assist the Employers approval of the calculations
for each and every program used. Details must include name of program author source,
comprehensive description of theoretical basis including all references to relevant
documentation, checks undertaken on program and list of projects on which the program
has been used.
4.5 DRAWINGS
4.5.1 General Requirements

Drawings shall be to scale fully detailed and all dimensions shall be in Metric Units. General
arrangements drawings submitted shall be to scale of not less than1 to 50 and all detail
drawings not less than 1 to 20. Profile drawings shall normally be drawn to a vertical scale of
1 to 200 and a horizontal scale of 1 to 2,000.
Drawings sheets shall conform in size to BS 3429, mainly A0, A1, A2, A3, and A4. A3
drawings shall be used as much as possible for construction drawings. The sheet size is to be
stated on the drawing within or adjacent to the title block.
Drawings shall conform to BS 308 or equivalent. The scale used shall be stated on the
drawing as a ratio together with linear scale at a convenient position along the margin of the
original drawing sheet.
The physical draughting requirement in respect of line density, strength, contrast, spacing and
character legibility shall be met to ensure drawings are suitable for microfilming in
accordance with BS 5536 and the specification for micro-copying of drawings to BS 4210.
All drawings shall bear in English, serial number of the project, drawing number, which shall
be unique to this project and scale. The system of numbering and layout of the title block will
be to the approval of the Employer. The title block shall include the name and address of the
Employer. The revision notes shall detail the nature of each revision. The revision shall be
enclosed in a cloud with the revision letter indicated.

4.5.2 Computer Generated Drawings

The submissions generated drawings sent by electronic transmission or any other electronic
form shall be subject to agreement by the Employer.
4.5.3 Contract Drawings List

At defined interval the Contractor shall submit the requisite number of copies of the contract
drawing list.
The list shall contain the following information:
a. Drawing number,
b. Drawing title
c. Revision status
d. Approval status
All changes since the previous issue shall be clearly indicated and when agreed only the front
(index) revised sheets need to be submitted.
4.5.4 Contract Record Drawings

The Contractor shall submit to the Employer:
a) A final issue of the contract drawing list indicating which of the drawings design
calculations, methods statements etc that they propose to issue as final contract
drawings. These drawings shall be updated to incorporate all modifications made
during erection and commissioning.
b) Requisite number of prints (minimum of four) of each schedule, including where

appropriate the supply and installation material manual.
c) Requisite number of drawings (minimum of four) including design calculations

schedules including the supply and installation material manual in data stick format
in either WPG or DXF format.
d) Requisite number of polyester/transparency film copy of each drawing, including

design calculations, profile and route maps.
The distribution of the contract record drawings will be advised by the Employer.
4.5.5 Route maps
During the progress of the work the Contractor shall record on profiles, supply and install
material manuals (SIMMs) and on a set Survey Maps of approved scale such particulars as
will allow an accurate reference to be made afterwards in case of any faults or projected
modifications to the line.
The map and/or profile sheet shall show the exact position of every support with approved
reference marks. The maps shall be supplemented or profiles marked by sketches where
necessary to delineate boundary position of support which cannot be clearly indicated on the
maps.

The date included on the maps profile sketches and SIMMS shall be submitted to the
employer to whom facilities shall be given for examining such records during the progress of
the work.
4.6 SAG TEMPLATES
The Contractor shall supply the specified sets (minimum of two) of templates in strong stable
colourless plastic or similar material not less than 3mm thick. Engraving shall be on the back
face of the templates. The templates shall be for the specified equivalent spans.
Each template shall be accurately shaped to provide the sag curve; the same curve shall be
engraved on the template at a distance below representing the minimum allowable vertical
clearance to normal ground. A further sag curve in still air at minimum temperature shall also
be shown. Each template shall be clearly endorsed with the sagging basis, conductor
particulars equivalent span and unless otherwise specified to a scale of 1:200 vertical and
1:2000 horizontal.
Templates shall be supplied to the Employer before the submission of the profiles. Failure to
do so may result in delay which will be responsibility of the Contractor.
4.7 SUPPLY AND INSTALL MATERIAL MANUAL

As soon as final support positions are approved, the Contractor shall provide the requisite
copies of the A4 size Supply Install Material Manual (SIMM).
Each support position shall be represented by one of the manuals with the following
information recorded:
a. Provisional and final support numbers.

b. Profile and record map reference drawing numbers.
c. Span
d. Wind span
e. Weight Span
f. Angle of deviation
g. Support type, leg and body extensions and General Arrangement (G.A.) drawing
reference numbers
h. Foundation type and G.A. drawing reference number

i. Earthing details and G.A. drawing reference number
j. Insulator set details and G.A. drawing reference number
k. Sag adjustment setting and linkage requirements – (where appropriate)
l. Phase conductor jumper details including spacer and general arrangements drawing
reference number – (where appropriate)
m. Earth wire set details and G.A. drawing reference number

n. Earth wire vibration damper G.A. drawing reference number

o. Aircraft navigator (obstruction aids) drawing reference number – (where appropriate)

p. Fibre optic junction boxes and cabling G.A. drawing reference number – (where
appropriate)
In addition the following schedules shall be included:-
i. Phase conductor and OPGW (ground wire) sags and tension (erection and final)
ii. Suspension insulator sets off-sets
iii. Location and spacing of all phase conductor spacers dampers – (where
appropriate)
iv. Location of all phase conductor and earth wire tension and non tension joints
v. Location and spacing of all aircraft warning spheres (where appropriate)
vi. Location of all fibre optic joint boxes – (where appropriate)
The appropriate reference drawing numbers shall also be included. Preliminary copies of
SIMMs shall be available prior to any site work commencing, together with materials
summaries. This is Hold Point.
4.8 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The Contractor shall provide at the specified period before the end of the construction period
of the contract, a maintenance manual covering the following information:-
a) Type, code numbers and description of all plant erected, together with names and
addresses of manufacturers
b) Methods of assembly of all fittings
c) Method of replacing any part of the plant including the use of maintenance holes
provided on the support access provisions and where appropriate the application of
“live – line’ maintenance techniques.
d) Recommendations of preventive maintenance including frequency of inspection.
e) List of recommended maintenance equipment with a description of its use and

limitations
f) Type and application of temporary earthing equipments.
g) Personal safety equipment requirement and any risk assessment required.
The above information must be specified to this contract and entirely in the English
language.
Drawings and diagrams shall be used where necessary to enable the Employer/Purchaser
to properly maintain the whole of the works.

The manual shall be suitably bound within a hard cover and all materials used shall be
reasonably hard wearing.
The manual shall be submitted to the Employer. This is Hold Point.
4.9 SAMPLES AND MODELS
If the nature of the works makes it desirable the Contractor/ supplier may be asked to
submit or prepare for the Employer such samples, patterns and models as the Employer
may reasonably require for the purpose of design approval at the expense of the
Contractor/supplier.
4.10 PHOTOGRAPHS
The Contractor shall make all arrangements to provide progress photographs of all tests
and such sections of the work in progress as directed by the Employer. Each photograph
shall be of size 25cm x 20cm suitably entitled, in digital format. The photographs shall
be the property of the Employer and no copies of the photographs shall be released
without the authority of the Employer.
The Contractor will normally be required to provide every month at his own cost the
specified number of sets of un-mounted progress photographs suitably inscribed of
potions of the work in progress throughout the period of construction. Any variation to
these quantities will only be with the permission of the Employer.

SECTION 5
5 TRANSPORT, ACCESS AND SERVITUDE
5.1 WAYLEAVES
5.1.1 General
Wayleaves and access facilities, subject to the requirement of landowners and occupiers, will
be provided by the Employer to enable the Contractor to carry out the erection of the contract
works. Such facilities will not necessarily include facilities for storing materials nor
necessarily include access for wheeled vehicles.
The Contractor shall satisfy themselves that the necessary rights of entry and access have
been obtained before
The contractor shall indicate to the employer such pipes or other obstructions telephone
telegraph and power lines which infringe the clearance specified or otherwise fail to satisfy
the requirement of the specification.
The necessary agreement for the removal of obstruction such as trees and for the permanent
removal or guarding of pipes telegraph telephone and power lines, will be obtained by the
Employer.
5.1.2 Wayleaves Schedule

Before the Contractor commences work on any property he shall obtain the wayleaves
schedule from the Employer, including details of any special requirement of the occupiers
concerned. This is a Hold Point.
5.2 ACCESS TO SITE, NOTICE OF ENTRY
5.2.1 Access Routes – General

The Employer may indicate to the Contractor the general route for access to each or any
position as agreed by the Employer, otherwise the Contractor shall make all necessary
arrangements (other than questions of way leaves) with the occupier.
Subject to the provisions of the preceding paragraph before commencing work, the
Contractor shall at his own expenses do what is necessary to make the access suitable for his
use and shall take all reasonable precautions to avoid damage, including if required erection
of temporary fences or gates where permanent fences, hedges or gates have been removed.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment in the event of a particular
access being difficult.
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining agreed access routes in a usable
condition without undue widening for the duration of the contract. The occupier shall not be
put to any inconvenience in gaining access to his land or buildings. No unauthorized access
routes shall be taken by the Contractor.
5.2.2 Commencement of work

Before beginning on any property the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining
confirmation from the Employer that wayleaves are in order and any agreed accesses have
not been altered and for giving not less than 48 hours notice to the occupier that work is to
begin. Work shall proceed on any land within the requisite period of such notice being given
to the occupier.
5.2.3 Suspension of work

Where work is to be suspended without the expectation of it being resumed within the
specified period, the Contractor must notify the occupier of such intention and shall similarly
give the occupier prior notification of the resumption of work. The purpose of this Clause is
to assist in maintaining good relations between the occupier, the Contractor and the Employer
and to keep the occupier informed of what is going to happen on or across his land.
5.2.4 Compliance with occupier’s requirements

At all times during the execution of the works, the Contractor shall ensure compliance with
all such reasonable requirements of the occupier as are brought to the Contractor’s notice by
the Employer. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment in respect of his
compliance with the reasonable requirements of the occupier.
5.2.5 Notice To Authorities

Before the Contractor carries out the stringing of conductors along or across power or
telecommunication circuits, public roads, etc, he shall give the requisite notice to the
appropriate Authorities of the time and date when he proposes to perform the work and shall
send a duplicate copy of each notice to the Employer.
5.2.6 Route Clearance

For details of the clearance requirements for survey, access routes, line route, support
locations and conductor stringing, reference shall be made to Appendix 5.A1.
5.3 ACCESS ROADS
For details of the access road requirements reference shall be made to Appendix 5.A2
5.4 CROSSING OF OBSTACLES
5.4.1 General
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, make any necessary arrangements and take the
necessary precautions where the route crosses buildings, telecommunication, power or pipe
lines, orchards, gardens, railways, antiquities or other obstructions or ground over or across
which erection cannot be carried out in the normal manner or has to be avoided. These
arrangements must be submitted to the Employer. This is a Hold Point.
Where a support is set across a fence, hedge, bank or wall, the Contractor shall remove and
reinstate the fence, hedge, bank or wall at his own expense and he shall be responsible at his
own expense for making good to the satisfaction of the Employer, owners and tenants
concerned, all land, property, roads, drains, fences, walls hedges, gates and the like which he
has damaged or disturbed during the execution of the contrast works and shall remove all
surplus material after erection. The Contractor shall take proper precautions to prevent the
straying of and damage to livestock until after the backfilling of excavations and permanent
reinstatement of fences, walls, hedges, gates and the like are completed.

5.4.2 Public Utilities

The Contractor shall ensure that the erection of the contract works does not cause damage to
or interference with existing telecommunication, power or pipe lines.
Where appropriate Authorities affected deem it necessary for the protection of their
employees, property, or the public, or for the assistance of traffic, to provide flagmen and
watchmen, the cost of such provision shall be borne by the Contractor. Where required by the
appropriate Authorities work shall be carried on outside normal hours and at the Contractor’s
own expense.
The Contractor shall also be liable to make good at least to the original condition or
compensate the owners, operators and users or any public undertaking in respect of any
damage however caused to their property, lands or roads arising out of or in consequence of
the execution of the works.
5.4.3 Scaffolding
The Contractor shall provide all necessary scaffolding and the like for the crossing of
telecommunications or power lines, roads, railways building or other obstacles. The
Contractor shall advise the Employer in each instance of the scaffolding he proposes to use.
Drawings of the proposed scaffolding shall be submitted to the Employer, and the appropriate
regulatory authorities. This is Hold Point
5.4.4 Live Line Scaffolds

The scaffolding which is used to cross specified low, medium and high voltage power lines
shall be of such dimensions and allow such clearances that the power lines being crossed may
remain in commission during construction of the new transmission line. It may only be
possible to have shut-downs on the lines to be crossed for sufficient periods of time to top out
and net the scaffolds. Such restrictions in building and use of the scaffolds will not be
grounds for claiming additional costs. Design and construction of the live scaffold shall not
be inferior to the minimum standards outline in the following clause.
5.4.5 Live Line Scaffold-Construction

The scaffold shall be designed to withstand the maximum design wind speed, except that a
reduced return period will be accepted. Consideration shall also be given due to impact
loading, due to dropping of the upper phase conductor.
The scaffold shall, unless otherwise approved by the Employer, consist of 3m wide 300mm
squire mesh nylon nets attached to steel wire ropes running perpendicular to the lower line
route, carried by metal scaffolding at 3m intervals. The nets shall be attached to the catenary
wires by means that do not require the presence of any persons on the net or the catenary
wires whilst the lower line is alive. An additional movable 3m by 50 mm mesh walk net laid
over the 300 mesh nets may be used whilst the lower line is dead.
Normally, steel or aluminium tubular scaffolding to BS 1139 and BS 6323 should be used.
The use of pre-formed units or frames shall be subject to the Employer’s approval.
The mechanical construction shall be in accordance with BS 5950. Reference shall also be
made where appropriate to BS 5973.

The design of the scaffold shall have due regard to the requirements of safety with particular
respect to accidental contact with live conductors during construction, use and removal.
The scaffold, including foundations, shall be designed and constructed to ensure stability
during the process of erection and removal, and also at times when work has caused for any
reason including adverse weather conditions. The foundations shall be suitable for the ground
concerned.
The base width of any tubular steel supporting structure shall not be less than 25 percent of
its height. Lighter materials (e.g. Aluminium) shall be used with caution. Adequate diagonal
bracing shall be provided.
The scaffold shall extend at least 5m either side of the outermost conductors of the upper line.
A maximum of 2m of this distance may be provided by means of catchers.
Catchers shall be provided at each end of each scaffold support. The catcher may be vertical
or inclined to a maximum angle of 450 from the vertical. They shall be capable of
withstanding the specified impact loads without excessive distortion that would permit a
falling conductor to approach or touch a live-line.
The upper parts of the scaffold shall be provided with soft wood rubbing boards or otherwise
protected in an approved manner to prevent damage to the conductors resting on or being
drawn over the guard. Soft wood poles may be used for this purpose. The height of these
boards shall be sufficient to prevent the conductor damaging the nylon net. To avoid
damaging the conductors no object other than non-metallic lashing or the catchers shall
protrude above the rubbing boards.
Sufficient endless or double ended lead lines for hauling over pilot wires shall be placed over
the scaffold prior to re-energization of the lower line.
The side supports shall have working platforms to facilitate the required running of
conductors and prior wires. Working platforms shall be provided with hand rails, toe boards
and notices warning of the danger of live conductors. The heights of hand rails shall be 1m
and the toe boards 230 mm. Each working platform shall have a notice plate indicating the
“Safe Climbing Height”.
The scaffold shall be fitted with danger plates at intervals of not more than 6m along the anti-
climbing device with at least one plate on each face of the structure.
The scaffold shall be constructed to prevent unauthorized access or climbing by the use of
barbed wire anti-climbing devices, fences or other means approved by the Employer. The
scaffolding shall be lit with red warning lamps from ½ hour before sunset to ½ hour after
sunrise if erected within 2m from a highway or footpath without an intervening fence. The
scaffold the Contractor shall provide or arrange for the supply and maintenance of these
lamps (e.g. with the line Contractor).
If the scaffolding is constructed adjacent to a roadway, a guard constructed from steel drums
filled with soil or a soil bund shall be provided and suitably lit.

Where possible the resistance to earth of the scaffold shall be less than 10 ohms. Special
consideration by the Employer and the lower line operator shall be given in cases where this
is not attainable with a reasonable number of driven earth rods.
Bonding the scaffold to the earthing systems of either the live-line, or the line under
construction is not normally acceptance. In the former case a nearby line fault could cause the
scaffold to become live. In the latter case a fault between the live-line and the scaffold could
cause components of the line under construction to become alive, particularly as its earthing
system may not be complete.
The earth rods should normally be driven into the ground around the outside and
approximately 1 m from the scaffold structure. The rods should be securely connected
electrically and mechanically to the scaffold structure by flexible copper or aluminium leads
with minimum across-sectional areas of 64 mm2 or 100 mm2 respectively.
Drawings of the scaffold complete with details of the clearance plates and earthing
arrangement, together with supporting calculations shall be submitted to the Employer and
appropriate regulatory authorities. This is a Hold Point.
5.5 DAMAGE
5.5.1 General
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to avoid damage to land, property, roads,
crops, fields drains, fences walls, hedges, gates, trees and the like and shall ensure that the
work is adequately supervised so that any damage is reduced to the minimum. Save as
otherwise provided, the Contractor will be liable for all damage arising by or in consequence
of the works except unavoidable damage to crops and shall pay compensation or make good
at the option of the Employer.
5.5.2 Contractor’s Responsibility

The Contractor’s liability for loss or damage shall extend to any such loss or damage
resulting from the employment of a Subcontractor. This does not relieve the Contractor of his
liability for all actions of his Subcontractor.
5.5.3 Livestock
Adequate provision shall be made by the Contractor to prevent the straying of or injury to
livestock during the execution of the work and until the permanent reinstatement of fences,
wall, hedges, gates and the like is completed.
The Contractors shall be liable for any injury to or loss of livestock due to failure to comply
with the above requirements.
5.6 PROJECT MONITORING & EVALUATION
The Contractor shall provide at least one (1) no. 4 Wheel Drive vehicles driven and fuelled
for use by the Employer’s Project Inspection and Supervision Teams. These shall be used by

the Employer’s representatives for Project Monitoring and Evaluation during the whole
period of project implementation, and will revert to the ownership of the Employer at the end
of the project.
The vehicles should conform to the specifications given in Appendix 5.A3 below.

APPENDIX 5.A1
ROUTE CLEARANCE
Where clearing is required, the following requirements shall be observed:
a) Tree and tall scrub shall be cleared to a distance of 15m on either side of the centre
line of the route. Trees and bushes shall be cut down to a height of not more than
0.25m above ground level. In addition, tall danger trees outside the cleared area, of
such height that could fall within 3m of the conductors, shall be trimmed by the
Contractor. No tree may be felled without the express permission of the Employer.
This is a Hold Point.
b) Felled trees and scrub shall be removed a distance of 15m on either side of the centre
line of the route and form a path 2.5m wide and running as far as possible
continuously along the route. The Contractor shall grub up tree stumps and roots from
this track and leave a graded way for negotiation by Land Cruiser or similar four-
wheeled drive light vehicle for patrolling and maintenance by the Employer.
c) The Contractor shall clear a 4m wide agreed construction track from public roads, of
all trees, stumps, scrub and vegetation to tower positions as required by the Employer.
Such tracks need not be surfaced but shall be graded and shall include culverts to
prevent wash-way.
d) All felled trees and tree trimmings shall remain the property of the landowner.

APPENDIX 5.A2
ACCESS ROADS
Not Required

APPENDIX 5.A3
Vehicle Specifications
DOUBLE CABIN, 4X4, LWB,2700 - 3200cc, DIESEL
SPECIFICATIONS MINIMUM
REQUIREMENTS
MAKE -
MODEL Toyota
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN Japan
MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE/BROCHURES & Yes (mandatory)
SPECIFICATIONS SUPPLIED
1. GENERAL
a) A standard production, 4x4 Double Cab vehicle of latest design in Yes, (mandatory)
robust construction in current production
b) Supplied new Yes(mandatory)
c) Designed for export specifications, suitable for operating in tropical Yes
conditions
d) Most suitable for operating on both "on and off" road conditions Yes
2. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

a) Overall length x width approx. (mm 4,900 x 1,730
b) Overall height approx. 1,780 mm
c) Wheelbase approx. 2,940 mm
d) Ground Clearance, min. 200 mm (mandatory)
e) Kerb weight approx. 1,800 Kg
e) Turning radius, approx. 6,500 mm
3. ENGINE
a. Engine performance curves supplied Yes
b. Engine type, diesel, 4 stroke, water cooled Yes,
c. Piston displacement, approx., 2,700-3,200 cc.
(mandatory)
d. 4 cylinder, disposable oil & fuel filter
e. Fuel tank capacity, min. 70 Litres
4. CLUTCH AND TRANSMISSION

a) Clutch, dry single plate, diaphragm type Specify
b) Hydraulic, clutch actuation Yes
c) Manual/auto syncromesh gearbox Yes
d) Total Speeds min 5F/1R(mandatory)
5. BRAKES AND TYRES

a) Assisted hydraulic, dual brake system Yes
b) Locally manufactured dual purpose tyres Yes

6. SUSPENSION AND STEERING

a) Front and rear suspension, independent Specify Front
with telescopic dampers, right-hand steering Rear
7. PICK-UP BODY
a) Roomy cab to seat 5 adults comfortably including driver, drivers seat Yes
adjustable in the front row
b) Adjustable seats for two with safety (seat) belts provided Yes
c) Second row to seat 3 adults comfortably c/w seat belts Yes
8. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM/INSTRUMENTS
a) System voltage, negative earth, with alternator charging 12V, Yes
b) Battery capacity specify
c) Full lighting to conform to Cap 403, subs 23-Kenya Traffic Act Yes
d) Standard instruments and gauges (or warning lights) for charging Yes
circuit, oil pressure, coolant temperature etc
9. EQUIPMENT
a) All basic motor vehicle spares present- radio cassette, spare wheel, Yes
standard tools, jack , hazard triangle, floor mats etc.
h) Vehicle to be fitted with electronic speed governor, tamper proof, mandatory
with maximum speed 110kph
10. OTHER REQUIREMENTS

a) Vehicle Supplier’s Status: Franchise Holder/Dealer/Agent in Specify
Kenya
b) Indicate name and physical addresses of all Dealers/Agents
where Genuine Spares and back-up service can be obtained in
at least four major towns (Nairobi, Nyeri, Embu and Thika).
c) Body construction and all fitments to conform Cap 403 Kenya Yes(Mandatory)
Traffic Act
d) Chevrons and reflectors fitted on rear to conform to Kenya yes
Traffic Act.
e) Car identity on all Glasses and Lights Yes
f) 12V Rotary warning light and Siren Yes
g) Front and rear stainless steel grills Yes(Mandatory)

SECTION 6
6 SURVEY, PROFILE AND GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS
6.1 ROUTE SELECTION
The Employer will indicate to the Contractor either on maps or during visits to the sites the
proposed route of the transmission line, with approximately positions of the angle and
terminal support and the position of such intermediate supports as it may have been desirable
to determine during preliminary wayleaves negotiations. The Contractor shall give the
Employer the requisite period of notice prior to commencing the survey. This is Hold Point.
6.2 CONTRACTOR SURVEY
6.2.1 Access for Survey

The Contractor’s surveyors shall in all cases announce himself to the occupier/landowner
immediately before entering any private property for the purpose of survey.
6.2.2 Accuracy
Profiles shall be produced as a result of a precision ground or aerial survey, the accuracy of
which shall be such that the vertical tolerance between levels forming the profile and actual
ground level shall not exceed 300 mm, and the measured to an accuracy of not less than 0.2
percent. All levels shall be related to the specified national datum.
6.2.3 Profile Drawings – Size & Scales

Computer plotted profiles on plain plastics drawings sheets will be accepted by the Employer.
The profile shall either be drawn on a mixture of a melinex type material or as otherwise
approved with printed grid lines of increasing thickness in 1, 5, 10 and 50 mm squares and
shall be drawn on the reverse side of the melinex to the grid lines.
However the format of the profile shall not differ from the details specified in the following
clauses.
Unless specified to the contrary the scale of the profile shall be:
Ø 1:2000 horizontally and
Ø 1:200 vertically
The profile shall be plotted with the direction of the line route left to right on profile sheet. In
general individual profile sheet shall commence and finish at tension supports but where this
is not practicable and continuation sheets are found to be necessary the ground line is to be
drawn so that there is an overlap of at least 300 mm between adjacent sheets. The chainage of
each section between tensions structures shall start at zero be on 50mm printed grid line and
not less than 150mm from the left-hand margin. Each section shall normally be started on a
new sheet. The date of survey of each section shall be added.
If more than one section is drawn on one sheet a gap shall be left in the ground line of not
less than 150mm.

6.2.4 Profile Drawings – Details

The following details and information are to be included on the profile drawings:
a. At each angle position “tie– in” sketch shall be provided on the profile sheet. This
sketch shall show clearly the location of the support using as reference where possible
points which can be located on the ground and on the 1:5,000 or closest available
scale of survey map. The direction of the line and angle of deviation are to be shown
stating also whether the deviation is left or right. Where reliable maps of reasonable
scale and accuracy are not available for locating and plotting support positions survey
methods acceptable to the Employer shall be employed to establish grid co-ordinates
supports and ground features shall be related to these.
b. Where ground slope across the line route exceeds 1 in 25 the level of ground left and
right of the centre line shall be recorded at specified horizontal offset distances where
the side slope is uniform. Where the slope breaks upwards beyond this distance levels
will be recoded up to a specified horizontal offset distance. The offset levels shall
indicate on the profile as broken and/or chain lines and the distance off-line started.
c. The profile shall show all changes of level of 300 mm or more along the route centre
line and along the off-set lines. All features such as hedges, fences, graves, ditches,
roads, railways, rivers, buildings, canals, telephone and railway lines and all power
lines shall be shown. Route numbers or name of roads shall be stated or, if
unclassified the destination. Railways are to be given the destination, number of
tracks, whether or not electrified and the level at the top of rail stated.
d. The chainage is to be shown at each 300 m and at every geographic feature or

obstruction. Chainage shall also be given to all pegs.
e. The specified Datum shall be the basis for all levels and the levels above the specified
Datum shall be shown at 10 m vertical interval at the beginning and end of each
profile sheet. Levels shall be shown at each peg on line and at every obstruction or
geographical feature.
f. The visual nature of the ground shall be noted whether cultivated, woodland, etc, with
special reference to marsh soft ground or rock and other relevant information such as
soil instability.
g. All buildings or high obstruction within 30 m of the centre line shall be shown dotted
at their measured height with the distance left or right of line indicated.
h. Where the ground contour rises to a point which would be less than 100 mm from the
top of the profile sheet, the ground line shall be terminated and continued on a new
sheet with an overlap of 300 m of line route.
i. The following detail shall be shown for crossing of power lines:-
§ Voltage and type of construction

§ Ground levels at point of crossing and support structures;
§ Height of top conductor and earth wire at point of crossing and at point of support;

§ Distance from crossing point to support structures along route of line to be

crossed;
§ Angle of crossing;
§ Temperature at time levels were taken (state date and time);
§ Support structures members.
j. Along the bottom of the profile sheet a route map shall be drawn, to the same scale as
the horizontal scale of the profile, showing all relevant details, within a distance of
30m each side of the route centre line. All items covered by sub-paragraphs (a) and (i)
above as appropriate shall be included
k. On tower spot locations, local profile for each tower shall be provided. Stub length
and foundation depth design shall refer local profiles as much as possible.
6.2.5 Support Location on Profiles

The Contractor shall submit to the Employer the requisite copies of the profile drawings upon
which shall be indicated the proposed location and type of each support, spans, section
lengths, (i.e. distances between tension supports), equivalent spans, wind and weight span,
phase conductor swing angles, difference in level between adjacent phase conductor
attachment points and the sag templates used. This is a Hold Point.
In addition, the relevant position of the bottom or lowest phase conductor at the specified
maximum conductor temperature, together with another line parallel to the phase conductor
at the minimum statutory ground clearance, shall be shown on the profile.
6.2.6 Check Survey

The Contractor shall carry out a check survey. Profile drawings/preliminary profile will be
made available to the Contractor, who will be required to check the profile survey and survey
and design final route for approval.
The Contractor is required to check thereon the proposed support positions and submit the
profile to the Employer. Profile details and support locations shall be in accordance with the
preceding clauses. Check survey shall include Contractor notes on final route selected and
shall be approved by Employer; approved centre shall be the transmission line approved
design centre. Design and construction set out will be based on this without changes, and any
deviation shall be reported immediately to the Employer with the proposal for restoring
design centre.
6.3 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
6.3.1 General
Geotechnical investigations shall be undertaken in accordance with the technical
requirements detailed in the following clauses and British standard code of site investigations
BS 5930. Tests shall be to BS 1377 British standard for civil engineering soils properties.
Where required by the Employer, the Contractor or his appointed geotechnical consultant
shall undertake the specified slope stability analysis and design.

The Contractor shall give the Employer the requisite period of notice prior to commencing
the geotechnical investigation. This is a Hold Point.
6.3.2 Level 1
Level 1 geotechnical investigations shall be based on a visual-tactile examination of disturbed
soil samples for the determination of both soil classification and strength.
6.3.3 Level 2
Level 2 geotechnical investigations shall be based on in-situ testing for the determination of
the soil strength and visual tactile examination of disturbed samples for the determination of
soil classification
6.3.4 Level 3
Level 3 geotechnical investigations shall be based on in-situ testing (as level 2) for the
determination of the soil strength and the recovery of disturbed soil samples for the
subsequent laboratory testing.
Laboratory soil classification tests for non-cohesive soils shall be particle size distribution,
moisture content and relative density, whilst those for cohesive soils shall be moisture content
and atterberg limits.
6.3.5 Level 4
Level 4 geotechnical investigations shall be based on a combination of in-situ testing (as level
2) and the recovery of disturbed/undisturbed soil samples for the subsequent laboratory
testing.
6.3.6 Soil and Ground Water Samples

Where specified, soil and ground water samples shall be obtained for determination of the
chemical content i.e. organic matter, sulphate, pH and chloride content.
6.3.7 Geotechnical Investigation Criteria

Geotechnical investigation shall be undertaken to the following criteria:
a) Geotechnical investigation shall be undertaken as near as possible to the tower

site. For test foundations the investigation shall be undertaken as near as possible
to the test site, and shall take account of the theoretical failure surface of the
foundation. ;
b) Time lapses between the investigation and foundation installation shall take into
account any noticeable effect on the geotechnical properties due to rainfall or
seasonal variations in the groundwater level;
c) Depth of investigation shall be:
i. For trial pits 2m; or

ii. the foundation depth plus 1.5 times the maximum base width dimension for
concrete pad and chimney or steel grillage foundations; or
iii. 3m or 5 times shaft diameters ( whichever is greater) below the foundation depth
for drilled shaft, piled foundations; or

iv. at least 2m into rock or hard dense stratum ( NSPT > 50) if this occurs before the
recommended depth; or
v. For uplift or lateral foundation tests not less than 1m below the base of the test
foundation.
d) SPTs (standard penetration tests) should be undertaken at the top of each stratum
and then at 1m intervals in soil or weak rock;
e) PMTs ( Pressure meter tests) should be undertaken in each stratum or as required;
f) CPTs (Cone Penetration Tests) should be taken continuously over depth of

investigation
g) VSTs ( Vane Shear Tests) should be undertaken at top of each stratum and then at
1m intervals;
h) Soil/rock description should be based on disturbed samples taken in each stratum

and thereafter at 1m intervals.
i) Highest ground water level and variation in water level
j) Electrical resistivity of the soil shall be verified on every tower site in accordance
with British standard code CP 1013-1965,

APPENDIX 6.A.1
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
Geotechnical Investigation Level Frequency
Level 2 Every tower site

Electrical resistivity Every tower site
Ground water samples shall be taken at every tension tower position for chemical
analysis.

SECTION 7
7 CONDUCTORS AND FITTINGS
7.1 POWER CONDUCTOR
The power conductor shall be Aluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR) -175mm2
codename “Lynx” and shall comply with IEC 60889. The outermost layer of the conductors
shall be right-handed lay (z-lay). The Aluminium shall be of the highest purity commercially
obtainable and shall not be less than 99.5%. The Contractor shall submit certificates of
analysis giving the percentage and nature of impurities in the metal from which the wires
were made. There shall be no joints in the individual wire of the outer layers of aluminium
wires. All steel core wires unless specified to the contrary shall be hot-dipped galvanized to
comply with the requirements of IEC 60888.
Unless specified to the contrary all conductors shall be uniformly covered with neutral grease
as per IEC 61089. The minimum fill factor of grease shall not be less than 70 percent. Each
layer of wire except the outer layer shall have, both lengthwise and peripherally, an even and
continuous coating of grease. Wax thickened greases shall be applied at a temperature above
the dropping point and shall be substantially free from contaminants.
The grease shall protect the conductors from corrosion in service, not corrode the steel or
aluminium, be compatible with any wire drawing lubricant that might be applied on the
conductor, not flow nor exude from the conductor during storage, transport, erection or
service at temperatures of up to 100 degrees C. In addition the grease should have adequate
resistance to oxidation and conform to relevant current health and safety requirements.
7.2 Technical details of Power Conductor
Nominal section : 175 mm2

Conductor strand : 30/7 (2.79 mm)
Tolerance of diameter: Aluminium : + 1.0%
Steel : + 2.0%
Minimum tensile strength after stranding :
Aluminium : 17.2 kg/mm2
Steel : 128.5 kg/mm2
Minimum coating weight of zinc : 240g/m2
Calculated section : Aluminium : 183.40 mm2

Steel : 42.80 mm2
Total : 226.20 mm2
Outside diameter : 19.53mm
Unit weight of conductor : 0.842kg/m
Ultimate tensile strength (UTS) : 8,140kg

DC resistance at 20 deg. C : 0.1576 Ohm/km

Approximate current carrying capacity : 527 A
7.3 Conductor Sag Design
Sags shall be computed under the following conditions:

Most severe design conditions - Max. wind pressure under min temperature
Max. wind pressure on conductor 385 N/m2
Max air temperature 36 0 C
Min. air temperature 10 0 C.
Min. conductor temperature 00 C
Max. Conductor temperature (continuous loading) 750 C
Max. Conductor temperature (fault conditions) 2000 C
Average conductor temperature 350 C
Factor of safety
- Max. Working tension to UTS more than 2.5
- Everyday stress to UTS more than 5.0
Young’s modulus of aluminium 6,300kg/mm2

Young’s modulus of steel 21,000kg/mm2
Linear expansion coefficient 17.8/ 0 C x 10-6
7.4 DRUMS
The conductors shall be supplied on impregnated drums of approved materials constructed so

as to enable the conductors and earth wire to run smoothly and those as spare materials shall
be supplied on steel drums of approved materials for storage for long duration. Length of
conductors on one drum shall not be less than 2,000m. Actual conductor lengths shall
depend on stacking chart stringing sections and drum schedule so prepared shall be submitted
for approval.
7.5 JOINTS AND REPAIR SLEEVES
Tension joints of the conductors shall be of compression type and shall be free from slipping
off, causing damage to or failure of the complete conductors, earth wire or any parts thereof
at loads less than 95 per cent of the ultimate breaking strength of the conductors and earth
wire.
Electrical conductivity and current carrying capacity of the tension joints for the power
conductors shall not be less than those of equivalent length of the conductors.

The cut ends of steel wires and steel component inside the joint shall be protected from the
weather in an effective and permanent manner.
Aluminium sleeves shall have plugholes for injecting compound.
All tension joints shall be supplied with aluminium fool-proof gauges or anti-displacement
pins for correct positioning, adequate quantity of filling compound in injectors and
aluminium collars for gap filling.
Full details of the joints including an illustration of practices for filling the air gap between
sleeves, method of correct positioning of steel sleeves, gauges for ascertaining the
compressed size, etc. shall be submitted with the tender.
Repair sleeves for the power conductors shall be of the compression type and the conditions
stated above for the tension joints shall apply to the repair sleeves where applicable.
7.6 Accessories for Power Conductors and Earth wire
In order to prevent fatigue of power conductors and earth wires due to repeated vibrations
caused by breeze, the following countermeasures shall be applied.
a) Trunnion type suspension clamps

b) Vibration dampers
c) Armour rods.
7.6.1 Trunnion type suspension clamps

Suspension clamps shall be of trunnion type, made of aluminium alloy and as light as
possible. They shall be designed to avoid any possibility of deforming the stranded
conductors and earth wires and of separating the individual strands and shall be free to pivot
in the vertical plane containing the conductors and earth wires.
Suspension clamps except jumper suspension sets shall have a suitable dimension for
clamping the conductor with preformed armour rods; and shall not permit the complete
conductor with armour rods to split at load less than 2,250kg for ACSR. Particular attention
shall be paid to the elimination of corona emission from all parts of the suspension clamp.
7.6.2 Vibration Dampers

Vibration dampers shall be of Stockbridge type for both conductors and earth wire. The
dampers shall be applied in all conductors and earth wires in every span except slack spans
into the substations. The dampers shall be designed to be attached to the conductors and earth
wire in a manner, which will prevent damage thereto and free drop of the weight in service.
Clamping bolts shall be provided with domed self-locking nuts designed to prevent corrosion
to the thread.
The nominal weight of damper shall be 12 pounds (5.44kg) for the conductors and 4 pounds
(1.81kg) for the earthwire. The numbers of the dampers to be installed per span shall be:

a) 2 pieces per conductor or earthwire for spans up to 600 m and,

b) 4pieces for the spans longer than 600 m.
First and second dampers will be positioned at 1.1m and 2.2m for power conductors and 0.6m
and 1.2 m for earthwires respectively from the centre of suspension clamps or from the mouth
of tension clamps.
7.6.3 Armour Rods

Preformed armour rods shall be applied to all suspension points of the power conductors
except jumper suspension points.
Suspension clamps for those conductors protected by armour rods shall be suitable for the
enlarged conductors.
7.7 CORONA AND RADIO INTERFERENCE

The design of all line conductor fittings, vibration dampers, etc., shall avoid sharp corners or
projections which would produce high electrical stress in normal working. The design of
adjacent metal parts and matching surfaces should be such as to maintain good electrical
contact under service conditions. Particular care shall be taken during manufacture of
conductors and fittings and during subsequent handling to ensure smooth surfaces free from
abrasion.

SECTION 8
8 OPTICAL FIBRE GROUND WIRE
8.1 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
The overhead earth wire shall be Fibre Optic Ground Wire (OPGW) with a minimum of 48
strands.
The fibre optic earth wire supplied shall be suitable for installation on transmission line and
shall be supplied complete with all necessary fittings and optical joint boxes. The earthwire
fittings and optical joint boxes shall be type approved.
The fibre optic earth wire shall comprise an optical sub-unit containing optical fibres over
which shall be laid aluminium, aluminium alloy or aluminium coated steel strands. The clad
steel wire incorporated in fibre optic earthwire shall comply with the requirements of IEC
61232. Shaped aluminium or aluminium alloy wire sections shall conform to the
requirements of the appropriate IEC standard.
The optical sub-unit shall withstand the temperature rise associated with the specified
lightning fault current flowing in the earthwire without damage. The fibre optic earthwire
(OPGW) shall be manufactured in continuous lengths of not less than 2,000 m.
The overall system design of the fibre optic system shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
a) Single failure or degradation in any optical fibre not more than one year averaged
over five years;
b) Failures or degradations affecting more than one optical fibre, not more than one in
ten years;
c) Increase in optical system transmission attenuation due to accumulated ageing and

other effects at the end of five years and not more than 0.05 dB/km.
8.2 OPTICAL FIBRES
Optical fibres shall be single mode fibre and shall conform to IEC 793-2-BI.
The fibre coating material shall be mechanically strippable. The optical fibres shall be
capable of being jointed by fusion technique.
There shall be no measurable long term or short-term optical attenuation change due to the
temperature rise associated with a fault current flowing in an earth wire, or a lightning strike
on the earth wire.

8.3 OPGW FITTINGS
The fibre optic earth wire shall be with approved conductor fittings. The application of these
fittings shall not damage the earth wire or fibres, either mechanically or optically.
At each support, a bypass device shall be provided to guide the cable around the earth wire
fittings associated with the support.
8.4 OPTICAL JOINT BOXES
Optical joint boxes shall be provided to protect the splice joint of optical fibres, either when
individual lengths of the fibre optic OPGW, are jointed or between the fibre optic earth wire
and the underground fibre optic cable.
The joint boxes shall consist of external steel or die cast aluminium housing providing
protection to IEC 529 IP 44 and an internal die cast aluminium or high impact plastic ABS
box to IEC 529 IP54
The external housing shall be designed so that the rainwater is directed away from the door
and there shall be no water ingress when the door is opened.
The joint boxes shall be supplied complete with all fittings to secure and seal the cable in the
gland plates or blank the unused spigots. The cable cleats to secure the fibre optic OPGW or
underground cable shall be fitted inside the box. The cleats shall not have a detrimental effect
on the performance of the optical fibres when tightened to the recommended torque.
The top and bottom of the joint box shall be vented and the vents provided with the vermin
shields.
The box shall be supplied complete with internal splice cassettes to accommodate the
required number of splices. The glands shall be fitted to accommodate either the fibre optic
OPGW or underground fibre optic cable.
8.5 FIXING CLAMPS
A bolted clamping system shall be used to attach the OPGW to the inside of the support,
without drilling or modifications to the support steel work.
The attachment clamps shall be capable of being attached and detached from the support,
without affecting the OPGW.
8.6 NON – METALLIC UNDERGROUND FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
The fibre optic cable shall be circular in cross section and shall be designed so that any cable
strain is so directly imported on the optical fibres. The cable shall not include any metallic
components to prevent high-induced voltages when used in switching or substation
compounds.

8.7 MATERIALS
8.7.1 Fibre optic earth wire materials

External aluminium, aluminium alloy or aluminium coated steel strands.
8.7.2 Optical Joint boxes

Optical joint boxes shall be made from either a suitable grade of aluminium alloy complying
with the requirements of BS 1490 and / or BS EN 1676 or steel complying with requirements
of BS 3100
8.7.3 Fixing Clamps

Fixing clamps shall be made from a suitable grade of aluminium alloy complying with the
requirements of BS 1490 and / or BS EN 1676. Bolts shall be made from mild steel grade
S275JR to BS EN 10 025. Bolts and nuts shall be ISO Metric Black Hexagon to BS 4190 and
shall unless otherwise specified be threaded ISO Metric Coarse Pitch to BS 3643: Part 2,
Tolerance Class 7h/8g.
8.8 PROTECTIVE TREATMENT
8.8.1 Fibre optic earth wire

Where two layers of wire strands are provided over the optical sub-unit, the external surface
of the optical sub-unit and the inner strand layer shall be greased, using approved conductor
grease.
8.8.2 Ingress of Moisture

The cable shall be capped before shipment to prevent the ingress of water.
8.8.3 Optical Joint boxes

Optical joint boxes (steel exterior) shall be hot dipped galvanised after manufacture to meet
the requirements of BS 729.
8.9 INSTALLATION
8.9.1 General
The supplier of the OPGW shall be responsible for the supervision of installation by the
Contractor; to ensure that system reliability requirements are met.
8.9.2 Workmanship
The Contractor shall ensure that the fibre optic cable are not strained or damaged either
mechanically or optically during stringing and/ or jointing.
8.9.3 Fibre optic joints

Optical fibre joints in the OPGW, or between the OPGW and the non-metallic underground
fibre optic cable, shall be housed in optical joint boxes. The joint boxes shall be located
immediately above the anti-climbing device for convenient access by technical personnel. All
joint boxes shall be earthed to the support steel work using approved multi-wire / multi-strand
flexible aluminium earth bond.

8.10 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
The terminal equipment shall be the type SDH STM-1 optical terminal Communication
equipment in Kutus Substation.
The SDH STM-1 multiplexing should have provisions for protection, SCADA and voice
communications, including all necessary interface cards. This will provide for new
protection, SCADA and voice signals installed under this project as well as any existing
services which the client requires shall be carried on the optical fibre.
Lead in cable shall be provided at the substations to connect the OPGW to the terminal
equipment.
Spare fibres will be terminated in the building in such a way as to facilitate their future use.
8.10.1 Remote Terminal Units.

A Substation Control and Monitoring System (SCMS) shall be installed at the Substation for
purposes of Supervisory of the Substation as well as the Control of the substation Equipment.
8.10.2 Scope of Work

The Contractor shall include detailed system design, manufacture, supply, installation,
testing, commissioning, remedying of defects, maintaining the works during the defects
liability period and any incidental work necessary for the proper completion of the work in
accordance with this contract.
The existing Masinga-Kiganjo line already has an optical fibre earth wire. The Contractor
shall open this connection, and complete the OPGW link from Masinga to the new Kutus SS,
and the subsequent extension from Kutus to Kiganjo SS.
Detailed requirements are as follows:-

§ System design – The system design and preparation of Contractor's drawings to
approval of the Engineer
§ Supply and installation of fibre optic lead-in cables including mounting hardware and
splicing
§ Supply and installation of lead in cables to the equipment terminals
§ Supply and installation of fibre optic terminal and multiplexing
§ Supply and installation of supervisory management system and cabling to the relevant
distribution frame(s)
§ Supply and installation of DC power supplies to the new substation.
§ Factory testing of the terminal equipment and supervisory prior to delivery of the
supplied equipment.
§ Testing and commissioning of the systems up to the terminal equipment in Kutus
§ Multiplexed signals for permissive and direct inter-trips for the 132 kV circuit.

8.11 QUALITY CONTROL
8.11.1 Types of Tests

Type, sample and routine tests shall be undertaken on the OPGW, their associated fittings,
non-metallic underground fibre optic cable and optical fibres in accordance with the
requirements of specification, CCITT G652, IEC 793 and IEC 794 as appropriate.
8.11.2 OPGW Tests

a) Fatigue
The Contractor shall submit documentary evidence to show the fatigue life of the OPGW
including that of the optical sub-unit compared to that of a conventional conductor of similar
characteristics e.g. diameter, mass, stranding etc.
b) Stress-Strain
A sample of OPGW not less that 10m length, complete with the proposed end fittings shall be
subject to a stress-strain test. The test shall be undertaken in accordance with IEC 1089
Annex B and the measuring techniques in accordance with IEC 794-1-E1.
c) Tensile performance
The test shall be undertaken in accordance with the load conditions specified in IEC 1089
Annex B and the measuring techniques in accordance with IEC 794-1-E1.
d) Crush and Impact

The test shall be undertaken in accordance with the recommendations of IEC 7941-1-E3 and
IEC –794-1-E4.
The crush test shall be undertaken by applying a 10kN load for 1 minute to the OPGW via
two 50mm x 50 mm flat plates.
The impact test shall be undertaken by dropping a 4 kg weight from a height of 150 mm onto
the end of a 20mm diameter steel mandrel places on the OPGW. These should be done 20
times.
e) Temperature cycling
The optical performance under temperature cycling shall be tested in accordance with IEC
794-1-F1 with specified temperature ranges for a duration of 4 hours. The test should be
undertaken twice.
f) Water Ingress
The optical sub-unit shall be tested for water ingress in accordance with IEC 794-1-F5
g) Fault Current
A sample of OPGW not less than 2 metres in length shall be subjected to a fault current
pulse. The test shall be performed twice with an interval of 30 minutes between tests. After
the second impulse the OPGW shall be dismantled and the optical cable examined throughout
its length for any signs of deterioration.
h) Lightning Strike
Tests shall be carried out to verify the effectiveness of the OPGW to withstand the effects of
a lightning strike. The test shall consider both an initial stroke and a follow through. The test

shall be carried out on a sample of OPGW not less than 2 metres long. The acceptable criteria
shall be that earthwire’s calculated residual strength is not less than 90 percent of the original
stated ultimate strength.
8.11.3 Optical Fibres

Optical fibres shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of IEC 793.
8.11.4 Optical joint Boxes

Optical joint boxes shall be visually inspected to ensure they meet the specified requirements.
8.11.5 Non- metallic underground Fibre Optic cable

Non-metallic underground fibre optic cable and the optical fibres shall be tested in
accordance with the requirements of IEC 793 and IEC 794 as appropriate.
8.11.6 Fibre Optic cable

All fibre optic cables shall be tested prior to dispatch using an OTDR on each fibre and other
tests detailed in this document.
8.11.7 Test Certificates

Test records, covering type and sample tests shall be provided.

APPENDIX 8.A.4
TEST EQUIPMENT
The following test equipment shall be supplied and shall remain the property of the Employer
after the completion of the site installation. The equipment shall be delivered to the
Employer’s site depot complete with suitable packaging after completion of the installation
tests.
a) One-Portable Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) with 1300 and 1550 nm
modules. Storage and printing capabilities of traces shall be provided;
b) Two- Portable Optical Power meters for 1300 and 1550nm;
c) Two- Portable High Stability Laser Sources for optical power measurements at 1300
and 1550 nm wavelengths:
d) An optical fibre fusion splicing machine which shall be of the automatic type,
designed to carry out fibre core alignment, pre-cleaning and fusion splicing as a fully
integrated and properly co-ordinated sequence of functions. It shall only be necessary
for the operator to correctly prepare the fibre ends and carry out preliminary
alignment prior to initiating the slicing sequence. Optical devices and light sources
that are utilised in the fibre system shall form an integral part of the fusion splicing
machine and the alignment process. Devices that rely on the use of remotely mounted
light sources will not be acceptable. The fusion splicing machine shall be capable of
producing splices with an average attenuation value of less than 0.05 dB.
e) Digital galvanization thickness gauge.
f) Schmidt concrete hardness test hammer.

SECTION 9
9 LINE INSULATION
The transmission line for the project is aligned on an elevation level of 1500-2500m above
sea level. The area has high humidity levels, tropical sunshine and prone to medium pollution
by agricultural activities.
Silicon-rubber long-rod type Composite Insulators of the approved type shall be used to
support the power conductors of the Transmission line. All insulator units will be composed
of top and bottom arcing rings to equalize the voltage distribution over the insulator. The top
shed of the insulators shall also have a larger diameter to prevent waste from birds and
animals tracking down along the insulator.
9.1 INSULATORS DESIGN

The insulator units shall be designed to withstand the design service voltages including
lightning, switching and power frequency, the mechanical loads relevant to the installation-
service-maintenance conditions, the service temperature and environmental effects. Internal
stresses due to expansion and contraction of any part of the insulator unit shall not lead to
deterioration.
The insulators should withstand wind pressures of up to a maximum of 385N/ m2.
The design of insulator units shall be with end over mould or such as to avoid local corona
formation and no significant radio interferences shall be exhibited. The long rod Insulator
units shall comply with the requirements of IEC 61109.
9.2 FITTINGS
All fittings to make each composite insulator set complete for beneficiary use shall be
supplied and included in the rate for each insulator unit. Such bolts, nuts, washers, cotter pins
and retaining pins with necessary spares as may be necessary for the use for erection shall be
deemed to be included in the appropriate items.
Ball and socket couplings shall be in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60120/16.
Sockets shall have “R” type security clips in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60372.
Clevis tongue couplings shall be in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60471.
All ferrous fittings shall be made of steel, ductile iron or malleable iron hot dip galvanized,
and shall have sufficient strength for abrasion and weariness produced by repeated vibration.
Cotter pins shall be made of non-ferrous metal or stainless steel and designed as the self-
locking type.
The arcing ring shall be provided for the top and bottom of each insulator string and shall be
of such design and shape that it reduces the voltage across the part of the insulator adjacent to
the conductor for each insulator string, to a value which prevents visual corona formation on
the metal caps and pins of the insulators and shall minimize the Radio / Video interference
voltage from complete insulator and hardware assemblies when operated at the voltage up to
420 KV.

The arcing rings shall be of such design that when added to suspension and tension
assemblies, the resulting flash-over values of the complete insulator string shall not be
reduced below the percentage indicated hereunder, of corresponding flash over values with
the rings omitted.
The percentages are:
a) Wet 50 Hz: 100%
b) 1.2 / 50 Impulse: 96%
The rings shall be of hot dip galvanized steel or Aluminium tube having outside diameter as
required for corona control and minimum thickness of 2.5mm. Both inner and outer surfaces
shall be galvanized to the required specifications (BS 729). The details of the rings, brackets
and methods of mounting shall be of such design that the rings may be readily replaced under
‘hotline’ maintenance.
The horizontal distance between corona rings at suspension rings at suspension insulator
strings shall be kept as small as practicable to accomplish the required reduction in Radio/
Video Interference (RVI).
All the accessories and the fitting offered against this specification shall be subjected to
corona test. The corona shall not take place and shall extinguish at the voltages specified i.e.
when a voltage of the specified value applied (Phase to Neutral i.e. RMS) the corona shall
appear and shall disappear again at the specified value of voltage.
9.3 Pollution
The design of insulator units should take into account the principles contained in the IEC
60815 for medium pollution environment. For this project the minimum creepage value of 25
mm/kV shall be applied (Creepage distance of 3988 mm).
9.4 Zinc Collars

The insulator unit cap and pin shall be fitted with zinc-collared pins to prevent cracking due
to pin corrosion caused by the effects of pollution and high humidity in the project area.
9.5 Insulator Protective Device

The design of insulator fittings including corona shields shall comply with the following
requirements:
a) Shall effectively protect the insulator unit and fittings from damage caused by power
arcs.
b) Shall effectively improve the voltage distribution along the insulator unit;
c) Shall effectively improve the corona performance of the insulator unit.
d) Shall be designed in such a way as not to subject to breakage fatigue due to wind
induced vibration;
e) Shall withstand the specified mechanical load
f) Shall be suitable for live line maintenance

9.6 Materials
The silicon rubber composite insulator shall comply with requirements of IEC 61109. The
tension bearing material shall be E-CR Fibre Glass and the housing and sheds made of HTV
silicone rubber.
Insulator caps and pin bases of malleable cast iron shall be manufactured from a suitable
grade of MCI complying with the requirement of BS EN 1563 for spheroidal graphite or BS
EN 1562 for white heart and peralitic.
Insulator end fitting of forged or cast aluminium alloy shall be manufactured from a suitable
grade of aluminium alloy complying with the requirements of BS 1472 or BS 1490 and/or BS
EN 1676 respectively.
Security ‘R” clips shall be of phosphor-bronze composition in accordance with the

requirements of BS 2870 and supplied in the half-hard condition with a minimum harness of
155 VPN
Zinc collars shall have a total impurity not greater than 0.05 percent and shall comply with
the requirement of BS EN 1179.
All insulator caps, bases and pins shall either be inherently resistant to atmospheric corrosion
or a suitably protected against corrosion, such as may occur in transit, storage and in service.
All ferrous parts which will be exposed to the atmosphere in service, except those made in
the appropriate grade of stainless steel, shall be protected by hot-dipped galvanising to
comply with the requirements of BS 729.
9.7 TESTS
Type, sample and routine tests shall be undertaken on the insulator units in accordance with
the IEC 61109.
9.8 MINIMUM CLEARANCES
9.8.1 Minimum Clearance of Live Parts to Towers

As Appendix 9.A.2 below

APPENDIX 9.A.1
Electrical & Mechanical specifications for the Composite Insulators
Specifications Suspension Tension
1 Maximum System Voltage (kV) 145 145

2 Pollution Category Heavy Heavy
Category -III Category -III
3 Dielectric Silicon rubber Silicon rubber
4 One-minute power frequency withstand 290 290
voltage, 50 Hz, wet. (kV)
5 Lighting impulse withstand voltage, 685 685
1,2/50 pos. (kV)
6 Power arc current 25 kA, 0.5 sec
7 Minimum creepage distance (mm) 3988 3988
8 Specified mechanical load, tension (kN) 70 100
9 Minimum Arc Gap (mm) 1450 1450
10 Material fittings Steel h.d.g Steel h.d.g
11 Material of rod E- CR Glass E- CR Glass
12 Material of housing and sheds HTV- Silicone HTV Silicone
13 Socket IEC 60120/16 IEC 60120/16
14 Ball IEC 60120/16 IEC 60120/16
15 Arcing Rings material Steel h.d.g Steel h.d.g
16 Arcing rings IEC 61284 IEC 61284

APPENDIX 9.A.2
MINIMUM CLEARANCES
Minimum clearance of live parts to towers
The minimum electrical clearances of live parts to earthed structures for the project shall be
as follows (See Figures 1.A.2):
a) In still air (vertical position) : 1350mm

b) Under 200 swing of suspension insulator set or jumper conductors : 1350mm
c) Under 400 swing of suspension insulator set or jumper conductors : 1140mm
d) Under 600 swing of suspension insulator set or jumper conductors : 830mm
Minimum Ground clearances of conductors
Above general terrain 7.2m

Above main roads 7.5m
Above other Power lines 3.2m
Above Telephone lines 3.2m
Above railways 8.5m

SECTION 10
10 TOWERS
10.1 TYPE OF TOWER
The line shall be a double circuit of power conductor Lynx with overhead Optical Ground
Wire on both circuits.
Towers shall be self-supporting and broad base galvanised steel lattice type with body and
hillside extensions. The hillside extensions shall be applied for tower legs on the slope so that
legs are suited to the original slope of tower site and also that excessive land cutting around
foundations and land collapse is prevented.
The following tower types shall be designed for the project in order to meet various tower
positions and loadings economically.
(a) Type-S : Use at tangential positions or angle points up to 2 degrees of

horizontal deviation, provided with suspension type insulator
sets.
(b) Type-L : Use at positions of light angle up to 15 degrees of horizontal

angle deviation with tension type insulator sets.
(c) Type-M : Use at positions of medium angle up to 30 degrees of

horizontal angle deviation with tension insulator sets.
(d) Type-H : Use at positions of heavy angle up to 60 degrees of horizontal

angle deviation with tension insulator sets.
(e) Type-HS : Use at positions of specifically heavy angle up to 75 degrees

of horizontal angle deviation with tension type insulator sets.
(f) Type-T : Use at positions of line termination or 90 degrees of horizontal

angle deviation with tension type insulator sets.
The actual types and number of towers shall depend on the profile of the selected route and
actual tower spotting.
10.2 TOWER DESIGN GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

Towers shall have the general arrangements and configurations shown in the drawings
included with the specification. They shall be designed to resist the specified ultimate system
loading. Clearances between live parts and supporting steelwork and between the phase
conductors and ground or other obstacles shall be as specified.
All tower designs shall be such as to facilitate inspection, painting, maintenance, repairs and
operation with the continuity of supply being the prime consideration.

The design shall be such that the number of different parts shall be as few as possible to
facilitate transport, erection and inspection. The maximum weight of the heaviest single
member should be limited to that within the normal lifting capability of the proposed erection
equipment.
Main leg members of lattice steel towers shall be formed of the maximum single lengths,
appropriate to the body or leg extensions and shall not without the Employer’s approval
incorporate additional spliced sections.
For lattice steel towers a fully triangulated system of bracings shall preferably be adopted. If
full triangulation is not adopted, the overall stability and secondary bending stresses must be
considered in the design.
Where fabrication processes employed adversely affect the material properties, or introduce
zones of high stress concentration the overall design of the structures shall take such factors
into account.
Cross-arms shall be so arranged that they can be disconnected in the plane of the longitudinal
face of the support without disturbing any members forming part of the support body.
The cross-arms should be designed to take and be compatible with the AB CHANCE Live
Line maintenance tools and equipment.
Appropriate bird guard protective devises shall be installed to keep away birds from roosting
directly over the insulator units.
10.2.1 Height of Towers

Height of towers shall be determined in the under-mentioned way:
H = Gc + Sg + Li + Hc + Hg
Where,
· H = Total height of tower.
· Gc = Necessary ground clearance of power conductors above ground or
other objectives.
· Sg = Maximum conductor sag
· Li = Length of a suspension insulator set, but nil for a tension type towers.
· Hc = Vertical spacing of upper conductor cross -arm spacing
· Hg = Vertical spacing between upper conductor cross-arm and overhead earthwire.
Towers shall be provided with body extensions in a 3 m step to a standard height for
maintaining necessary conductor ground clearance mentioned in APPENDIX 1.A.2 on
various ground profiles. In addition to the body extensions, each leg will have hillside
extensions in a 1 m step to suit for the original ground slope and ensure that cutting ground to
level setting will not be used. Standard tower structures are shown in Appendix 1.A.1 as well
as insulation clearance diagram of conductors.

10.2.2 Design Span
The design of all towers shall provide for the following basic, wind and weight spans:
Type of Tower S L M H HS T
Basic span (m) 350 350 350 350 350 350
Wind span (m) 350 350 350 350 350 350
Weight span (m) 700 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
Uplift Weight (m) 0 -300 -300 -300 -300 -300
The term basic span means the horizontal distance between centres of adjacent supports on
the level ground which the height of standard towers is derived with the specified conductor
clearances to ground in still air at maximum temperature.
The term wind span means half the sum of adjacent horizontal span lengths supported on any
one tower.
The term uplift weight means the weights of conductors and overhead earthwire supported
upwards at any one tower for reinforcing strength of cross arms.
10.2.3 Design Loads

Structural loading shall refer, ASCE Manual and Report on Engineering Practice No. 74 -
1991 “Guidelines for electrical transmission line structural loading”.
The following loads shall be applied in the design of towers:
(a) Wind Loads

-
on power conductors and overhead earthwire : 385N/m2
(On the projected area of conductor or wire)
- On tower structures : 690N/ m2

(On the projected area of structure members)
- On insulator sets : 385N/ m2
(b) Maximum working Tensions of Conductor and Earthwire

- Power conductor Lynx : 22,500 N
- Overhead optical fibre earthwire : 14,100 N
(c) Vertical Loads

- Tower structures: actual weights of tower structures including accessories
- Power conductors: Weight of conductors of specified weight span with
accessories
- Overhead optical fibre earthwire: weight of specified weight span with
accessories
- Erection Loads: such loads as workers’ weights on tower members, reaction
of temporarily backstays during stringing operation, etc

(d) Horizontal Angle Effect

-Power conductors and overhead earthwire : horizontal component of
maximum working tension of
conductors and earthwire due to
the specified horizontal angle
deviation.
The towers shall be designed for the following wind and weight spars.
TYPE OF TOWER S L M H HS T
Wind Span [m]
- Normal working condition [m] 350 350 350 350 350 350
- Broken wire condition [m] 260 260 260 260 260 260
Weight Span [m]
- Normal working condition [m] 700 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
-Broken wire condition [m] 500 900 900 900 900 900
Uplift weight for cross arms - 300 300 300 300 300
10.2.4 Design Conditions

(a) Assumed Normal Loading Condition:
The assumed maximum simultaneous working loading on towers shall be as follows:

(i) Vertical loads : as above-mentioned.
(ii) Transverse loads : wind loads horizontal angle deviation effects
(iii) Longitudinal loads : wind loads and erection loads but together with
maximum working tensions of power conductors and
overhead earthwire for their termination for Type-T
tower.
(b) Assumed Broken-Wire Condition:

Under the condition, any one power conductor or an earthwire is assumed to be broken at
their maximum working tensions in addition to the loads under the normal condition. In the
case of Type-S tower, the pull will be assumed to be reduced to 70% of the specified
maximum working tensions.
(c) Factor of Safety:

The following factors of safety for tower structures shall be applied in the design.
(i) More than 2.5 for the synthetic maximum load under the normal loading
condition.
(ii) More than 1.5 for the synthetic maximum load under the broken-wire
condition.

Those factors of safety shall be proved under tower loading tests on the proto-type towers in
the manufacturer’s testing station, and there should be no failure or permanent distortion
during the tests when 100% loading is sustained for five minutes.
10.2.5 Design of Towers

Latticed steel structures shall be designed with geometric configurations based on structural
strength, electrical, economic, and safety requirements. Member forces caused by the design
factored loads shall be determined by established principles of structural analysis.
Each type of towers shall be designed so that no failure or permanent distortion shall occur
when tested with applied force equivalent to 2.5 times the maximum simultaneous working
loadings specified in the Clause 10.2.4 [Normal Working Loading] and also equivalent to 1.5
times the maximum simultaneous working loadings resulting from the assumed broken wire
condition. Design loads shall consider:
a) Minimum legislated levels

b) Client specifications including factors of safety,
c) Expected climatic conditions,
d) Line security provisions,
e) Design life of not less than 50 years,
f) Construction and maintenance operations.
The ultimate design stress, obtained from the working stress multiplied by the factor of safety
of 2.5 under the normal condition and 1.5 under the broken wire condition, in tension
members shall not exceed the yield point of materials. The ultimate design stress, obtained
from the working stress multiplied by the above mentioned factor of safety, in compression
members shall not exceed a figure obtained from an approved formula to be entered in
Tender based on the yield point of materials. Alternately, formulas in the American Society
of Civil Engineers standard for the design of self supporting latticed steel transmission
structures ASCE 10- 97 and ASCE Manual and Report on Engineering Practice No. 74
guidelines for electrical transmission line structural loading shall refer.
Tower design report shall consist of full structural analysis report showing correctness of
dimensional detail calculations, tower profile/layout drawings, shop detail drawings, erection
drawings and bills of materials. Shop detail drawings shall be approved by the producing
utility Engineer of Record (EOR) regarding compliance with the purchaser’s specifications
and the strength requirements of the design.
Designed tower full scale prototype proof test to BS EN 60652: 2004 loading tests on
overhead line structures shall be conducted and approved before tower materials shop
production and delivery to site.
10.2.6 Materials and Fabrication

The towers shall be fabricated with mild and/or high tensile steel of the finest quality or other
approved materials, of which mechanical properties shall comply with Grade Fe 430 and Fe
510 specified in ISO 630-1980, BS 5950-1/2 or equivalent.

No member of the tower shall be less than 8 mm in thickness and 50 mm in width of flange
for leg members of towers and main members of the cross-arm, and 6 mm and 45 mm for the
web and nominal members respectively.
The slenderness ratio shall not exceed 150 for the leg and arm members, 200 for the web
members and 250 for the nominal members as compression member and 350 for tension only
member.
All the connection shall be made by mild and/or high tensile steel bolts and nuts. No bolt
shall be less than 12 mm in diameter. All bolts and nuts shall be provided with approved
spring washers. Antitheft bolts shall be used from ground level to the tower anti-climb level.
Bolt holes shall not be more than 1.5 mm larger in diameter than the corresponding diameter
of bolts. Holes shall be drilled for the members not less than 13 mm in thickness. For the
members having thickness below 13 mm, holes may be drilled or punched, but the former is
preferred.
All the steel members should have clearly identifiable part numbers which enable quick
identification of similar parts. The letters ‘KPLC’ should also be inscribed on each bracing-
by punching or any other suitable method, with more than one inscription for parts of length
greater than 0.5m.
All burs shall be removed completely by reaming and smoothing before hot-deep
galvanising.
10.3 Tower Accessories

The following accessories shall be provided for every tower.
(i) Anti-climbing device and climbing steps: All towers will be provided with the
anti-climb device on each leg at the height of 3 m to 5 m above the highest ground
level at all tower locations. The device installed on the step-bolted legs shall be
provided on all towers. Gates shall be designed to open upwards only and shall be
secured with galvanised bolts and nuts. No padlocks are required.
Each tower shall be provided with step-bolts of an approved type on diagonal

sides of the tower at a spacing no more than 380mm, starting immediately above
the anti-climbing device and continuing to the earth wires.
Holes for removal step-bolts below the anti-climbing guards shall be provided at
not more than 380mm centres on the step legs.
(ii) Danger, Number and Helicopter patrol plates: Danger plate which shows
warning sign for tower climbing of other people than maintenance crew will be
provided on all towers.
Number plates which show tower number set serially from Sagana to Kutus will
also be installed on every tower, both sides.
On the top of every section tower, and every 10th tower, additional number plates
will be provided on both sides to aid helicopter patrol over the transmission line.

Lettering and size of plates shall be to the Employer’s requirements, and should be
both sides of the line for clear identification when patrolling from either end.
All plates shall be of anti-corrosive material. If enamelled iron plates are used, the
whole surface of each plate including the back and edges shall be properly
covered and resistant to corrosion. On all plates the colours shall be permanent
and free from fading. With enamelled plates, washers or fibre or other approved
material shall be provided back and front of the securing bolts.
(iii) Tower Earthing: No separate earth conductor from top to bottom of towers is
required and earthing continuity will therefore depend on surface contact between
bolted members.
All structures shall be provided with means for connecting earthing devices at or
around nominal ground level, on each leg and for connecting earth wire bonds to
each top cross-arm or earth wire peak.
Each leg of towers will have an earthing rod underneath its foundation to act as
basic grounding required by good transmission line Engineering. Basic grounding
shall be constructed in such a way that isolation from the tower and concrete
foundation is possible to allow earthing survey if required during line service life.
Maximum earthing resistance of a tower is targeted on 10 ohms, and in case of

higher resistance than 10 ohms, additional horizontal counterpoise earthing system
will be added in the ground longitudinally to the line route with more than 50 cm
depth. The rate entered in the schedule of prices shall include for all necessary
fittings and shall be adjusted at the variation rate for increased or reduced fittings.
(iv) Aircraft Warning Devices: Due to the activity of aircraft in the vicinity of
certain parts of the transmission line, it shall be necessary to mount warning
spheres on earthwires at some locations. Aircraft warning spheres shall be
capable of being clamped securely to overhead earthwire. The sphere itself shall
be of plastic or fibreglass construction of at least 0.5m in diameter and coloured
orange or yellow as required by local regulations. The Contractor is to enter rates
against appropriate item in the schedule of prices for the above and he will be
advised early in the contract of actual requirements.
(v) Bolts: Where appropriate all metal parts hall be secured with bolts and nuts with
single spring washers. When in position the bolts shall project through the
corresponding nuts by at least three threads, but such projections shall not exceed
10mm. No screwed threads shall form part of a shearing plane between members.
In order to safeguard the tower members from theft; special anti-theft bolts shall
be applied from ground level up to the lower cross-arm level. The bolts shall be
approved by the Employer. The bolts are of the type that shears once the full
torque has been applied.

The nuts of all bolts attaching phase conductor insulator set, earthwire sets,
maintenance brackets/plates shall be locked in an approved manner preferably by
locknuts.
The bolts of any one diameter in a tower shall be one grade of steel. Leg members
shall be joined in such a way that electrical continuity is maintained to ground.
(vi) Rectangular and Auxiliary Cross Arm

The type H, HS and T towers may be provided with rectangular arms where
horizontal angle exceeds 45 degree.
The prices of the rectangular arm set shall be included in the prices for the towers.
(vii) Spare Towers

Five sets of spare suspension tower shall be provided, and one set each for section
and angle towers used in the line. Spare bracings shall also be provided, sufficient
for ten (10) standard towers up to the lower cross-arm level. Spares shall be
packed and labelled for easy identification. Packed spares shall be delivered in a
minimum 20-foot ISO container storage to proposed Kutus 132/33kV substation.
10.4 MATERIALS
All steel shall comply with BS EN 10025 or BS EN 10210 as appropriate, unless
otherwise specified and shall be suitable for all the usual fabrication processes,
including hot and cold working within the specified ranges.
The quality of finished steel shall be in accordance with BS EN 10163. All steel shall
be free from blisters, scale, laminations, segregations and other defects. There shall be
no rolling laps at toes of angles or rolled-in mill scale.
Unless specified to the contrary the following grades of steel shall be applicable:
a) Mild steel shall be either grade S235JRG2 or S275JR.
b) High tensile steel shall be grade S355JR for sections less than 20 mm thick and
S355JO for sections greater or equal to 20mm thick, except for plates which shall
be greater or equal to 40mm thick.
10.5 WORKMANSHIP
All steel lattice members shall be cut to jig and all holes in steelwork shall be drilled or
punched to jig using CNC machine. All steel parts shall be carefully cut and holes located so
that when the members are in position the holes will be opposite each other before being
bolted up. The drilling, cutting, punching and bending of all fabricated steelwork shall be
such as to prevent any possibility of irregularity occurring which might introduce difficulty in
the erection of structures on site. High tensile steel members shall be bent hot. Care shall be
taken not to punch holes too close to the edge of members.

Means shall be provided to enable the Employer to carry out such checking of members, as
he may consider necessary. Built-up sections, when finished, shall be true and free from all
kinks, twists and open joints and the materials shall not be strained in any way.
In order to check the workmanship, not less than 1 per cent, of the members corresponding to
each type of tower or cross-arm shall be selected at random and assembled to form complete
latticed supports or cross-arms in the presence of the Employer representative at the
manufacturer’s works.

SECTION 11
11 FOUNDATIONS
11.1 General
Concrete pad and chimney type foundations will be applied to most of the towers, the design
of the concrete foundations of the towers shall be performed based on the requirements and
assumptions set out below, and the details of the design and drawings for each type of
foundations shall be submitted for approval.
Such design of foundations for the towers are subject to modifications to suit the site
conditions as indicated in writing by the Engineer during execution of the Contract without
any price adjustment of the items of the foundation stubs and foundations.
11.2 Concrete Block Foundation

Prior to determination of the type of foundation to be used, the contractor shall carry out
geotechnical investigations to BS 5930 and BS 1377 to establish field ground conditions.
The concrete foundations shall be done to meet the following standards:

· BS 8004: Foundations
· BS 8081: Code of practice for ground anchorages
· BS 8100: Towers and masts
· ASCE 10-97: Design of latticed towers
· ASCE 74-1991: Guidelines for electrical transmission line structural loading
· BS 8110: Structural use of concrete
· BS 5328: Methods of specifying concrete
The types of the concrete foundations and natures of earth to be considered shall be as
follows:-
· Shallow foundations shall be used for bearing capacity of more than 100kN/m2
· For bearing capacity less than 100kN/ m2, special foundations shall apply. Suitable
special foundations shall be designed according to technical need and are further
classified as:
--Rock anchor for rocky foundations
--Raft foundations for swampy areas and
--Deep foundations, which require use of suitable piles.
All Structural Concrete shall be reinforced with deformed steel bars type 1 to BS 4449 and
structural design details to BS 8110 and structural steel detailing to BS 4466.
The angle of frustum of earth shall mean the angle vertical of earth frustum to resist the uplift
force and shall be established by geotechnical tests.
The factor of safety shall not less than 2.5 under the normal working conditions and 1.5 under
the broken wire conditions.

The upper surfaces of the foundation pads shall be reinforced and sloped within 45 degrees to
the horizontal. The minimum thickness of the edges of base pad shall be not less than
300mm.
The frustum shall be assumed to start from the top edges of the pad. Where frustums overlap
each other, allowance shall be made for loss of uplift resistance.
Concrete shall cover any part of the top steelwork by at least 100mm and shall extend above
the ground level for the minimum height of 350mm. Additional 500mm minimum chimney
extension shall be provided to foots on lower side in sloping areas. The upper surface of
chimney shall be sloped to ensure drainage of water.
The cleats shall be attached by bolting at the base of each stub to assist in transfer of leg load
to the foundation pad as shown on drawing APPENDIX 1.A.3. Minimum portion of stub
loads in the design of cleats shall be assumed at 50 per cent.
11.3 Special Foundations

Besides the above mentioned concrete foundations, special foundations such as raft type
foundation, rock anchor, piled foundation or others may be required. Final type of foundation
to be applied for each tower shall be determined in accordance with results of soil
investigation performed by the Contractor during execution of the Contract.
For the purpose of tendering, basic designs shall be submitted with the tender under the
following assumptions, and prices for the special foundations shall be quoted based on the
design.
[a] Raft type foundation
The foundation shall be designed with the following specifications: ultimate bearing capacity
of 10 ton/m2, soil weight of 1.4 ton/m3 and no angle of frustum of soil. Weights of reinforced
concrete and soil shall be taken as entirely submerged. Other design conditions specified in
this subsection will be applied.
[b] Piled foundation
Piles used for the foundation shall be either precast concrete pile with circular or square cross
section or in-situ concrete pile.
[i] Pile data

Pile diameter or dimension
- Circular cross section - Φ300 mm.
- Square cross section - 300 x 300 mm
- Pile depth below ground level - 12 m
- Ratio or ultimate bearing/uplift capacity of pile - 2.5: 1

[ii] Uplift
The mass density of concrete below ground level shall be assumed as 1,600 kg/m3 to
allow for hydrostatic effects and similarly soil as 960 kg/m3. Additional weight of
concrete shall be included as necessary to provide the specified resistance to uplifting
under any condition. Where bored or driven piles are proposed having no specially
made bulb or enlarged concrete foot to provide positive uplift resistance but relying on
skin friction alone, at least 75% of the net working uplift force, and 50% of the net
broken wire uplift force shall be provided in dead weight of concrete, whichever is the
greater. The cost of such concrete shall be included in the piled foundation rate.
[iii] Compression
Mass density of plain concrete shall be assumed as 2,300 kg/m3 on their technical
acceptability and cast.
Contractors must justify assumptions of equal performance of their piling system with
that proposed. No extra payment shall be made for access tracks necessary for heavy
piling rigs.
Piles shall be embedded in a reinforced concrete cap of adequate dimensions and the
caps tied with nominal reinforced concrete beams of a minimum size of 460 mm deep
by 300 mm wide with at least eight 20 mm diameter main reinforcing bars per beam.
Piling shall be carried out using an approved procedure throughout. The actual length
and numbers of piles required at any given location shall be approved by the Engineer
on the basis of the final agreed design data.
[c] Other Foundations

Where special ground conditions exist which do not allow for any of the above designs in an
original or modified fashion, special types of foundations may be employed. They will be
paid for on basis of submitted rates schedule for concrete, steel and excavations applying
throughout, irrespective of special conditions.
Tower prices shall cover for all costs not covered by special scheduled rates where admissible
including the provision of access tracks and standings for piling equipment or building of
bund for the Contractor’s convenience in paddy fields or other flooded areas.
11.4 FOUNDATION WORKS
11.4.1 Soil Investigation

The Contractor shall make tests of subsoil conditions at every tower site by means of an
approved simple hand-operated borer [sampling] and sounding tool, and indicate results on
the approved soil test sheets together with ground water levels and proposed foundation type
to be applied at the tower position.
The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval for the foundation type in advance of the
foundation works at each tower site. Particular note is to be made where any poor ground is

encountered likely to require special foundations. The test results shall show firm evidences
to prove reasons why the proposed type of foundation is selected from the specified
foundation types. The cost of the sub-soil tests is deemed included in the rate for foundation
work.
The Engineer may request the Contractor additional sub-soil tests at the bottom of excavated
foundation holes, if the Engineer judges its necessity for further confirmation on the proposed
foundation types. The sub-soil tests shall be done at the earliest stage of the field works to
cater for the urgency of having tower stubs and templates on site and in order that foundation
works can proceed with a minimum of delay. BS5930, British soil investigation code will
apply as a technical guide for reference.
11.4.2 Excavation and Backfilling

Where angle towers are fitted with unequal length cross arms at each side of the tower, the
tower centre shall be offset to ensure that conductors are located as near as possible
equidistant either side of the route centreline in adjacent spans.
The Contractor shall ensure that excavations are made to the correct depth and width. If
excavations are taken deeper that the designed dimension the excess depth shall be backfilled
with concrete at the Contractor’s expense. If excavations are made wider than the designed
dimension, such modifications to the design as the Engineer may require shall be made at the
Contractor’s expense.
For uplift foundations, undercutting or other approved method shall be applied as far as
possible for allowing upward bearing of the foundation pad against undisturbed soil for a
minimum width of 250mm all around. Alternatively the concrete pad shall be cast to the
edge of the excavation for a minimum height of 250 mm in order to gain assistance by
adhesion to the original ground. In cases where the concrete block is cast in undercutting, the
earth frustum assumed to resist uplift shall be considered to start from the bottom of the
vertical edges of the block. Otherwise, the frustum shall be assumed to start from the upper
top of the block edges.
The backfill of all types of foundations shall be thoroughly rammed with mechanical
rammers, and the ramming shall be carried out at intervals of not greater than 300 mm to
ensure thorough consolidation of the backfill as the Engineer requires.
Foundation Concrete faces shall be painted with three coats of an approved bituminous paint
to separate backfill from concrete before backfilling.
In no circumstances shall peat, black Cotton soil or equivalent materials be used as backfill
for foundations. Where excavations are made in peat ground, backfilling to the foundations
shall be made with a suitable soil or hardcore from an approved source at the Contractor’s
expense. Backfill shall be finished in such a way that the original ground contours are
restored as nearly as possible; any subsidence of backfill shall be made good before the issue
of the Taking-Over Certificate.
11.4.3 Stub Setting

Stubs for tower foundations shall only be installed with the use of templates or by use of the
lower sections of the tower with the suitable temporary bracings to ensure correct spacing.
The stub setting templates shall be of approved type with sufficient rigidity to ensure correct

setting of the stubs. The method selected shall be such that all four stubs are supported and
interconnected by a rigid steel framework. The main members of the templates must be in
the position by the template while the concrete is placed. The templates are not to be
removed until at 48 hours after the foundations have been completed and backfilled.
The templates shall be manufactured from mild steel angle or channel or a combination of
both, of approved and adequate cross-section, and shall be equipped with central alignment
notches or holes, corner braces, riser-braces, and stub angle bolting legs to permit the
accurate setting of stubs in respect of the following requirements:
a) Longitudinal centreline
b) Tower lateral centreline
c) Stub elevations [with reference to datum]
d) Stub levelling
e) Inclinations of stubs
f) Stub hip bevels
g) Spacing between stubs
No concrete shall be started before the stubs are confirmed to be in the design positions.
11.4.4 Concrete Works

[a] Concrete for concrete foundation and pile shall have the minimum required breaking
strengths as specified in the technical schedules. BS 5328 will refer when specifying
concrete and BS 8110 in reference to structural use of concrete.
[b] Cement used shall be Portland with minimum strength of 42.5 N/mm2 or other approved
composition obtained from an approved maker. Portland cement shall conform in all
respects to BS-12.
[c] Aggregates shall be clean and free from dust, earthy or organic matter or salt. Coarse
aggregate shall be approved grading to be retained on a mesh not less than 5mm square,
and of a maximum size to pass a mesh not more than 30 mm square. Where specially
approved in writing by the Engineer, coarse aggregate of uniform size which will pass a
25mm mesh may be used throughout. Fine aggregate shall be river sand and shall be
coarse, sharp, clean and fee from dust, salt, clay, vegetable matter or other impurity and
shall be screened through a mesh not more than 5mm in the clear. It shall be well
graded mixture of coarse and fine grains from 5mm gauge downwards. Aggregates shall
conform in all ways to BS812 and KS 95:2003.
[d] Water shall be clean and free from all earth, vegetable or organic matter, salt, soil, oil,
acid and alkaline substances either in solution or in suspensions. Quality shall be
confirmed by lab test to BS 3148.
[e] At least four weeks before commencing any concreting work, the Contractor shall make
trial mixes using proposed samples of cement and fine and coarse aggregates.
The test specimens for the trial mixes shall be of cube type. Preliminary test specimens
shall be taken from the proposed mixes as follows:

For each proposed mix a set of 6 specimens shall be made from each of 3 consecutive
batches. Three from each set of six shall be tested at an age of seven [7] days and three
[3] at an age of 28 days. The test shall be carried out in an approved laboratory.
Upon approval of trial mixes neither the mix proportions nor the source of supply of
materials shall be altered without the prior approval of the Engineer except that the
Contactor shall adjust the proportions of the mix as required, to take account of
permitted variations in the materials, such approval shall be subject to the execution, to
the Engineer’s satisfaction, of trial mix procedures set out herein.
[f] Where directed by the Engineer concrete cubes are to be taken and tested to verify the
concrete strength during site concreting works. The Contractor shall provide the cube
moulds at site for the purpose accordingly. The test specimens shall be 150 mm cubed
and the mould shall be of metal with inner faces accurately machined in order that
opposite sides of the specimen are plane and parallel. Each mould shall be provided
with the metal base having a smooth machined surface. The interior surfaces of the
mould and base should be lightly oiled before concrete is placed in the mould.
[g] The cost of concrete testing shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor’s general
schedule rates or in the Contract Price. Testing Lab shall be approved.
[h] Requirements for testing concrete samples during construction are set out in Clause
11.8.
[i] The concrete shall thoroughly be wetted before backfilling commences. When shutters
are to be struck, backfilling of excavation is not to take place immediately, and the
concrete shall be kept continuously moist to avoid rapid drying.
[j] In the event that the Contractor proposes to use ready mixed concrete for foundation
work, approval must first be obtained from the Engineer, who will inspect the batching
plant and cement, sand and gravel used for concrete. No ready mixed concrete shall be
used in foundation work if it has been mixed in the lorry during its journey for more
than 45 minutes. At the discretion of the Engineer, ready mixed concrete may be used
in foundations in excess of 45 minutes journey, if the cement is added to the drum at
site and is thoroughly mixed prior to placing, or alternatively if the ready mixing lorry
carried its own drum during the lorry’s journey and not mixed for more than 45 minutes
prior to placing. The Engineer’s decision to reject any of the above methods of
supplying ready mixed concrete shall be final.
[k] Throughout the line route, the Contractor shall at regular intervals and at the time of
survey, obtain samples of subsoil and ground water, which he shall have analyzed to
ascertain if any agents be present which may have an adverse effect on concrete made
with normal Portland cement. The analyses shall be forwarded to the Engineer without
delay together with any recommendations for the use of special cement. The Engineer’s
decision as to the type of cement to be used will be final. The cost of obtaining soil and
ground water samples is deemed to be included in the Contract Price. The cost of any
special cement used will be paid at an appropriate rate to be agreed with the Engineer.
[l] Concrete shall be placed immediately after mechanical mixing. All concrete shall be
thoroughly compacted by mechanical vibration during the operation of placing, and

shall be free from honeycombing and other defects. The upper surface of the concrete
for all types of foundations shall be finished smooth and sloped in an approved manner
to prevent accumulation of water. A concrete addictive of a type approved by the
Engineer may be used.
11.4.5 Piling and Other Special Works

Pilling will be carried out using an approved procedure throughout. The actual length and
numbers of piles required at any location will be approved by the Engineer on the basis of the
final agreed design data and payment made for departures from the assumed tender design
quantities on the basis of the difference of quantities times the Schedule variation rates. Piles
shall be tested in accordance with Clause 11.8. Tender Prices shall include for all necessary
casings, pumping, and depreciation of piling machines, materials, transportation, testing and
others.
Where special ground conditions exist which do not allow for any of the designs in an
original or modified form, special types of foundations may be employed which will be paid
for on the basis of schedule rates submitted. To this extent the submitted schedule of rates for
concrete, steel and excavations shall apply throughout irrespective of special conditions.
11.5 ERECTION OF TOWERS

Where tower members arrive on site with slight distortions due to handling in transit, they
shall be straightened by the Contractor using approved means and offered to the Engineer for
inspection and acceptance or rejection before erection commences.
In general, towers shall be assembled and erected with bolts finger tight only. Final
tightening of bolts shall only take place when all members are in place. As far as practical,
bolts shall be inserted with the nuts facing outwards or downwards.
Whenever wire slings or ropes are liable to abrade tower members, the members shall be
suitably protected by heavy Hessian bags or strips, or by some other approved means.
The Contractor shall make use of temporary struts on panels prior to lifting, if in the opinion
of the Engineer, there is likelihood of damage occurring to that panel during lifting. Where
derricks are used for lifting panel they shall be securely guyed and shall be supported only at
approved locations on the legs.
All towers shall be vertical under the stress set up by the completed overhead line to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The maximum acceptable deviation from vertical shall normally
be 10.
Proper precautions shall be taken to ensure that no parts of the towers or supports are unduly
stressed or damaged in any way during erection. Drifting shall not be allowed.
Suitable ladders shall be used whenever necessary during erection, but such ladders and
removal step bolts shall be removed when erection work is in progress.
Before assembly of members, joints shall be free of all earth, or any other substances which
might prevent the correct alignment of members. After erection, all materials shall be cleaned
of all foreign matter or surplus paint.

Spanners used during erection shall be well shaped and fit closely on the nut to avoid
damaging nuts and bolt heads. Approved equipment shall be used for tightening the shear
bolts which will be used from ground level up to one metre above the anti-climbing devices.
After erection, the rest of the bolts up to the bottom cross-arm shall have the threads smashed
in an approved manner to prevent unauthorized removal.
Damage to the galvanised surfaces of bolts, tower steelwork or smashed bolts shall be
repaired using zinc rich paint or similar and the cost of such repair is deemed to be included
in the appropriate rates.
The Contractor must ensure that tower erection, steel handling and operation of equipment
shall be such as to ensure the maximum safety of all personnel associated with the project as
well as the public.
Lower parts of towers erected in the submerged area during wet seasons shall be protected
from corrosion with an approved bitumastic paint as instructed by the Engineer. The cost for
the paint shall be quoted in the Price Schedule.
11.6 GROUNDING OF TOWERS

Before placing foundation concrete, basic grounding earthing rods specified in Clause 11.8
shall be installed to each of the foundation cleats. Installation shall ensure that earthing can
be isolated from the tower and concrete foundation to allow earthing survey. Measurement of
footing resistances of all towers shall be carried out with an approved instrument before
stringing of an overhead earth wire. A target value of the resistance is less than 10 ohms.
The Contractor shall report the measured value in an approved form to the Engineer. The
Engineer will instruct necessitate of installation of counterpoises to the Contractor who shall
then provide the counterpoises as specified in the Clause 11.8 to the instructed towers and
measure the resistances for reporting the Engineer. In case the resistance is still high, the
Engineer may order the Contractor to install additional counterpoises at no additional cost.
Final confirmation of ground resistance shall be carried out before stringing of the overhead
ground wire.
11.7 ERECTION OF CONDUCTOR AND OVERHEAD EARTHWIRE

a) The fullest possible use shall be made of the maximum conductor lengths in order to
reduce the number of joints to the minimum. The number and location of conductor and
overhead earthwire tension joints shall be approved. The proposed conductor lengths
shall be designed specifically for the final stringing length and appropriate drum schedule
submitted for approval before production. Tension joints shall not be less than 15m from
the nearest clamp.
b) Unless the Engineer agrees to the contrary, midspan joints shall not be not used-
(i) at locations which would allow less than 3 clear spans between mid-span joints
on a given conductor and wire
(ii) in spans crossing power lines, telecommunications lines, public roads or
buildings, and
(iii) in single span sections.

c) Conductor repair sleeves shall not be used without the permission of the Engineer, which
will be granted only in exceptional circumstances.
d) Conductor and earthwire stringing shall be carried out entirely by tension stringing
methods and the Contractor shall submit for approval full details of the precise method of
tension stringing and of the stringing equipment which he intends to use. Conductors shall
be kept off the ground at all times when the conductor is in motion. The method of
tension stringing required to install all conductors and earthwire shall be continuously
controlled.
e) The conductor and earthwire tension during stringing operation shall be kept as low as
possible, consistent with keeping the conductor and earthwire clear of the ground whilst
in motion. At no time will the tensions be allowed to exceed 75% of the final tension.
f) All stringing equipment shall be properly anchored and shall be positioned in such a way
that structures, insulators and fittings will not be overloaded.
g) Conductor and earthwire drums shall be securely anchored during the stringing operation
and drum jacks shall be of the self braking type to prevent conductor over run.
h) Conductor and earthwire pulling shall be such as will ensure a continuously steady pull.
Every precaution is to be taken to prevent damage to the conductor and earthwire.
Clamps and other devices used for handling conductor and earthwire during erection shall
allow no slippage or relative movement of strands or layers and shall not pinch or deform
the conductor and earthwire. Grooves in sheaves and tensioners shall be lined with
neoprene or rubber. Sheaves shall have an electrical conducting path between their
suspension points and the conductor supported within them and shall run with minimum
friction.
i) Conductor and earthwire shall be effectively earthed in an approved manner during

running out and at all places where men are working on them.
j) At least one month before stringing commences, the Contractor shall give due to
consideration to all the factors involved and submit to the Engineer for approval a fully
detailed stringing schedule stating locations of conductor and earthwire drums, winch
operation for stringing and the proposed positions of mid-span joints, together with
temporary staying wires of towers and all other relevant information.
k) Conductor and earthwire drums shall be closely examined before conductor pulling
commences and all nails and other things which could damage the conductors and
earthwires shall be removed. During stringing, the conductor and earthwire drums are to
be supervised at all times and the conductor and earthwire shall be inspected for defects
while it is being pulled off the drums. Any damage caused to conductors or earthwires
shall be reported to the Engineer whose decision to replace or repair will be final.
l) Conductors and earthwires shall be carefully regulated to the correct prestress and initial
tensions by a measurement of sags. Ambient temperature shall be measured by a
thermometer suspended on the tower at the sag measurement position. Making for and
application of anchor clamps shall follow regulation to initial tension without delay.
Immediately after regulation and clamping has been completed in a section, the sag of

conductors and earthwire shall not depart from the correct value by more that +/-1.5%.
Suspension insulator sets shall be installed so that clamps are within 20mm of their
correct position on the conductor.
m) The insulators strings shall be cleaned and inspected before assembly. Any defective
insulator be shall be removed from site forthwith. Insulators shall have the security clip,
cotter pins and other locking devices fully in place and shall be erected in a manner
avoiding damage to the sheds, fibre-glass rod or locking devices.
n) Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall check prior to the issue of the
Taking-Over Certificate that the sags of conductors and earthwire in selected spans are
within the specified tolerance, and shall make any adjustment necessary to ensure
compliance.
o) Joints, clamps, etc. shall be applied using the approved tools and in such a manner that no
bird-caging, over-tensioning of individual wires or layers or other deformation or damage
to the conductor and earthwire occurs. Cutting of layers of conductors shall be carried
out with tools designed to prevent damage to underlying strands.
p) Compression fittings shall be applied only by linemen approved by the Engineer, using
approved methods. The outer surfaces of conductors and earthwires and the interiors of
compression sleeves shall be scratched-brushed immediately before assembly.
q) After conductors have been made off and landed, stringing sheaves shall be removed and
suspension clamps and vibration dampers shall be fitted with minimum delay.
Suspension clamps shall be fitted with due regard to offsets where appropriate, and the
conductor and earthwire shall be cleaned before the clamp is assembled.
r) The Contractor shall keep a record of all sagging showing details of the section, the
sagging and checking spans, ambient temperature, pre-stress, initial and final sags, the
date of sagging and clipping-in offset, etc. This record shall form part of the final records
for the line and shall be handed over to the Engineer prior to the issue of taking-Over
Certificate. The records shall be available for inspection at any time.
11.8 TESTS AT SITE
[1] General
Following investigations and tests shall be carried out by the Contractor, when ordered by the
Engineer.
Those investigations and tests as mentioned in the Price schedule will be paid for at the rates
entered. Other investigations and tests not scheduled in the Price Schedule shall be deemed
to be included in the prices of the relative items of the works.
[2] Ground Prove Tests

Tests by means of an approved type of penetrometer or other approved means shall be carried
out during the check survey as provided for in Clause 11.4. Results of these tests shall be
submitted to the Engineer on an approved form giving a preliminary indication of the ground

bearing properties and water levels, etc. Bore penetration shall be at least 9m below ground
level in poor ground.
[3] Laboratory Soil Tests

Where ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall obtain soil samples and submit these for
tests to an approved laboratory to determine the necessary properties of the soils for the
purpose of foundation designs. Such information shall be detailed in an approved manner and
conclusions given as to the recommended bearing pressures to be adopted. Tests shall be
carried out generally in the manner described in BS-1377.
[4] Ground Bearing Test

Where ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out ground bearing tests to
determine the ground bearing capacity, by means of loading a 300 mm square plate in an
approved manner. Tests shall be carried out generally in the manner described in BS-5930.
[5] Pile Bearing and Uplift Tests

Where ordered by the Engineer, the contract shall carry out pile bearing and uplift tests for all
types of pile generally in accordance with the method given in the BS CP-2004. Such tests
shall be carried out to determine the ultimate uplift and bearing values.
[6] Foundation Loading Tests

Where ordered by the Engineer, foundation loading tests shall be carried out in full scaled
individual footings.
(7) Records of Site Investigation Tests

All records of site investigation tests shall be detailed in an approved manner. Sample log
sheets, charts, etc. shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before any investigation
commences. All site investigation data, charts, etc. shall be handed over to the Engineer in
triplicate upon satisfactory conclusion of the tests, and before the issue of Taking-Over
Certificate.
Where the Contractor carried out other tests at his own expense, not ordered by the Engineer,
and to the contrary, where the Employer had independent tests made along the route of the
line, such information shall be made available to the Employer or Contractor as appropriate.
[8] Concrete Tests

The Contractor shall carry out tests on sample of concrete from the foundation works, as
required by the Engineer as specified in Clause 11.4. The test specimens shall be stored at
the site at a place free from vibration under damp sacks for 24 hours. They shall be then
removed from the moulds, marked and stored in water at a temperature between 100 C and
210 C until the testing date. Specimens which are to be sent to a laboratory for testing shall
be packed for transit in a damp sand, or other suitable damp materials, and shall be brought in
the laboratory at least 24 hours before test. On arrival at the laboratory, they shall be
similarly stored in water until the time of the test.

The results shall be handed in triplicate to the Engineer, as soon as possible after testing, and
not later than seven days.
[9] Support Footing Resistance

The resistance to earth of the complete foundation of individual structures shall be measured
in an approved manner before the stringing operation of overhead earthwire, as specific in
Clause 11.6. The placing of tests electrodes shall normally be along the centre line of the
route in such direction as to ensure that the lowest resistance to earth is recorded, and a note
shall be made of the direction in the time of the test.
[10] Additional Footing Resistance Test

If in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary to reduce the tower footing resistance by
means of counterpoises, the Contractor shall make further measurement after the additional
counterpoises have been carried out before the stringing operation of the overhead earthwire.
Any further measurement shall be carried out as necessary without extra charge.
[11] Measurement of Galvanising Thickness

The Contractor shall have on site an instrument suitable for accurate checking of galvanizing
thickness for the Engineer’s use. The gauge shall be available from time of arrival of the first
consignment of steel work until the issue of Taking-Over Certificate. The cost of the gauge
and other operating expenses shall be deemed to be included in the contract price and the
gauge shall remain the property of the Employer.
[12] Testing of Rock Anchors

Where rock anchor foundations are used in hard rock, as provided for by the Engineer’s
order, the Contractor shall test individual anchors by tensile test loading to failure for
obtaining design data of the foundations. The test shall be considered satisfactory if the steel
bar fails by yielding of the bar at or above its ultimate strength.
Anchor for the testing shall be installed away from permanent foundation anchors but in the
same rock. The frequency of the test shall depend upon the different types of hard rock
encountered and the number of tests performed shall be such as to give confidence in the
employment of rock anchor foundations and experience of the type of rock suitable for their
use. The frequency of test shall, in the case of dispute, be reasonably determined by the
Engineer. Tests shall be carried out generally in the manner described in BS-8081 on ground
anchorages. The cost of rock test shall be included in the relevant schedule rates.
[13] Test on Completion

The line shall be energized at full working voltage before handing over, and the arrangement
for this and such other test as the Employer/ Engineer shall desire to make on the completed
line shall be assisted by the Contractor who shall provide such labour, transport and other
assistance as required without extra charge.

SECTION 12
12 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT
12.1 Price Schedules
12.1.1 General
1. The Price Schedules are divided into separate Schedules as follows:
Schedule No. 1: Plant (including Mandatory Spare Parts) Supplied from Abroad
Schedule No. 2: Plant (including Mandatory Spare Parts) Supplied from within the
Employer’s Country
Schedule No. 3: Design Services
Schedule No. 4: Installation and Other Services
Schedule No. 5: Grand Summary
Schedule No. 6: Recommended Spare Parts
2. The Schedules do not generally give a full description of the plant to be supplied
and the services to be performed under each item. Bidders shall be deemed to have
read the Employer’s Requirements and other sections of the Bidding Document
and reviewed the Drawings to ascertain the full scope of the requirements included
in each item prior to filling in the rates and prices. The entered rates and prices
shall be deemed to cover the full scope as aforesaid, including overheads and
profit.
3. If bidders are unclear or uncertain as to the scope of any item, they shall seek
clarification in accordance with ITB 7 prior to submitting their bid.
12.1.2 Pricing
4. Prices shall be filled in indelible ink, and any alterations necessary due to errors,
etc., shall be initialled by the Bidder.
As specified in the Bid Data Sheet and Special Conditions of Contract, prices shall
be fixed and firm for the duration of the Contract, or prices shall be subject to
adjustment in accordance with the corresponding Appendix (Price Adjustment) to
the Contract Agreement.
5. Bid prices shall be quoted in the manner indicated and in the currencies specified
in the Instructions to Bidders in the Bidding Document.
For each item, bidders shall complete each appropriate column in the respective
Schedules, giving the price breakdown as indicated in the Schedules.
Prices given in the Schedules against each item shall be for the scope covered by
that item as detailed in Section 6 (Employer’s Requirements) or elsewhere in the
Bidding Document.
6. Payments will be made to the Contractor in the currency or currencies indicated
under each respective item.

7. When requested by the Employer for the purposes of making payments or partial
payments, valuing variations or evaluating claims, or for such other purposes as the
Employer may reasonably require, the Contractor shall provide the Employer with
a breakdown of any composite or lump sum items included in the Schedules.
The Contractor when requested shall attend for purpose of measurement, or otherwise accept
measurements made by the Employer alone.
Where applicable the Contractor shall indicate on each invoice the identification number of
each support to which items in the invoice refer.
Where applicable, unit prices in the Schedule shall be deemed to include for all works on site
irrespective of access conditions, including if necessary helicopter transportation, slope of
ground, nature of subsoil, presence of water or other obstacles adjacent to or across the line of
the route.
All unit prices in Volume 1, Schedule 4 shall include all incidental expenses which the
Contractor or specialist Subcontractor may incur in the preparation of maintenance of access,
in the provision of site services and of all transportation for labour whether skilled or
unskilled.
The unit prices in the Schedules shall include all allowances or other supplementary payment
to skilled or unskilled labour, customary, authorized or required by regulations in force at the
date of the Tender.
All unit prices shall be deemed to include payment to labour, or other expenses incurred for
idle time during which work on site is interrupted by weather conditions or flooding by storm
overflow or the like.
While every assistance will be provided to facilitate line construction activities in sequence in
accordance with the Contactor’s agreed programme of work, there could be occasions when
this may not be possible. No claims for additional costs to the Contractor will be accepted
solely for such discontinuity of working.
12.1.3 Surplus Material

Surplus material paid for by the Employer shall remain property of the Employer and shall be
stored at the project terminal substation. Waste material will not be taken over or paid for by
the Employer.
12.1.4 Nominated Subcontractor/Supplier

Where the contract provides for the work to be executed by a Nominated Subcontractor, or
goods to be supplied by a Nominated Supplier, the Contactor shall ensure that the Nominated
Subcontractor’s works are programmed and executed or nominated goods supplied to comply
with the requirements of the Contractor’s agreed programme. The Contractor shall ensure
that enquiries for Nominated Subcontracts and Supplies are returned to the Employer. The
Contractor shall obtain all necessary drawings and accounts, as may be directed by the
Employer.

12.1.5 Specialist Subcontractors

Specialist Subcontractors’ names shall be submitted to the Employer for approval before they
are appointed.
12.1.6 Quantities
The quantities set out in the schedules are, unless otherwise defined, estimated quantities of
the works. They are not to be assumed as the actual and correct quantities to be executed by
the Contractor in fulfilment of his obligations under the Contract. The Contactor is presumed
to have satisfied himself as to the relevance of the estimated quantities in the preparation of
his Tender.
12.1.7 Drawings, Reference Standards and Records

The provision of all drawings, design calculations, records and the supply of the relevant
reference Standards etc as stated or specified in the Contract shall be included in the Contract
Price.
12.2 SURVEY
The cost of full precision or check ground survey undertaken by the Contractor on the
Employer’s instruction shall be entered in appropriate Schedules in Volume I of the tender
document, and distances shall be measured to the nearest meter along the centre-line of the
route. The unit price shall include for the establishment or re-establishment of the line route
from terminal points and other such fixed points the Employer may define, full ground
survey, profiling, support plotting, preparation of Simms document tree marking and tree
schedule and pegging of support locations.
12.3 ROUTE CLEARANCE & ACCESS

Route clearance undertaken by the Contractor on the Employer’s instruction shall be entered
in the appropriate schedules in Volume I, and distances covered shall be measured to the
nearest metre along the centre line of the route.
12.4 FOUNDATIONS
12.4.1 General
The cost of foundations shall be entered in Schedule 4 of Volume I. this shall refer to the
supply and installation of foundations in accordance with the Specifications and good
engineering.
Where additional work is required over and above that provided for in the Specifications, this
will be paid on a measured basis at unit prices submitted.
The unit prices for foundations shall include all necessary geotechnical investigation and
geotechnical studies as defined in the Specification, or as required by relevant authorities.
The unit prices for all foundations shall include for site clearing, excavating in any material
by any means, manual or mechanical, and for ensuring stability and natural drainage inside
the working area, steel formwork, reinforcement, concrete, bitumastic painting for all
backfilled depth, compacting and disposal of surplus material, routine testing, site restoration
and for all necessary supports to sides of excavations.

Removal of ‘man-made’ materials such as industrial waste, etc., which the Employer agrees
is hazardous and which cannot be removed by normal means and not generated by the
contractor shall be paid for at unit prices to be agreed.
The complete cost of foundations for a support shall be entered at the appropriate Schedule 4
unit prices. The unit price shall include for all excavations, conventional pumping (including
well-point dewatering), excavation supports, concrete work, formwork, reinforcing, stub
steelwork, stub cutting, routine testing, bitumastic painting, backfilling, clearing up and all
other work required to complete the foundation in accordance with the Specification.
The unit prices shall also include supply of blinding concrete or the importation of any
backfill material necessary due to the excavated material being unsuitable as backfill.
The unit prices for foundations shall include the use of whichever type of cement is to be
used and density of concrete necessary to meet the requirements of the specification.
The unit prices for foundations shall include all stub steelwork installation and setting out
including the use of templates, setting to any level and any excavation necessary for setting
out. The protective treatment to defined concrete faces or support steelwork and provision of
site protection barriers shall be included in the rates for the foundations.
The unit prices for foundations shall include the cost for all earthing requirements labour.
Where site stabilizations outside the defined ‘working area’ is required, this shall be
undertaken at unit prices to be agreed.
The cost of design tests on foundations to prove the foundation design shall be entered in the
appropriate section of Schedule 4. The unit prices shall include for the removal of concrete
and steel down to 1m below ground level where this deemed necessary by the Employer.
12.4.2 Pile Foundations.

The cost of complete foundations for each support shall be entered at the appropriate
Schedule 4 unit prices. The unit prices shall include for mobilization and de-mobilisation of
piling rigs, setting out, cleaning, cutting to length, reinforcement and pile cap connection,
jointing or piles as necessary, irrespective of number of piles, all excavations (including
rock), conventional pumping (including well-point dewatering), exaction supports (including
use of bentonite slurries), concrete work for piles, pile cap and tie beams, formwork,
reinforcing, stub steelwork, stub cutting, routine testing, backfilling, clearing up and all other
work required to complete the foundation in accordance with the Specification.
The unit prices for piled foundations shall be based on:

1. The unit price for a complete tower foundation including pile cap and tie beams.
2. A unit price for piles for the complete tower based on the nominal length defined in
Schedule 4.
3. An additional unit price per foundation for the “average” length of pile greater than or
less than the defined length below existing ground level. This unit price shall be
applied once per complete support foundation irrespective of the number of piles in
the foundation and shall be applied per metre length of increased or decreased
“average” pile.

12.4.3 Flood Protection Walls

Where the Contractor considers that a gabion wall is necessary to protect a support, the cost
shall be entered in the appropriate Schedule 4 unit prices.
12.5 SUPPORTS (STEEL TOWERS)

The cost of steel towers, normal extensions shall be entered in Volume I, Schedule 1 unit
prices. The unit prices shall include for standard cross-arms, and shall include stub steelwork
and setting template.
The unit prices for steel towers shall include for access facilities, anti-climbing devices,
attachment plates, ancillary steelwork etc. used as standard on the support. The unit prices
shall include for all support mounted notice plates.
The cost of type tests on individual supports to prove the support design shall be entered at
the unit prices quoted in the Schedule 4 for successful tests only. All other quality control
requirements shall be included within the appropriate unit price.
The cost of tower paint including all necessary preparation, sample and routine tests shall be
entered at Schedule 1 unit prices.
12.6 INSULATOR SETS AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS

The cost of all insulator sets shall be entered in Volume 1, Schedule 1. The unit prices for
insulator sets shall include for all insulator units, links, sag adjusters, turnbuckles, weights,
insulator protective devices (arc horns), tension joints (dead ends) and suspension clamps
(inclusive of helical armour rods), used as a standard between the support and the phase
conductor.
Unit prices for earthwire tension and suspension sets shall where specified include for all
earthwire bonding to the supports including all earthwire bonding clamps in accordance with
the Specification.
The cost of all conductor tee-connectors and line termination fittings shall be entered in
Schedule 1.
12.7 CONDUCTORS AND FITTINGS

The cost of phase conductors and earthwires (OPGW), and associated fittings shall be entered
in Volume I Schedule 1, and distances shall be measured to the nearest metre after erection,
along the centre of the route without allowance for sag, jumpers or scrap.
The unit price shall include for all normal phase and earthwire jumpers including the jumpers
from the terminal towers to the substation gantries
The unit prices shall include for conductors, jumpers and associated fittings but excluding
insulator sets and earthwire tension sets.
The cost of fibre optic earthwire connections to the joint boxes, fixing clamps, joint boxes
and fusion splicing of optical fibres shall be included in the erection and stringing unit price.

12.8 MISCELLANEOUS
The cost of tools and spares to be supplied under the contract shall be entered in Volume 1,
Schedule 1 (Mandatory Spares) and schedule 6 (Recommended).
12.9 SITE VISIT
In practising due diligence, the contractor is specifically advised to inspect the site & terrain
and be well acquainted with the actual working and other prevalent conditions, facilities
available, position of material and labour. The bidder is advised to visit and examine the site
where the plant is to be installed and its surroundings and obtain for himself on his own
responsibility all the information that may be necessary for preparing the bid. The bidders
shall ask for necessary clarifications required for clearly understanding the scope & technical
/commercial requirements of the tender from KPLC before submitting their offer.
13 SCHEDULES
All the schedules and appropriate appendixes shall be filled completely and submitted with
the bid.
13.1 Schedule A: Technical drawings

Appendix 1 A-1
5'-3''SQ
5'-0''
16'-0'' 16'-0''
10'-6''
16'-9''
12'' DROPER
16'-9''
117'-3''
18'-3''
8'-0''SQ
BEND LINE
68'-3''
GROUND LINE
MINIMUM HEIGHT
GROUND LINE TOP OF CONCRETE
17'- 0''SQ
STANDARD HEIGHT
G/A OF 132KV STEEL TOWER
DATE SIGN SUSPENSION TOWER
APPROVED
CHECKED
ENGINEER I/C
CHECKED REF REVISION DATE SIGN TITLE

HEAD D'MAN
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT APPENDIX 1.A.1
13/Sep./06 J.M.Kahare
OF TOWER
DRAWN
TRACED

Appendix 1 A-2
CLEARANCE DIAGRAMS
X
0
LENGTH OF INSULATOR SET
60 0
0 60
40
830
0 0
20 40
830
0
20
CJ FARANGE
0
JUMPER
14
1.
0
14
1.
1.350
1.350
1.350
1.350
SUSPENSION TOWER
TENSION TOWER
(SUBSTATION)
C - LEG D - LEG
STEP BOLT
STEP BOLT
-1m
+ B - LEG
- 0m A - LEG
+1m
+2m (POWER STATION)
+3m
LEG AND STEP BOLTS
LOWEST PANEL OF TOWER
AND HILL SIDE EXTENSION
DATE SIGN
APPROVED
CHECKED
ENGINEER I/C

HEAD D'MAN
APPENDIX 1.A.2
DRAWN 13/Sep./06 J.M.Kahare CLEARANCE OF TOWER
TRACED

Appendix 1 A-3
COUNTERPOISE WIRE COUNTERPOISE WIRE
GALVANIZED IRON
BARBED WIRE
GATE COUNTERPOISE WIRE COUNTERPOISE WIRE
GL
TOWER LEG COUNTER WIRE

GALVANIZED WIRE STRAND 38mm
CLEATS
ANNEALED COPPER WIRE STAND 22mm
1.0m IN LENGH
ANTI - CLIMBING DEVICE GALVANIZED STEEL ANGLE

L 50 x 50 x 4, 1000mm IN LENGHT
DATE SIGN
APPROVED CLEAT AND GROUNDING ANGLE

CHECKED
ENGINEER I/C

ANTI - CLIMBING DEVICE AND GROUNDING SYSTEM
HEAD D'MAN
DRAWN
APPENDIX 1.A.3
19/Sep./06 J.M.Kahare
TRACED

Appendix 1.A.4
FIBRE GLASS
ROD
SILICONE RUBBER HOUSING
DIMENSIONS
0 D1 Wide shed Item 132KV
Sheds 50
0 D2 Smaller Shed
P 55
LONG ROD SILICONE RUBBER D1 115
COMPOSITE INSULATOR D2 85
D3 155
Y 1450
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING FOR 132KV
COMPOSITE SUSPENSION/TENSION INSULATOR
DRAWN BY S.M.Kimani

APPENDIX 1 A-5: ROUTE FOR PROPOSED 132 KV SAGANA-KUTUS LINE

APPENDIX 1 A-6: CO-ORDINATES FOR PROPOSED 132 KV SAGANA-KUTUS LINE
Easting Northing Easting Northing Longitude Latitude Longitude Latitude

UTM Zone 37S (Arc 1960) UTM Zone 37S (WGS 84) Deg.dec. (WGS 84-World) Deg. Min. Sec. (WGS 84-World)
T-Off (Pylon 352) 304236.1802 9929071.263 304333.16 9928772.13 37.24175894 -0.644115191 37 14 30.332 E. 0 38 38.815 S.
AP1 314356.1143 9935967.106 314453.09 9935668 37.33268828 -0.581783521 37 19 57.678 E. 0 34 54.421 S.
AP2 314891.882 9938248.115 314988.86 9937949.01 37.33750724 -0.561156704 37 20 15.026 E. 0 33 40.164 S.
AP3 315549.4062 9938483.329 315646.38 9938184.23 37.34341459 -0.559031179 37 20 36.293 E. 0 33 32.512 S.
TP.2 320931.8259 9939809.529 321028.81 9939510.44 37.39177088 -0.547050846 37 23 30.375 E. 0 32 49.383 S.
Pylon 353 303975.7366 9929350.965 304072.71 9929051.83 37.23942017 -0.64158505 37 14 21.913 E. 0 38 29.706 S.
Pylon 354 303866.7678 9929580.185 303963.74 9929281.05 37.238442 -0.639511874 37 14 18.391 E. 0 38 22.243 S.
TP.1 320212.8842 9939085.119 320309.87 9938786.01 37.38531047 -0.553600619 37 23 07.118 E. 0 33 12.962 S.

13.2 SCHEDULE B- PLACES OF MANUFACTURE
MANUFACTUERS AND PLACES OF MANUFACTURE, TESTING, INSPECTIONS

AND SHIPMENT
Item Details Manufacturer Place of Place of Testing Port of
Manufacture & Inspection Shipment
1 Design of Towers
2 Steel Sections
3 Fabrication
4 Nuts & Bolts
5 Galvanising
6 Tower Tests
7 Composite Insulators
8 Compression Joints &
clamps
9 Insulator fittings
10 Aluminium wires
11 Steel core wires
12 Phase conductor
stranding
13 Optical Ground Wire
14 Vibration dampers
15 Jointing Compressors
Note: The words “or Similar” or “equivalent” etc. will not be accepted
In the event of award of contract no manufacturers or sub-contractors other than those named
above will be accepted by the Employer for the appropriate service or equipment.

13.3 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND GUARANTEES-SCHEDULE C
C1-PHASE CONDUCTOR
Item Description Units Proposed

a STRANDED CONDUCTORS
Type of Conductor- ACSR -
Code Name- LYNX -
Aluminium wire Nos./mm
Steel wire Nos./mm
Overall diameter mm
Cross-section of Aluminium area mm2
Cross-section of Steel area mm2
Weight per km kg
Calculated Breaking load kN
Maximum resistance at 20 deg. C per ohm
km
Modulus of Elasticity kg/ mm2
Conductor lay -
Minimum weight of grease Kg/km
Length of conductor per drum m
Approximate net weight per drum kg
Approximate gross weight per drum kg
Dimension of drum ( diameter x mm x mm
thickness)
b INDIVIDUAL WIRES BEFORE
STRANDING
Tolerance of diameter of Aluminium %
wire
Tolerance of diameter of Steel wire %
Minimum tensile strength of kg/ mm2
Aluminium wire


Minimum tensile strength of Steel kg/ mm2
wire
Conductivity %
Minimum twisting number of steel Nos.
wire:
-100 x diameter ( length)
Galvanising: Grams/m2
- Min. coating weight of Zinc

TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND GUARANTEES FOR TRANSMISSION LINE
C2-CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES

2 CONDUCTOR ACESSORIES
a Tension Joint
Type- Compression -
Materials- Aluminium & steel -
Length mm
Ultimate breaking Load kg
b Vibration Dampers
Type- Stockbridge -
Weight kg
Galvanizing : g/ m2
- Min. quantity coating
Galvanizing : times
- Min. number of uniformity 1 minute
coating
c Preformed Armoured Rod
Number of individual wires Nos.
Diameter of individual wires mm
Length wires mm

C3-CONDUCTOR FITTINGS
Description Units Proposed

FITTINGS Suspension Tension
a Clamp for Conductor
Type Trunnion Compression
Material of clamp
Length of clamp mm
Approx. slipping Load kg
b Clamp for Earthwire Trunnion Bolted or
Compression
Type
Material of clamp mm
Length of clamp kg
Approx. slipping Load kg


C4-INSULATOR UNITS & ACCESSORIES
Description Units Proposed

Suspension Tension
1 Maximum System kV
Voltage
2 Pollution Category class
3 Dielectric
4 One-minute power kV
frequency withstand
voltage, 50 Hz, wet.
5 Lighting impulse kV
withstand voltage, 1,2/50
pos.
6 Power arc current kA, 0.5sec
7 Minimum creepage mm
distance
8 Specified mechanical KN
load,
9 Minimum Arc Gap mm
10 Material fittings
11 Material of rod
12 Material of housing and
sheds
13 Socket IEC
standard
14 Ball IEC
Standard
15 Arcing Rings material
16 Arcing rings IEC
Standard

SCHEDULE C: TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND GUARANTEES FOR TRANSMISSION LINE

CD5. TOWERS & FOUNDATIONS
Item Particulars Unit Type-S Type-L Type-M Type-H Type –HS Type-T
5.1 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT OF
TOWER
Overall height of standard tower (+0m) m
Length of top conductor cross-arm m
Length of bottom conductor cross-arm m
Vertical spacing of conductor:
Ground wire and top conductor m
Top conductor and bottom conductors m
Width of tower body at:
Top of tower m
Lowest cross-arm m
Ground level of standard tower (+0m) m
Weight of towers
-3m body extension kg
+0m body extension kg

5.2 LOAD ON FOUNDATION FROM
TOWERS
5.2.1 Compression Load
5.2.2 Uplifting Load
5.3 CONCRETE PAD FOUNDATION AND

STUB LENGTH
5.3.1 Depth of Foundations
-3m body extension mm
+0m body extension mm
5.3.2

Width of Base Pad
5.3.3
Thickness of Base Pad
5.3.4 -3m body extension mm
Top Width of Chimney
5.3.5
Bottom Width of Chimney
Volume of Excavation
-3m body extension cu. m

+0m body extension cu. m
Volume of Concrete
-3m body extension cu. m
Length of Stubs: (stub length x cleat)

PART 2B
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS

FOR SUBSTATION
ii
Table of Contents
1 SCOPE OF WORKS:.......................................................................................................... 1
1.1 DETAILED DESCRIPTION................................................................................................................................ 2
2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 6

2.1 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND AUXILIARIES .................................................................................................... 6
2.2 DESIGN DATA FOR LOW VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................... 7

2.2.1 AC system ............................................................................................................................................. 7
2.2.2 DC system ............................................................................................................................................. 8
2.2.3 220 V AC Un-interrupted supply (UPS) ................................................................................................... 8
2.3 Motors ......................................................................................................................................................... 8

2.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.3.2 Special Motors ...................................................................................................................................... 9
2.3.3 Motor control gear ................................................................................................................................ 9
2.4 Computer Based Controllers....................................................................................................................... 10
2.5 DESIGN DATA FOR HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................... 11
2.6 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................... 12
2.7 SEISMIC COEFFICIENT ................................................................................................................................. 13
2.8 TROPICALIZATION ...................................................................................................................................... 13
2.9 EARTHING .................................................................................................................................................. 13
2.10 UNIT OF MEASUREMENT AND LANGUAGE ................................................................................................. 13
2.11 WORKING STRESS AND DESIGN .................................................................................................................. 14
2.12 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP .............................................................................................................. 15
2.13 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ................................................................................. 19
2.14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................................................ 24
2.15 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND PAINTING .................................................................................................... 24
2.16 EMBEDDED METAL WORK, OPENING, ETC.................................................................................................. 25
2.17 SPARE PARTS .............................................................................................................................................. 25
2.18 PACKING..................................................................................................................................................... 26
2.19 DELIVERY .................................................................................................................................................... 27
2.20 CLEANING AND MATERIAL DISPOSAL ......................................................................................................... 27

iii
2.21 PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS ................................................................................................................... 28
2.22 DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR .................................................................. 29
2.23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ....................................................................................... 30
2.24 TEST PROCEDURE INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................................... 31

2.24.1 Electrical equipment:........................................................................................................................... 31
2.25 ATTENDANCE OF EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE AT FACTORY TEST AND TRAINING ................................ 32
2.26 PHOTOGRAPHS .......................................................................................................................................... 32
3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SUBSTATIONS .............................................. 34

3.1 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................. 34
3.2 132kV CIRCUIT BREAKERS: ......................................................................................................................... 34

3.2.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 34
3.2.2 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 34
3.2.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 34
3.2.4 OPERATING MECHANISM .................................................................................................................... 35
3.2.5 RATINGS.............................................................................................................................................. 36
3.2.6 TESTS .................................................................................................................................................. 36
3.2.7 DRAWING AND MANUALS ................................................................................................................... 37
3.2.8 PACKING AND INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 37
3.2.9 TECHNICAL SCHEDULES ....................................................................................................................... 37
3.3 132 KV THREE POLE DISCONNECTORS: ....................................................................................................... 38

3.3.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 38
3.3.2 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 38
3.3.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 38
3.3.4 RATING ............................................................................................................................................... 39
3.3.5 TESTS .................................................................................................................................................. 40
3.3.6 TECHNICAL SCHEDULES ....................................................................................................................... 40
3.4 132kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (CVTs): ............................................................................... 40

3.4.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 40
3.4.2 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................................................................. 40
3.4.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 40
3.4.4 RATINGS.............................................................................................................................................. 41
3.4.5 MARKING ............................................................................................................................................ 41
3.4.6 TEST .................................................................................................................................................... 42
3.4.7 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 42
3.4.8 TECHNICAL GUARANTEES .................................................................................................................... 42
3.5 132 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: ............................................................................................................ 42

3.5.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 42
3.5.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 42
3.5.4 RATINGS.............................................................................................................................................. 43
3.5.5 MARKING ............................................................................................................................................ 43
3.5.6 TESTS .................................................................................................................................................. 44
3.5.7 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 44
iv
3.6 132 KV SURGE ARRESTERS: ......................................................................................................................... 44

3.6.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 44
3.6.2 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 45
3.6.3 RATING ............................................................................................................................................... 45
3.6.4 MARKING ............................................................................................................................................ 45
3.6.5 TESTS .................................................................................................................................................. 46
3.6.6 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 46
3.7 132/33 KV POWER TRANSFOMERS: ............................................................................................................ 46

3.7.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 46
3.7.2 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 46
3.7.3 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................... 47
3.7.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................................... 47
3.7.6 Ratings ................................................................................................................................................ 49
3.7.7 Windings and Connections.......................................................................................................................49
3.7.8 Tapping ............................................................................................................................................... 50
3.7.9 Core and Flux Density .......................................................................................................................... 51
3.7.10 Losses, Regulation and Impedance ...................................................................................................... 52
3.7.11 Current Transformers to be fitted ........................................................................................................ 53
3.7.12 AIR CLEARANCE ................................................................................................................................... 54
3.7.13 INSULATION LEVELS............................................................................................................................. 55
3.7.14 ON LOAD TAP CHANGER AND MECHANISM BOX .................................................................................. 55
3.7.15 Remote Tap Changer Control Panel ..................................................................................................... 56
3.7.16 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATING RELAY ......................................................................................... 57
3.7.17 PARALLEL OPERATION ......................................................................................................................... 57
3.7.18 MARSHALLING KIOSK (Box).................................................................................................................. 58
3.7.19 AUXILIARY SUPPLIES ............................................................................................................................ 59
3.7.20 TRANSFORMER TANK AND TANK COVER.............................................................................................. 59
3.7.21 PAINT WORK ....................................................................................................................................... 60
3.7.22 COOLING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................ 61
3.7.23 FITTINGS ............................................................................................................................................. 62
3.7.24 ACCESSORIES ....................................................................................................................................... 63
3.7.25 TRANSFORMER OIL.............................................................................................................................. 64
3.7.26 CAPITALIZATION .................................................................................................................................. 64
3.7.27 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 65
3.7.28 TESTS AND INSPECTION ....................................................................................................................... 65
3.7.29 MARKING, LABELLING AND PACKING ................................................................................................... 67
3.8 SUB STATION LOCAL TRANSFORMER.......................................................................................................... 67

3.8.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 67
3.8.2 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................. 67
3.8.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 68
3.8.4 STANDARD SIZES ................................................................................................................................. 68
3.8.5 RATINGS.............................................................................................................................................. 68
3.8.6 TESTS .................................................................................................................................................. 69
3.9 33kV CIRCUIT BREAKERS: ........................................................................................................................... 70

3.9.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 70
3.9.2 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 70
3.9.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 70
3.9.4 OPERATING MECHANISM .................................................................................................................... 71
3.9.5 RATINGS.............................................................................................................................................. 72
3.9.6 TESTS .................................................................................................................................................. 72
v
3.9.7 DRAWING AND MANUALS ................................................................................................................... 73

3.9.8 PACKING AND INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 73
3.10 33 KV THREE POLE DISCONNECTORS: ......................................................................................................... 74

3.10.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 74
3.10.2 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 74
3.10.3 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................... 74
3.10.4 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 74
3.10.5 RATING ............................................................................................................................................... 75
3.10.6 TESTS .................................................................................................................................................. 76
3.11 33kV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ................................................................................................................ 76

3.11.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 76
3.11.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 76
3.11.4 RATINGS.............................................................................................................................................. 77
3.11.5 MARKING ............................................................................................................................................ 77
3.11.6 TEST .................................................................................................................................................... 77
3.11.7 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 78
3.12 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: .............................................................................................................. 78

3.12.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 78
3.12.2 System Characteristics ......................................................................................................................... 78
3.12.3 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 78
3.12.4 RATINGS.............................................................................................................................................. 79
3.12.5 MARKING ............................................................................................................................................ 79
3.12.6 TESTS .................................................................................................................................................. 80
3.12.7 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 80
3.13 33 KV SURGE ARRESTERS:........................................................................................................................... 80

3.13.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 80
3.13.2 CONSTRUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 80
3.13.3 RATING ............................................................................................................................................... 81
3.13.4 MARKING ............................................................................................................................................ 81
3.13.5 TESTS .................................................................................................................................................. 81
3.13.6 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................ 82
3.14 CONTROL, MEASURING AND PROTECTIVE RELAYING EQUIPMENT ............................................................. 82

3.14.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................................. 82
3.14.2 Requirements for Design ..................................................................................................................... 82
3.14.3 Protection and Alarm .......................................................................................................................... 83
3.15 ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND PANELS ........................................................................................... 83

3.15.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 83
3.16 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS FOR RELAYS, ENERGY METER, TRIP BATTERY & CHARGER................................ 83
3.16.1 PROTECTION RELAYS. .......................................................................................................................... 84
3.16.2 Control ................................................................................................................................................ 90
3.16.3 Control Stations................................................................................................................................... 91
3.16.4 THE ENERGY METER ............................................................................................................................ 94
3.16.5 BATTERIES & CHARGER (110 &48 Volts) ............................................................................................... 96
vi
3.17 TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................... 99

3.17.1 OPGW, COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT AND SCADA REQUIREMENTS.................................................. 99
3.17.2 SCOPE OF WORK ................................................................................................................................. 99
3.17.3 OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW)....................................................................................................... 100
3.17.4 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................................... 102
3.17.5 SPEECH EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................................................... 105
3.17.6 REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS................................................................................................................. 105
3.17.7 TECHNICAL GUARANTEES .................................................................................................................. 116
3.18 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................................................... 116

3.18.1 SCOPE ............................................................................................................................................... 116
3.18.2 CABLES .............................................................................................................................................. 117
3.18.3 INSULATORS AND FITTINGS ............................................................................................................... 118
3.18.4 STEEL STRUCTURES............................................................................................................................ 120
3.18.5 EARTHING MATERIALS....................................................................................................................... 122
3.18.6 OTHER MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................ 122
3.18.7 LIGHTING SYSTEM ............................................................................................................................. 122
3.18.8 MARSHALLING BOXES........................................................................................................................ 124
3.18.9 AC POWER OUTLETS .......................................................................................................................... 124
3.19 CIVIL ENGINEERING AND BUILDING WORKS ............................................................................................. 124

3.19.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 124
3.19.2 SITE SURVEY AND SUBSOIL INVESTIGATION ....................................................................................... 124
3.19.3 DESIGN OF WORKS ............................................................................................................................ 125
3.19.4 GENERAL SITE WORKS ....................................................................................................................... 126
3.19.5 CONCRETING WORK SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................ 131
3.19.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL ........................................................................................................................... 140
3.19.7 BLOCK WORK .................................................................................................................................... 142
3.19.8 FLOOR LAYING................................................................................................................................... 145
3.19.9 CABLE DUCTS, DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE DISPOSAL ........................................................................ 146
3.19.10 PAINTING AND DECORATING ......................................................................................................... 146
3.19.11 SECURITY FENCING AND GATES ..................................................................................................... 147
3.19.12 ANCILLARY CIVIL ENGINEERING AND BUILDING WORKS ................................................................. 148
3.20 TESTS AT THE SITE .................................................................................................................................... 150
3.21 SITE VISIT.................................................................................................................................................. 152
3.22 TECHNICAL SCHEDULES........................................................................................................................... 153

3.22.1 PREAMBLE ........................................................................................................................................ 154
3.22.2 SCHEDULE VI-1a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR................................................. 155
3.22.3 SCHEDULE VI-1b INFORMATIVE DATA OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR ........................................................ 160
3.22.4 SCHEDULE VI 3a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................................... 163
3.22.5 SCHEDULE VI 3b INFORMATIVE DATA, CONTROL SYSTEM ................................................................. 164
3.22.6 SCHEDULE VI 4a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, PROTECTION ETC. .......................................................... 165
3.22.7 SCHEDULE VI 4b INFORMATIVE DATA, PROTECTION ETC. .................................................................. 168
3.22.8 SCHEDULE VI 6a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, EARTHING ...................................................................... 172
3.22.9 SCHEDULE VI 6b INFORMATIVE DATA, EARTHING ............................................................................. 173
3.22.10 SCHEDULE VI 7a - TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, POWER TRANSFORMERS ........................................... 174
3.22.11 SCHEDULE VI-7b - INFORMATIVE DATA, POWER TRANSFORMERS .................................................. 181
3.22.12 SCHEDULE VI 8a - TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS................................. 190
3.22.13 SCHEDULE VI-8b - INFORMATIVE DATA, DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER ......................................... 192
3.22.14 SCHEDULE VI-9a- GAURANTEE DATA TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM ............................................ 194
3.23 Forms and Procedures .............................................................................................................................. 196

Form of Completion Certificate ........................................................................................................................ 198
Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate ..................................................................................................... 199
vii
Change Order Procedure and Forms ................................................................................................................ 200

Annex 1. Request for Change Proposal ............................................................................................................ 202
Annex 2. Estimate for Change Proposal ........................................................................................................... 204
Annex 3. Acceptance of Estimate .................................................................................................................... 206
Annex 4. Change Proposal ............................................................................................................................... 207
Annex 5. Change Order ................................................................................................................................... 210
Annex 6. Pending Agreement Change Order .................................................................................................... 211
Annex 7. Application for Change Proposal ....................................................................................................... 213
3.24 DRAWINGS REFERENCE ............................................................................................................................ 215

Kenya Power and Lighting Company 1-1 Technical Specifications and Drawing Part 2B
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, SCHEDULES & DRAWINGS
1. SCOPE OF WORKS:
This section covers the manufacturing, supplying, testing before shipment, painting, packing
for transport, insuring, shipping, delivering to the port of Kenya, landing, customs clearing,
transporting from the port to the site, erecting, constructing, installing, site testing and
commissioning of the plant as generally described below.
The proposed substation will be at Kutus, approximately 120 km by road North-East of

Nairobi. A route map to Kutus is given below:
Subsequent paragraphs will give detailed descriptions and requirements as to the plant
specified herein. The works will include:
Kutus Substation
Establish a 132kV Substation at Kutus with

§ Three (3No.) 132kV circuit breakers- one gang-operated mechanism and other
two single pole operated
§ Two (2No.) 132kV line isolator assembly with an integral earth switch
§ Four (4No.) 132kV Bus bar isolators
§ Two sets (6 No.) of 132kV current transformers
§ Two sets (6No.) of 132kV Line surge arrester
§ Two sets (6No.) 132kV Capacitive Voltage Transformer
§ One set (3No.) of 132kV transformer surge arresters
§ One set (3No.) of 33kV transformer surge arresters

§ 1x 23MVA , 132/33KV Transformer

§ One (1No.) 33kV incomer circuit breaker (gang operated mechanism)
§ Four (4No.) 33kV feeder circuit breakers
§ Four (4No.) 33kV bus bar isolators
§ Two (2No.) 33kV incomer isolators
§ Four (4No.) 33kV line isolators with integral earth switch
§ 1 No. of three phase, 33kV voltage transformers
§ Four sets (12 No.) of 33kV current transformers-one set for each feeder
§ Five sets (15No.) of 33kV Line surge arrester
§ 33kV busbar in 50mm diameter by 5mm thick copper tube
§ Bus post & String insulators : one lot
§ Busbar protection panel with high impedance differential numeric relay
§ Line differential protection using OPGW
§ Line distance protection relays (132kV lines)
§ Line back up protection, over current & earth fault, over voltage (132 kV lines).
§ Line metering cubicle with meters of Cl. 0.2 accuracy (for 4 feeders, 1 incomer
and 2no. 132kV lines).
§ Line distance protection for each 33kV feeder
§ Separate Back up protection (over current and earth fault) and auto reclose for
each 33kV feeders
§ 1x 200kVa, 33/0.433 kV substation transformer, on the 33kV busbar.
§ Substation and equipment earthing – one lot
§ Cabling : One Lot
§ Structures and Civil Works including cable trenches, drainage and landscaping –
One Lot
§ Substation Illumination System- One Lot
§ One Lot of 33kV Busbar material
§ One Lot of 132kV bus bar materials
§ Safety Appliances
§ Build a new control room of an approved design as given in drawing 3.24 ii) with
a floor area of at least 384m2;
1.1 DETAILED DESCRIPTION
KUTUS 132/33KV SUBSTATION
a.) Protection and control

The following equipment shall be provided and installed for the purposes of protection,
control and monitoring.
§ Line differential protection using OPGW as first main

§ Distance protection as the second main protection
§ Overcurrent relays as backup protection and independent of the distance relay.
§ Busbar protection covering the 132 kV bays.
§ Annunciator relay (with audible alarm)
§ Autoreclose with synch-check for 132 kV lines. Selection for single pole auto-
recloser delayed autoreclose to be implemented on the panel using a selector
switch.
§ Transformer differential protection relay
§ Transformer LV overcurrent (independent)

§ Transformer HV overcurrent ( independent)

§ Transformer LV restricted earth fault
§ Transformer tapchanger regulating relay(tap changer panel)
b.) 132kV protection panel

Two 132kV protection panels shall include but not limited to:
· Line differential protection
· Overcurrent
· Other accessories to ensure full protection functionality
The other panels shall include

· Line distance protection
· Overvoltage
c.) 132 kV Metering and control equipment panel.

This shall accommodate the controls for 132kV lines, the transformer circuit breaker
controls, mimic diagram (with approved colour codes) and shall also incorporate the
following but not limited to:
§ Substation control unit

§ Line annunciator relay
§ 1 Ammeter per phase
§ MW and MVAR Meters
§ Energy meter
§ Trip/close control switch
§ Circuit Breaker ON/OFF indication
§ Voltage meter with selector switch.
§ Transducer for MW and MVAR to be interfaced with SCADA.
§ Other accessories to ensure full functionality
d.) 132 kV Circuit Breaker Panels

The circuit breaker panel shall include but not limited to:
§ Breaker fail protection relay
§ Pole discrepancy
§ Auto reclose relay
§ Sychro check
§ Trip circuit supervision (both trip coils)
§ Tripping relay with visible flag
§ Annunciation relay for breaker functions(gas pressure alarm, block, breaker fail,
pole discrepancy, dc supply failure)
§ Other accessories to ensure full protection functionality
e.) 33 kV Feeder panels

The 33kV feeder panels shall include but not limited to:
· Line distance protection as the main protection
· Three phase overcurrent and earth fault
· Sensitive earth fault relay
· Auto reclose relay

· Trip relay
· Trip supervision relay
· Annunciation relay
· A/R IN OUT selector switch
· Energy meter
· Current and Voltage transducers
· Circuit breaker control switch and status indication
f) 33kV incomer panel

The 33kV incomer panel shall include but not limited to:
· Three phase overcurrent and earth fault
· Three directional overcurrent and earth fault
· Trip relay
· Trip circuit supervision
· Ammeter selector switch
· Ammeter with MDI
· Energy meter
· MW, MVAR, Current and Voltage transducers
· Circuit breaker control switch and status indication
g) Transformer protection panel

The transformer protection panel shall include but not limited to:
· Transformer differential
· Restricted earth fault
· HV overcurrent
· Annunciation relay and transformer function
· Master Trip relay
· Lv trip relay
h) Tapchanger panel
The transformer tapchanger panel shall include but not limited to:
· Voltage regulation relay

· Selector switch Auto on/off
· Manual switch raise/lower
· Tapchanger function
· Local /remote
· Other accessories to ensure full functionality
i) Battery
§ Two sets of 110 V dc battery and battery charger shall be provided.

§ Two sets of 48V dc battery and battery charger shall be provided
§

j) Communications and Scada
· Fibre optic STM-1 terminal equipment to transmit voice and data to the
Regional control centre at Kiganjo and the National Control Centre at Juja. The
OLTE shall be equipped with a fast Ethernet port capable of handling at least
10 Mbs. SCADA data shall be collected and transmitted to the RCC and NCC
via IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The contractor shall parameterise offered
substation control/RTU to operate seamlessly with existing system.
k) Control building
The new control building shall be of an approved design as given in drawing 3.24 ii)
and of at least 24000 x 16000 mm and shall accommodate the new equipment. It
shall house
§ Circuit breaker control and protection relay panels room
§ Battery room
§ Battery chargers and distribution boards
§ Communication equipment
§ Fully furnished office with a television set complete with aerial.
§ A washroom , WC, Urinal and Bath
§ Equipment/utility store
§ Fully furnished kitchen

2. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND AUXILIARIES
(1) Responsibility for electrical control and auxiliaries.

The contractor shall provide all control, indication, alarm and protection devices and
all auxiliary equipment with wiring and interconnecting cable which are integral parts
of or are directly associated with or mounted on the equipment to be supplied under
this contract.
(2) Operation and control.

The operations, control procedures, monitoring and protective devices for the plants
are described in Equipment Technical Specifications.
The Contractor shall take all measures and furnish all requirements necessary for
effecting the intended method of operation and control.
The station functional control shall be possible in a hierarchic structure as follows:

· Supervisory Control from a Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
System. This will be connected to Regional Control Centre (RCCs) in Kiganjo and
NCC in Nairobi. The RCCs are subordinated the National Control Centre (NCC). 132
kV stations shall also be under direct Supervisory Control from NCC in the way that
control of the 132 kV part and the MV transformer breakers shall be from NCC
whereas MV line breakers shall be controlled from RCC. Indications shall be
available both in NCC and RCC.
· Local Control from the local relay and protection panels or from the instrument
sections on MV switchboards.
· Direct Control/Emergency Control from the apparatus itself.
The stations shall function without interruptions even if connection to higher levels
fails. A local/remote switch shall be accommodated on each control position blocking
remote operation but not indication. The position of this switch shall be indicated in
the higher levels of operation.
The control shall include operation of all circuit breakers and motorised disconnectors
and or autoreclosers. Status indication shall be available in the supervisory system for
all HV and MV breakers in the system as well as busbar voltages, line and transformer
load in kVA (plus MW and MVAr for 66 kV and above). For on-load tap changers
position indication and raising/lowering of the tap changer position shall be possible
supervisory and remotely. MV transformers may be equipped with automatic voltage
control functions and manual override shall then only be possible if the automatic
function is blocked locally. Relay trips and other relevant alarms shall also be
transferred.
Direct control of all station switchgear at the respective switchyards/panels shall be

possible.
Interlocking devices and automatic change-over systems shall be incorporated in the

control circuits in the quantity needed to guarantee non-interruption and correct
sequence of operation of the equipment. Protective devices shall be supplied in
accordance with the Particular Technical Specifications, and the particular needs of
such equipment furnished with the aim of ensuring a safe and reliable operation of the

plants in the event of electrical and mechanical disturbances or in case of mal-operation

by the plant personnel shall be taken into consideration.
The signals and command to be transmitted are given in Particular Technical

Specifications
All equipment, instruments and devices in the substation necessary for supervisory,
remote and local control as well as for protection, signaling and indication shall be
included in the Bid and hence the Contract, it being understood so that the enumeration
found in Scope of Works, in this respect is indicative but not limiting.
Interlocking devices shall be incorporated in the control circuit to ensure proper

sequence and correct operation of the equipment (breaker, isolator and earth switch).
2.2. DESIGN DATA FOR LOW VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT
Low voltage installation shall be in accordance with EMC directives. The rating and
design criteria for low voltage equipment shall be as follows:
2.2.1 AC system
Paramenter Value
1 Rated voltage between phase 415V 3ph 4wire
2 Rated voltage between phase to earth 240V
3 Grounding system PME
4 Frequency 50hz
5 Voltage variation +/-6%
6 Frequency variation +/-5%
7 Power frequency Test Voltage 1 min 3 KV
8 Thermal rating of conductors 120 % of load
9 Max short-circuit Current 31.5 kA
The three-phase supply shall be used for power circuit and the single-phase supply for
lighting, indication, motor controls and similar small power circuits. The single phase
supply within, cubicles and panels shall be transformed down to 110 Volt AC if
necessary.
Unless otherwise specified, the equipment provided under this contract is to be
capable of reliable operation at voltages as low as 85% of the rated voltage, and to
withstand continuously up to 110% supply voltage above the rated value of 240V or
415V AC.
AC LV equipment can, after the Project Manager’s approval, be rated for lower short-
circuit current if calculation demonstrates that lower values are applicable at the place
of installation. DC equipment shall be adapted to the actual values at sites as shown in
calculations.

2.2.2. DC system
Parameter Value
1 Rated voltage between phase 110V DC- 2 wire
2 Voltage variation +/-6%
3 Thermal rating of conductors 120 % of load
4 Max short-circuit Current 31.5 kA
DC equipment shall be adapted to the actual values at sites as shown in calculations.
The 110Volt, 2-wire will be used for essential controls indication, alarm, protection
relays, emergency lighting, circuit breaker tripping and closing circuit.
All equipment and apparatus except the electrical protective relays and electronic
equipment shall be capable of satisfactory operation at 80% to 125% of the rated
supply voltage. The electrical protective relays and electronic equipment shall be
capable of satisfactory operation of 85% to 120% of the rated supply voltage. All
devices on DC operating circuit for the circuit breakers shall also be capable of
satisfactory operation even at 130% of the rated working voltage, considering
equalizing charge of storage battery.
DC loads to be supplied from battery and/or battery charger shall be calculated by the
contractor and lists of those loads shall be submitted. The rating of the Station
Auxiliary DC supply will be such that the station DC supply controlled operations
will function normally for at least 10 hours following the loss of Auxiliary AC supply
to the Battery Charger.
2.2.3 220 V AC Un-interrupted supply (UPS)

If specified DC/AC UPS shall supply dedicated computer and measuring equipment.
The supply shall be 230 V – IT.
2.3 MOTORS
2.3.1.General
As far as possible and if nothing else is specified, motors shall be three phase squirrel
cage motors complying with IEC 60034 and with dimensions according to IEC
60072. Such motors shall have the following data:
Parameter Value
1 Continuous rating 130 % of mechanical
load
2 Frequency band for continuous rated operation 47 – 57 Hz
without exceeding temperature class
3 Voltage band for continuous rated operation without -15 % - +10 %
exceeding temperature class
4 Maximum start current with direct start

Parameter Value
a Motors above 75 kW 5 x In
b Motors between 35 and 75 kW 6x In
5 Insulation class F
6 Temperature rise B
7 Direct starting range 75 – 110 % of Un
Motors shall have sealed ball or roller bearings. If the bearing is not sealed for life it
shall withstand two years of operation before refill of lubricants.
Outdoor motors and motors erected in moist environment shall be equipped with still-
stand heaters controlled from the starter. The heater shall be so dimensioned that
maximum temperature is not reached even if the heater remains connected under
operation.
Motors shall withstand three consequent starts without overheating. Motors over 20
kW shall be equipped with thermistor based temperature protection.
The three line connections of AC motors shall be brought out to a terminal box sealed
from the motor. The terminal arrangement shall be suitable for the reception of
aluminium and copper cable. A permanently attached diagram or instruction sheet
shall be provided giving the connections for the required direction of rotation. If only
one direction of rotation is permitted, this shall be clearly marked.
Motors to be connected to variable speed drives shall be specially adapted to this.
2.3.2 Special Motors

Other types of motors shall only be used where squirrel cage motors are inconvenient
to use (and then only after approval by the project manager) or if DC motors are
specified. Such motors shall as far as possible follow the requirements set above.
Brushes shall be designed with a constant brush pressure and shall withstand at least 5
000 hours of operation before they have to be replaced. It shall always be at least two
brushes in parallel and the brush-holders shall not touch the commutators when the
brushes wear out. The press fingers shall not carry the current and each brush shall be
separately adjustable.
Where single phase motors are used the motors shall be grouped so as to form,
approximately, a balanced three phase load.
2.3.3 Motor control gear

Control gear shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60947, the control gear being
rated according to the duty imposed by the particular application. No replacement of
equipment shall be necessary after short circuit (ref. IEC 60947)
Motor contactors shall comply with IEC 60947 class of intermittent duty 0-3 and
utilisation category AC4. The contactors and their associated apparatus shall be
capable of switching the stalled current, and shall have a continuous current rating of
at least 50% greater than the full load current of the motors they control.

The operating currents of overload trips fitted to motor contactors shall be

substantially independent of ambient temperature conditions, including the effect of
direct sunlight on the enclosure in which the contactors are installed.
Where small motors are connected in groups, the group protection shall be arranged
so that it will operate satisfactorily in the event of a fault occurring on a single motor.
Each motor or group of motors shall be provided with control gear for starting and
stopping by hand and automatically. Overload and single-phasing protection shall be
provided. Facilities for padlocking the supply in off position shall be provided.
2.4 COMPUTER BASED CONTROLLERS

Computer Based Controllers inclusive Programmable Logical Controllers (PLC) can
be used for individual control functions. Such equipment shall be designed for
industrial environment and application in high voltage plants. The control equipment
must be fed from the general station DC supply.
The control equipment must be equipped with internal “watchdog” function giving
external potential free alarm by internal fault. The operational status shall be frozen
by fault or un-normal function so it can be re-established after restart. The process
must be shut down to a safe stage if fatal faults occur in the controller.
Analogue and digital in- and out puts must be galvanic isolated and potential free and
must, together with the enclosure, screen against disturbance from electromagnetic
field occurring by short-circuit, switching over voltages or lightning discharges. The
control equipment shall be tested according IEC 60255 and fulfil relevant EMC
requirements for Industrial Environment.
Digital in- and outputs shall be tested and approved for switching of DC voltages
supplied by the main plant battery (AC values are irrelevant).
Programmes shall be stored in “flash ram” or similar storage medium and shall not be
destroyed or changed by power failure (i.e. Separate backup battery shall not be used).
The memory shall contain the last program version.
All programming of control sequences shall be documented in a self-explanatory way

not requiring special program knowledge for understanding (function block
programming or similar)
Communication between various controllers (and the main control system) can be
over fibre optical cable provided agreement between the contractors. Such
communication must use open protocols to be approved by the Project Manager. The
Bidder shall in any case present a verification of transmission quality.
The Controllers shall be delivered with software and software licences needed for
testing, setting and reconfiguration. If hardware other than laptop is required for this
such shall be included in the supply.

2.5 DESIGN DATA FOR HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT

The rating and design criteria for the HV and MV plant and equipment shall be as
follows:
Item Parameters SYSTEM PARAMETER

132 kV 33kV
1 System description 50 Hz, 3 phase, 3 50 Hz, 3 phase, 3
wire wire
2 Neutral point earthing Solid earthed Solid earthed
3 Nominal voltage of networks 132 kV 33kV
4 Highest system voltage as defined 145 kV 36kV
by IEC-60038 *1
5 Short circuit and earth fault current, 31.5 kA 25kA
symmetrical r.m.s value (min
breaking current) not less than *2
6 Thermal short-circuit current, 31.5 kA 25kA
not less than 1 second
7 Dynamic peak current (min making 80 kA 63kA
current) not less than
8 Rated current of busbars and bus 2, 000 A 1,250A
coupler if not given in Scope of
Works, for each individual
substation
9 Minimum rated current of isolating 1, 250 A 800A
switches and circuit breakers if not
given in Scope of Works
10 Insulation level according
IEC 60071: *3
10a Switching surge withstand voltage
Phase-to-earth N/A N/A
Longitudinal impulse component of N/A N/A
combined test
10b Lightning impulse withstand voltage 650 kV 200kV
(1.2/50 µs kVpeak)
10c Test voltage at power frequency 275 kV 90kV
1 min dry and wet. To earth and
between phases
11 For the design and erection of the conductors in the switchyard the following
minimum clearances shall be observed:
11a Phase to earth [mm] 1 270 500
11b Phase to phase [mm] 1 475 435
11c Bus bars phase to phase [mm] 3 000 1400
*1
11e Height to live parts above 5 000 2900
ground[mm]
11f Lowest part of insulators above 3 500 2500
ground [mm]

Item Parameters SYSTEM PARAMETER

132 kV 33kV
12 Maximum temperature rise of 40 ºC 40 ºC
conductors above ambient
temperature (40 ºC)
13 Maximum wind pressure on 430 N/m2 430 N/m2
conductors and cylindrical objects
14 Maximum wind pressure on flat 820 N/m2 820 N/m2
surfaces
15 Minimum nominal creepage 25mm/kV 25mm/kV
distance as defined in IEC 60815,
Table II
Note *1)
Ref IEC 60038)
Note *2)
For all current carrying parts the permissible short circuit duration shall be at least 1
second. Indoor equipment shall be arc tested in accordance with IEC 60298
amendment 2. The dynamic or momentary short circuit current on which the
equipment design shall be based shall be computed by multiplying the r.m.s value of
the symmetrical short circuit current by the factor 1.8 x 2^0.5
Note *3)
Ref IEC 60071)
2.6 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specifically stated in Equipment Technical Specifications or Scope of

Works, any equipment, component and assembly shall be designed for the following
service conditions:
Parameter Max Min

Ambient air temperature
Outdoor +40°C -1°C
Indoor +40°C -1°C
24 hour average maximum +30°C -1°C
Ambient temperature for cables in the ground +40 °C -1°C
Relative humidity 90% 65%
Height above sea level 1500 m Below 1100m

Cooling water temperature N/A N/A
EMC Class (IEC 61000) Industrial environments
Seismic coefficient 0.16
Wind pressure on project area 430 383
of conductors and cylindrical objects , N/m²
Maximum wind pressure on steel members 820 N/m²
on 1.5 times projected area
Rainfall conditions

Parameter Max Min

Average, mm/year 1500-2500
Maximum, mm in 24 Hrs 160
Annual mean isokeraunic level Max 180 days
Environmental Pollution Medium to High
MaximumWind Velocity 120 km/hr (33.3 m/s)
Wherever any of these maximum or 24 hour average temperatures exceed the normal
service condition temperatures of the IEC Recommendations for the relevant
equipment, or of such other standard which is approved to be applied, the permissible
temperature rises of the IEC Recommendations or the standard shall be reduced by
the same amount as the difference between the above figures and the normal service
condition temperatures. The Contractor shall guarantee these reduced temperature
rises.
All air cooled equipment shall be cooled with convection (i.e. without fans) provided
other cooling methods are not explicitly allowed for in the specifications.
2.7 SEISMIC COEFFICIENT
The seismic coefficient shall be taken as 0.16
2.8 TROPICALIZATION
In choosing materials their finishes, due regard shall be given to the humid tropical
conditions under which the plant will be called upon to work. The contractor shall
submit details of his usual practice which have proven satisfactory and which he
recommends for application to the parts of the work, which may be affected by
tropical conditions. The materials and finishes used shall be approved by the
Employer. All switchgear and control cubicles shall also be rodent and vermin proof.
2.9 EARTHING
The earthing grid comprising earthing bus and stub under the outdoor switchgear and
the control building shall be installed by the contractor. The depth shall be 600mm.
Wiring for earthing and connections from the equipment, including for all ancillary
equipment, control boards, steel structures, etc shall be installed under this contract.
Conductor size used for main earthing network will be 95mm2 copper. Main
equipment shall be connected with 95mm2 copper wire. Auxiliary equipment shall be
connected with at least 35mm2 copper wire main to main earthing network.
2.10 UNIT OF MEASUREMENT AND LANGUAGE
In all correspondence, in all technical schedules and on all drawings prepared by the
Contractor, the metric units of measurement shall be used. On drawings or printed
pamphlets where other units have been used, the equivalent metric measurements
shall be added. All documents, correspondence, drawings, reports, schedules

instructions, and nameplate readings of the equipment shall be in the language stated
in the Bid Data sheet.
2.11 WORKING STRESS AND DESIGN
(1) General
The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that they will not
suffer damage under the most adverse conditions nor result in deflections and
vibrations, which might adversely affect the operation of the equipment. Mechanisms
shall be constructed to avoid sticking due to rust or corrosion.
The equipment and apparatus shall be designed and manufactured in the best and most
substantial and workmanlike manner with materials best suited to their respective
purpose and generally in accordance with up-to-date recognized standards of good
practice.
All parts which will or might have to be dismantled for the purpose of serving or
replacement shall be assembled with anti-corrosive fasteners. The type, material and
size of all fasteners shall be selected to safely withstand the maximum superimposed
direct, alternating, kinetic and all loads induced by workmen when installing or
removing the fasteners during the life of the equipment.
Suitable structural steel bases or frames shall be provided where necessary to transmit
to the concrete foundations all loads imposed by the various parts of the equipment.
Such bases or frames shall be supplied complete with suitable anchor bolts and shall
be so proportioned that the bearing loads imposed on the concrete foundations will not
exceed 50kg per square centimetre.
The equipment should be designed to cope with 0.16 G acceleration of seismology on

the centres of gravity.
Whenever possible, all similar parts, including spare parts, shall be made
interchangeable. Such parts shall be of the same materials and workmanship and shall
be constructed to such tolerances as to enable substitution or replacement by spare
parts easily and quickly.
All equipment shall be designed to minimize the risk of fire and consequential
damage, to prevent ingress of vermin, dust and dirt, and accidental contact with
electrically energized or moving parts. The plant shall be capable of continuous
operation with minimum attention and maintenance in the exceptionally severe
conditions likely to be obtained in a tropical climate.
Upon request by the Employer complete information regarding the design

assumptions, loading and operating conditions, deflections and unit stresses used in
the design shall be provided by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have examined the specification and drawings
herewith, and unless stated specifically to the contrary in the schedule of proposed
conditions and /or deviations from the specification to have concurred with the design
and layout of the applicable project features as being sufficient to insure reliability
and safety in operation, freedom from undue stresses, adequate drainage and other
essentials for a satisfactory working plant.
(2) Strength and quality

All steel castings and weldings and all site weldings shall be stress-relieved by heat
treatment before machining, and castings shall be stress-relieved again after repair by
welding.
Liberal factors of safety shall be used throughout, especially in the design of all parts
subject to alternating stresses or shocks.
2.12 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
Materials shall be new; the best of their respective kinds and such as are usual and
suitable for work of like character. All materials shall comply with the latest issues of
the specified standard unless otherwise specified or permitted by the Employer.
Workmanship shall be of the highest class throughout to ensure reliable and vibration-
Operations. The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that the
stresses to which they may be subjected shall not cause distortion, undue wear, or
damage under the most severe conditions encountered in service.
All parts shall conform to the dimensions shown on and shall be built in accordance
with approved drawings. All joints, datum surfaces and meeting components shall be
machined and all castings shall be spot faced for nuts. All machined finished shall be
shown on the drawings. All screw, bolts, studs and nuts and threads for pipe shall
conform to the latest standards of the International Organization for Standardization
covering these components and shall all conform to the standards for metric sizes.
The Contractor shall never incorporate any standards or size system by his own
account, regardless of that accepted and incorporated in this Contract.
All materials and works that have cracks, flaws or other defects or inferior
workmanship will be rejected by the Employer. All defective materials shall be
promptly removed from the site by the Contractor, and inferior workmanship shall be
cut out and replaced.
(1) Standard Specifications

The design, materials, manufacture, testing, inspection and performance shall,
unless otherwise specified in the Special requirements of these Specifications,
conform to the authorized standards of the International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) or equivalent national standards. The Contractor shall
include a statement of the standards, intended to be used.
(2) Assembly
Necessary items of equipment shall be assembled in the factory prior to
shipment and type tests shall be performed by the contractor as may be

required to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Employer the adequacy of

equipment and its component parts. All tests should simulate normal
operating conditions as closely as possible. All dismantled parts shall be
properly match marked and doweled to ensure correct assembly in the field.
(3) Casting
Casting shall be true to pattern, of workmanlike finish and of uniform quality
and condition, free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage defects,
cracks or other injurious defects, shall be satisfactorily cleaned for their
intended purpose.
Major defect on castings shall not be repaired, plugged, or welded without

permission of the Employer. Such permission will be given only when the
defects are small and do not adversely affect the Strength, use or
merchantability of the castings. The Contractor will give the distinction
between major and minor defects. Excessive segregation of impurities or
alloys at critical points in a casting will be a cause for its rejection. The
largest fillets compatible with the design shall be incorporated wherever a
change in section occurs. All castings shall be stress-relieved before
machining and again after repair by welding.
Plates to be joined by welding shall be accurately cut to size and rolled by

pressure to the proper curvature, which shall be continuous from the edges.
Flattening in the curvature along the edges with correction by blows will not
be allowed. The dimensions and shape of the edges to be jointed shall be such
as to allow thorough fusion and complete penetration, and the edges of plates
shall be properly formed to accommodate the various welding conditions.
(4) Forging
The ingots from which the forgings are made shall be cast in metal moulds.
The workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and the forgings shall be
free from all defects affecting their strength and durability, including seams,
pipes, flaws, cracks, scales, fins, porosity, hard spots, excessive non-metallic
inclusions and segregations.
The largest fillets compatible with the design shall be incorporated wherever a
change in section occurs. All finished surfaces of forgings shall be smooth
and free from tool marks.
The forging shall be clearly stamped with the heat number in such locations to
be readily observed when the forging is assembled in a completed unit.
(5) Welding
Wherever welding is specified or permitted, a welding process, including
stress relieve treatment as required if necessary, conforming to an appropriate
and widely recognized professional standard shall be used. All welders and
welding operators shall be fully qualified by such a standard.

After the welding process has been approved by the Employer, the Contractor
shall record it on a special drawing, which shall thereupon become one of the
drawings of the Contract.
Radiograph inspection shall be carried out by the Contractor when required by
the standards, Specifications, or the design criteria employed. All welds
which, in the opinion of the Employer, may be subject to the full stress
induced in the adjacent plate, or which in the opinion of the Employer, do not
appear to conform to the welding standard shall be radiographed when
required.
All defects in welds shall be chipped out to sound metal and such areas shall
be magnetically or ultrasonically tested to ensure that the defect has been
completely removed before repair welding.
Plates to be joined by welding shall be accurately cut to size and rolled by

pressure to the proper curvature, which shall be continuous from the edge.
Flattening in the curvature along the edges with correction by blows will not
be allowed. The dimensions and shape of the edges to be jointed shall be such
as to allow through fusion and complete penetration, and the edges of plates
shall be properly formed to accommodate the various welding conditions.
The surfaces of the plates adjacent to the edges to be welded shall be

thoroughly cleaned of all rust, grease and scale to bright metal. All important
weldings shall be stress-relieved by heat treatment before machining.
(6) Galvanizing
Unless specifically mentioned to the contrary, iron and steel shall be
galvanized in the factory after fabrication. The zinc coating shall be uniform,
clean, smooth and as free from spangle as possible. Galvanizing shall be
applied by the hot dip process for all parts other than steel wires. All steel
wires shall be galvanized by a recognized trade standard.
The minimum quantities of zinc coating shall be 350 gram/m2 for bolts and
nuts and 550 gram/m2 for all other parts except steel wires, unless otherwise
specified in the Contract Documents. The uniformity of zinc coating, tested
by dipping surface shall not be exposed until the surface has been dipped four
times for bolts and nuts, and six times for all parts.
The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not distort or
adversely affect the mechanical properties of the materials.
Special treatment during galvanizing to prevent the formation of “White rust”

during shipment or storage is required. The Tenderer shall state in his Tender
the treatment to be used.
(7) Colour Standard
Each item of equipment shall be painted in accordance with the Clause 5.21.
The final colour of each item shall be decided by the employer after contract.

(8) Nameplate
To facilitate operation and maintenance it is very important that all equipment,
valves, instruments, switches, pipeline, etc., shall be clearly identified by
nameplates showing the function and proper use of each item. Such
identification shall be in English and must be intelligently and carefully
designed to minimize errors and to avoid mal-operation in operation or
maintenance.
The nameplates shall be permanently legible, clearly worded, weather proof

when outdoors and securely mounted in conspicuous and logical locations.
A table showing materials, dimensions, location, mounting and wording shall

be submitted to the Employer for approval.
(9) Cabling and Wiring

The conductor used in substation and switching station shall be continuous
between outlets, and no junction shall be made except within outlets or
junction boxes. The conductor shall be drawn through ducts or conduits after
they have been cleaned. Oil or grease shall not be used as a lubricant for the
drawing operation, but an approved compound may be used for this purpose.
Joints in wiring shall be compressed and insulated with PVC tape or approved
connectors may be used.
(10) Conduits
Rigid steel conduit shall be galvanized inside and outside, or enameled inside.
It shall be of a minimum thickness of 2.3mm and have a minimum inside
diameter of 16mm.
(11) Conduits Installation

Conduits shall be concealed within the walls, ceilings and floors where
possible. Exposed runs of conduit shall be supported within a space of not
more than 150cm. It shall be installed perpendicular to walls, structural
members and ceilings.
Only threaded joints shall be used. Conduit, which were crushed or deformed,
shall not be used in the works.
Conduit shall be installed in such a manner as to ensure that the inside remains
in a dry condition. Conduit shall be securely fastened to all sheet-steel outlets,
junction and pull boxes with galvanized locknuts and bushings.
Exposed conduits shall be finished with the same colour paints as the finished
colour of the wall or ceiling against which the conduits are placed.
All joints and terminations shall comply with the weatherproof or explosion
proof requirements as applicable.

2.13 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
(1) Corona and radio interference

Switchgear shall electrically be designed to avoid local corona formation and
discharge likely to cause radio interference, and shall be designed to mechanically
endure short-circuit current without thermal and mechanical failure for one (1)
second.
The design of all line conductor fittings, vibration dampers, insulator fittings, etc.
shall avoid sharp corners or projections which would produce high electrical stress in
normal operation.
The design of adjacent metal parts and melting surfaces shall be such as to prevent
corrosion of the contact surfaces and to maintain good electrical contact under service
conditions.
Particular care shall be taken during manufacture of conductors and fittings and
during subsequent handling to ensure smooth surface free from abrasion.
(2) Insulators and Fittings

All porcelain insulators and bushings for outdoor equipment shall be brown grazed.
The resin insulators for indoor equipment may be of the inherent colour of the resin.
All fittings shall be malleable iron hot-dipped galvanized alloy.
All the insulators and bushings shall have impressed thereon, before firing the glaze,
the name, initial or trade mark of the manufacturer, the year of manufacture and the
mechanical strength.
(3) Enclosure
The enclosures for switchgear, control and relaying equipment shall be dead-front,
floor-standing or wall-mounting, rigid welded steel frames, completely enclosed by
metal sheets and suitable for indoor or outdoor installation.
The completed sections shall have provisions for lifting and ample strength to
withstand all stresses incidental to shipping, installation and operation without
distortion or other damage.
The floor-standing type enclosure shall be bolted at the bottom to suitable steel
channel and shall be of vermin-proof construction.
Suitable terminal blocks shall be provided for all outgoing power and control cables.
All cable terminals shall generally be located for bottom entry and connections.
The enclosure shall be painted in conformity with the requirements specified in

Clause 1.13.
The degree of protection of the enclosures shall be IP 41 for indoor switchgear, IP 54

for outdoor switchgear and IP 51 for indoor control and relaying equipment
conforming to IEC 529 and IEC 144.

Interior illumination lamps operated by door switches shall be provided for each
enclosure as much as applicable. At least one 240V convenience outlet of Kenya use
shall be provided for each enclosure at convenient location.
Space heaters for 240-volt A.C. shall be provided inside the enclosures to prevent
moisture condensation. A manual switch to control the heaters shall be provided in
the enclosures.
(4) Measuring Instruments

All measuring instruments shall be of flush-mounted, back-connected, dust-proof and
heavy-duty switchboard type. Each measuring instrument shall have a removable
cover, either transparent or with a transparent window. Each instrument shall be
suitable for operation with the instrument transformers shown on the drawing under
both normal and short-circuit conditions.
For analog type instruments, scale plates shall be of a permanent white circular or
rectangular finish with black pointer and markings. The scale range shall be
determined from the current transformer and voltage transformer ratios.
All measuring instruments of analog type shall be approximately 110mm2 enclosures

and shall be provided with clearly readable long scale, approximately 240 degrees.
The maximum error shall be not more than one and a half (1.5) percent of full-scale
range.
(5) Indicating Lamp Assemblies

Indicating lamp assemblies for the enclosures shall be of the switchboard type,
insulated for 110-volt D.C. service, with appropriately coloured lens and integrally
mounted resistors for 110-volt service. The lens shall be made of a material, which
will not be softened by the heat from the lamps.
Red indicating lamps shall be used for “ON” position and green lamps for “OFF”
position.
(6) Nameplates and Escutcheon Plates

Each cubicle, panel, meter, switch and device shall be provided with a nameplate or
escutcheon plate for identification. Each equipment shall be provided with a rating
plate containing the necessary information specified in the relevant IEC standards.
The plates shall be made of weatherproof and corrosion-proof materials and shall not
be deformed under the service conditions at the site. The entries on the plates shall be
indelibly marked by engraving to black letter on a white background. The language
of all plates shall be English.
(7) Wiring
(a) General
All wiring inside the switchboards shall be done with PVC insulated wire, not less
than 2.5mm2 except for electronics devices. A suitable wiring duct system shall be
installed for all inter-panel and front-to-rear panel wiring which will provide easy

access for inspection and replacement. As far as possible all wiring shall be installed
in wiring ducts.
All wiring from hinged door panels to the fixed panels shall be done with flexible
conductor of equivalent size.
All multicore cables shall be steel armoured.
Wiring between terminals of the various devices shall be point to point. Splices or tee
connection will not be acceptable. Wire runs shall be neatly trucked or clamped.
Exposed wiring shall be kept to a minimum, but where used shall be formed into
compact groups suitably bound together and properly supported.
Instrument transformer secondary circuits shall be grounded only at the first panel
entered, and shall not be grounded at any point or outside of the enclosures.
Cable supports and clamp type terminal lugs shall be provided for all incoming and
outgoing power wiring terminated at each panel. All wire shall be marked near each
terminal end with circuit or wire designation. These markers shall be of an approved
type and permanently attached to the conductor insulation.
(b) Phase arrangement

The standard phase arrangement when facing the front of the panel shall be R-S-T-N,
and R-N-S from the left to right, from top to bottom, and front to back for A.C three-
phase and single-phase circuits and N-P from left to right, P-N from top to bottom and
front to back for D.C polarity. All relays, instruments, other devices, buses and
equipment involving three-phase circuit shall be arranged and connected in
accordance with the standard phase arrangement where possible.
(c) Wiring colour code

All wires shall have ferrules at all terminations to distinguish each terminal.
(d) Phase and polarity colour code
Following coloured ferrules shall be provided on each wire in order to identify phase
and polarity.
Phase and Polarity Colour

A.C., three-phase, First phase Red
Second phase Yellow
Third phase Blue
A.C., single-phase, First line Red
Second line Yellow
Neutral Black
Grounded Green with yellow stripe
Auxiliary Supply Positive Red
Negative Black

Ferruling system must be submitted to the Employer for approval before commencing
the works.
(8) Terminal blocks

Terminal blocks for control wiring shall be rated not less than 600-volt with cover and
be of the moulded type with barriers.
White or other light-coloured marking strips, fastened by screws to the moulded
sections at each block, shall be provided for circuit designation.
Each connected terminal of each block shall have the circuit designation placed on the
marking strip with permanent marking fluid. Terminal blocks for current and voltage
transformers shall be separated and specially marked. They shall be equipped with a
sliding splice for separation and “banana” sockets on both sides for testing. The
splices shall be so arranger that they fall into closed position when loose. Where
appropriate, other terminal blocks shall be equipped with facilities for testing, such as
short-circuiting, separating splices, plugs, etc. All such device shall be accessible even
when paralleling strips are used.
Terminal blocks shall be located at least 300mm from the bottom of the panel and
shall be easily accessible. Terminal blocks for different voltages shall not be mixed
between one another. All conductors in a multi-core cable shall be terminated on the
same terminal block. The blocks shall be grouped for each voltage and they shall be
clearly marked for easy identification of the system voltage. There shall be at least 20
% spare terminals on each block.
(9) Cable Laying and Routing

The final routing of HV and LV cables in indoor and outdoor installations shall be
determined by the Contractor from the directives given in Particular Specifications,
and the principles shown in the layouts on the drawings. All cable routing and
arrangement shall be subject to the Project Manager's approval and must adapt to
obstacles as tubes and ventilation channels. All penetrations of fire zone separations
shall have the same fire classification as the separation itself.
Cables shall be laid on corrosion resistant (aluminium or hot dipped galvanised) cable
trays and racks and by raising cables fixed to cable ladders. The trays shall be
dimensioned and fixed so that it allows one man to climb on it in addition to the cable
load. Each tray shall have at least 15 % spare capacity. The distance between each
tray shall at least be 300 mm. For exposed outdoor installations cables shall be laid in
covered cable trenches, plastic or steel ducts, depending on the available space.
Branch offs to individual equipment shall be fixed and supported all the way to the
connection box. Cables and cable supports shall be properly fixed and secured against
movement under short-circuit and strain caused by erection work. Particular attention
shall be given to termination in confined areas where personnel may climb under
erection and maintenance. Flexible tubes of “spiral type” shall not be used whereas
tubes of “plica” type can.
Low power cables, i.e. cables for control, metering, etc. shall not be run in close
parallel to high power cables or earth wires, but shall be run at the greatest possible
separating distance. The minimum distances are:

· High and medium voltage versus control and measuring cables 800 mm
· Low voltage power cables versus control and measuring cables 400 mm
Necessary EMC consideration shall be taken in accordance with EMC standards.
Additionally, cables for extra low power, i.e. mA and mV circuits and cables
connected to low power solid state electronic circuits, shall be laid in separate sheet
steel trays with covers. The DC trip and AC voltage supplies and wiring to main
protective gear shall be segregated from those for back-up protection to the greatest
extent possible.
Single-phase power cables shall be run in trefoil configuration, single-phase DC power

cables shall be run in parallel. Special care shall be taken so that closed magnetic
circuits do not form around single phase cables.
Cables below 25 mm2 cross section shall be copper. Larger cross sections may be
aluminium. Minimum cross sections shall be as follows:
· Measuring cables for current 4.0 mm2

· Control and other measuring cables 2.5 mm2
· Power cables according 120 % max load
current
All cross section must be checked against max load current, allowable burden on
measuring transformers, short circuit values, voltage drop, protection requirements
and selectivity.
The cables shall be marked with item designation in both ends as well as by entrances
in enclosures. The cable marking shall be fire proof.
Cables shall be laid in full runs and not spliced unless approved by Project Manager.
Termination of multi-stranded conductor ends shall be with a suitable crimped
thimble as specified above. All other cable lugs or similar shall be of crimped type
adapted to the cable type and cross-section used. The tools used should be special
approved for the lugs and cable type used.
The cable supplier’s instructions regarding handling and bending radius shall be
followed.
Fibre optic cables shall not contain metallic material and be so laid that they have
proper mechanical protection. I.e. cables not constructed for embedding shall be laid
in protective tubes.
2.14 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Prior to any of the work being energized, the Contractor shall be responsible for
supplying and fixing in prominent positions near to each item of the work concerned,
large temporary signs giving clear warning of danger in areas which might previously
have been regard as safe.

During erection and tests the Contractor shall provide all temporary scaffolding
ladders, platforms with toe boards and handrails as required for safe and convenient
access of workmen, inspectors and other authorized persons. All dangerous opening
or holes shall be provided with handrails or covers. Measures shall be taken to protect
workmen from falling. The maximum possible safety shall be afforded to personnel
directly engaged on this Contract or to those who frequent the working area or to
those who in the normal course of their occupation find it necessary to utilize
temporary works erected by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall demonstrate that he has facilities for conducting a safety
programme commensurate with the works on the site. He shall submit in writing a
proposed comprehensive safety programme to the Employer for approval prior to the
start of construction operation on the site. The Contractor shall designate a competent
supervisory employee to carry out his safety programme.
2.15 PROTECTION, CLEANING AND PAINTING
(1) Embedded Steelwork

All parts to ultimately be buried in concrete shall be cleaned and protected before
leaving the manufacturer’s plant by cement wash or other approved method. Before
being installed they shall be thoroughly desiccated and cleared of all rust and adherent
matter, or be treated according to a method approved by the Employer. Such cleaning
or treatment shall not detrimentally affect the strength or final operation and function
of the equipment.
(2) Steel exposed to atmosphere

All machined parts or bearing surfaces shall be cleaned and protected from corrosion
before leaving the manufacturer’s plant by the application of an approved rust
preventive coating, or a peelable plastic film. Where the latter is impracticable, such
parts shall be heavily covered with high melting point grease. After erection such
parts shall be cleaned with solvent and lapped or polished bright.
All parts, other than machined parts, which will be exposed after erection shall be
thoroughly cleaned and galvanized or given with two coats of best quality approved
primer and one coat of best quality approved finish paint before leaving the
manufacturer’s plant and a further one coat of paint of an approved quality and colour
after erection and touching up on the site, except such apparatus as panels and
instruments which shall be finished painted under approved procedures.
All outside panel surfaces shall be primed, filed where necessary, and given not less
than two coats of synthetic undercoat. The finishing coat for the outdoor installations
shall be gloss paint and for the indoor installations shall be a semi-gloss paint.
The inside surface of the enclosures shall have two prime coats and one finishing coat
of light cream colour.
Primer shall be applied to surfaces prepared in accordance with the plant

manufacturer’s instructions. The surface shall be wiped clean immediately prior to
applying the paint. The primer and finish coats of paint shall be applied using the
methods and equipment recommended by the manufacturer.

The internal surface of all pipelines shall be cleaned out by the approved methods
before installation and again prior to commissioning, to ensure freedom from dirt,
rust, scale, welding slag, etc. All exposed pipes shall be painted with an identifying
colour after erection is completed. The colour code system shall be approved by the
Employer.
All steel surfaces, which are in permanent contact with oil, shall be given three coats
of approved oil resistant.
No painting or protection is required for finished or unfinished stainless steel parts.
The final colour of all equipment, frames for meters and relays, and switch handle
shall be approved by the Employer but the Contractor shall propose a colour scheme
for the equipment and devices and shall submit colour chips or paint samples. A
colour chip shall be included with the approved colour schedule for each type of finish
to be applied at the site.
The humid and tropical conditions shall be taken into account on selection of the
paints and painting procedure.
2.16 EMBEDDED METAL WORK, OPENING, ETC
The Contractor shall supply and install all enters, fasteners, embedded metalwork’s,
piping, conduit and sleeves associated with and required for the equipment being
provided and installed under this Contract, except as otherwise provided in the
specifications.
The Contractor shall indicate the location and details of foundations, openings, block-
out and all embedded components on his drawings and shall be responsible for the
completeness and accuracy of his drawings and the information supplied to others.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the adequacy and accuracy of location of all
embedded components supplied by him.
The foundation bolts, embedded steel parts, anchors, braces, posts, supports, shims,
etc., and all metal works as may be required for temporary or final support of
anchorage of the equipment shall be provided and installed by the Contractor as part
of this contract.
Any metal work, which is to be built into the concrete foundations, shall not be
painted nor coated unless otherwise approved.
2.17 SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall furnish spare parts as listed in the Price Schedule.
The spare parts supplied shall be packed or treated in such a manner as to be suitable
for storage under the climate conditions at the Site for a period of not less than two
years, and each part shall be clearly marked with the description and purpose on the

outside of the package. The manner of storage shall be recommended by the

Contractor.
Spare parts so provided shall be delivered into such stores as may be designated by
the Employer. Delivery of spare parts will not be deemed to be complete until the
packages have been opened by the Contractor, their contents checked by a
representative of the Employer and the articles reprotected and repacked by the
Contractor to the satisfaction of the Employer, or assembled into units at the
employer’s option. The method of package and package materials shall be suitable
for the satisfactory re-package.
2.18 PACKING
Each item shall be packed properly or protected for shipment from the place of
manufacture to the site.
Each crate of package shall contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope and a copy
in triplicate shall be forwarded to the Employer prior to dispatch. All items of
material shall be clearly marked for easy identification against the packing list.
All cases, packages, etc, shall be clearly marked on the outside to indicate the total
weight, to show where the weight is bearing and the correct position of the slings and
shall bear an identification mark relating them to the appropriate shipping documents.
Cases, which cannot be marked as above, shall have metal tags with the necessary
marking on them. The metal tags shall be securely attached to the package with
strong steel wire or equivalent.
Long pieces of steel angles shall be packed in bundles and properly tied together by
an approved method and care taken to ensure that they are robust and not of excessive
length and weight for handling in transit.
Short pieces of steel angles and steel plates shall be bolted or wired together through
holes and packed in stout timber cases.
Bolts, nuts, washers and fillers shall be bagged in sealed vinyl and packed in steel
cans. The cans shall bear the contents and be crated together.
Packing together of components of dissimilar metals shall not be acceptable.
Conductors and overhead earth wire shall be packed on drums stoutly constructed of
good quality steel. Drums shall be securely battened around the perimeter to give
maximum protection to the conductor and the earth wire and correct direction of
rolling indicated with an arrow in a manner not easily removable.
The first layer of conductors or earth wire on drums shall be secured to the hub in
manner avoiding damage to subsequent layers.
All drums shall be protected from deterioration on site by termite or fungus attack by
an approved impregnation treatment at the works before dispatch.

The Employer shall reserve the right to inspect and approve the equipment and the
packing before the items are dispatched. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible
for ensuring that the packing is suitable for transit and such inspection will not relieve
the Contractor from responsibility for any loss or damage due to faulty packing.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to improve and to reinforce the road
facilities when the weight and dimension of the cargo exceed the above specification.
All packing materials shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be
removed from the Site at the earliest opportunity and disposed off to the satisfaction
of the Employer.
The following information must be clearly stencilled or printed on each packing case,
crate, cask, drum, bundle or loose piece, care being taken that the number and other
particulars on each package agree with those entered in the packing list accompanying
the Invoice:
· Employer's Identity
· Supplier's Identity
· Destination
· Contract No.
· Package No.
· Item Code
· Weight, dimensions
· Sub-Project (Plant Identity).
The marking shall be durable. The marking shall be upon the body of the package.
Marking upon a batten fastened on the case, etc. shall not be used.
2.19 DELIVERY
The Contractor shall deliver all materials and equipment including Contractor’s
equipment supplied under the Contract to the site in adequate time for its preparation
and erection according to the Schedule.
Each notification shall include a complete shipping list of the contents of each
package to be delivered and shall indicate the anticipated date of delivery and the
serial number for each component to be used for identification and evidence of the
insurance cost arranged for it.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the reception on Site of all deliveries for the
purpose of the Contract.
2.20 CLEANING AND MATERIAL DISPOSAL
The Contractor shall at all times during the course of the work prevent the
accumulation on the premises of debris caused by the Works. Whenever it is
necessary, in the opinion of the Employer and in all events upon completion of the
Works, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all temporary buildings and
facilities, tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, debris and all work and materials
condemned by the Employer and shall leave the premises in a clean, safe and sanitary

condition. The Contractor shall prevent at any time unnecessary accumulation and
scattering of debris, materials, tools and equipment around the premises, and shall
conduct the work in an orderly manner. In case the Contractor fails to comply with
the above provision, or in case of dispute, the employer shall have the right to order
removal by others of debris, materials, tools or equipment, and to charge the cost of
such removal and/or repairs to the Contractor.
2.21 PROGRAMME AND PROGRESS
Within one month after the Date of Commencement, the Contractor shall prepare his
construction programme in a Software form covering the design, manufacture,
delivery, erection testing and commissioning of the Works, in sufficient detail to
define the various sections of the Works, including parts to be supplied by the
Contractor. A hard copy shall be submitted to the Employer for approval.
Upon approval of the programme by the Employer, it should thereafter be referred to

as the approved Construction Programme and shall become a part of the Contract.
Monthly progress reports shall be provided by the Contractor, indicating the actual
state of progress of all items during the course of manufacture and work at the Site, in
the form given by the Employer.
A brief weekly report on the construction work at the Site shall also be submitted by
the Contractor to the Employer.
From time to time during the execution of Contract, the Employer is empowered to
call meetings, either in his home office or at the manufacturer’s offices or Employer’s
Nairobi office or at the Site, as he deems necessary, for the purpose of co-ordination
and control. If required by the Employer, responsible representatives of the
Contractor shall attend such meetings at his own expense.
In executing the Approved Construction Programme of this Contract, the Contractor

shall co-operate with the Employer and other contractors on the Site in order to effect
the timely completion of the Project as a whole.
The Progress Plans shall at least contain the following milestones:

· Essential information delivered from Employer
· Documentation for approval from Contractor to Employer
· Release of factory documentation
· Factory Tests
· Shipment
· Site ready for erection
· Start erection
· Ready for pre-commissioning
· Ready for commissioning
· Test run
· Taking over
· Submittal of final documentation

2.22 DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR
Before starting manufacture of the equipment, dimensioned drawings and data

showing all significant details of the equipment and materials to be used shall be
submitted to the Employer for approval, at least 2 weeks before the commencement of
the manufacturing process.
These drawings shall be submitted within the times mentioned hereunder, measured in
calendar month from the Date of commencement. The drawings shall be modified as
necessary if requested by the Employer, and resubmitted for final approval.
When the Contractor prepares his construction schedule, as required herein, he shall
make allowance for the drawing approval time and indicate it on the schedule. A
period of at least six weeks should be allowed for such approval after receipt by the
Employer. Claims or extensions of time will not be approved if they are related to the
late submission of drawings to the Employer or if they involve delays caused by
drawings not being approved by the Employer.
After approval of drawings by the Employer, the Contractor shall supply the approved
drawings to the Employer according to the table given below.
It is to be understood, however, that approval of the drawings will not relieve the
Contractor of any responsibility in connection with the work.
All drawings submitted for approval or sent to the Employer for any other reason shall
be sent by courier.
After items of the work have been manufactured and erected, complete sets of prints
and negatives of the finally corrected drawings shall be furnished according to the
following table.
The following number of drawings to be submitted to the Employer shall be as

follows:
To the Employer, during the work
Drawing for approval 5 copies

Approved drawings 3 copies
After completion of the work (final drawings)
AutoCad (latest version) 2 Cds

Complete set of bound prints (as built) 6 sets
All Protection and Control drawings shall be done on A4 paper. The function of each
drawing shall be clearly indicated. Related drawings shall be arranged sequentially,
have the same drawing number but different sheet numbers. The drawings shall
include the following;
-AC Schematics
-DC Schematics

-Functional Drawings
-Layout Drawings
-Panel equipment wiring and cable terminations and schedules.
-Relays and accessories list.
Protection and Control Software drawings shall be done in the latest AutoCad release
edition.
Additional copies of particular drawings are to be provided if required, at the

Contractor’s expense.
2.23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
The Contractor shall submit to the Employer for approval, general instructions
concerning the correct manner of assembling, operating and maintaining the work.
This instruction manual shall be submitted immediately following final approval of
the drawings.
When finally approved, six (6) copies of the instruction manual shall be furnished to
the Employer. The contractor shall ensure that his erection supervisor has a copy in
his office at the Site.
The instruction manual shall describe in detail the erection procedure and use of all
erection equipment and measurement devices. The method for assembling, adjusting,
operating and dismantling of each device, system and machine shall be described and
illustrated. The maintenance details of each component shall also be described,
including the frequency of inspections and lubrication.
The instruction manual shall include a separate and complete section describing the
normal and emergency operating procedures for the control of the switching
equipment, and shall include explanatory diagrammatic drawings of equipment to
facilities understanding the description.
The Contractor shall, in preparing the instruction manual, take into account the lack of
experience and familiarity of the operators with this type of equipment.
The manual shall give specific information as to oil, grease, or any other materials
needed for maintenance operations. This information shall include brand names and
manufacturer’s numbers or designations, for at least two brands available in Kenya,
preferably manufactured in Kenya.
The manual shall include a complete list of all drawings prepared for the Contract,
spare parts list, and a parts list for each component of the equipment. The parts list
shall apply only to the equipment supplied and shall not include general reference or
description of similar equipment which is of the same model but different only in
detail. The manual shall be prepared on the English language.

2.24 TEST PROCEDURE INSTRUCTIONS
2.24.1 Electrical equipment:
1. The manufacturer shall be responsible for performing or for having performed

all the required tests specified in this specification. Tenderers shall confirm
the manufacturer’s capabilities in this regard when submitting tenders. Any
limitations shall be clearly specified.
2. Tender documents shall be accompanied by copies of Type test and Routine

test reports & certificates for similar rated equipment for the purpose of tender
evaluation. Type test reports & certificates shall be certified by the National
Standards and Testing Authority (NSTA) of the country of origin. Where a
body other than NSTA is used to certify the type-test reports, a copy of
the certificate of accreditation shall be attached. Current contact
information of the testing and certification authority shall be provided.
Tenderers should note that this requirement is mandatory.
3. Upon completion of the manufacturing process, routine tests shall be carried

out as per the specified standard for each equipment. In addition to these tests,
Impulse, temperature rise and short-circuit tests (where applicable) shall be
carried out and the results endorsed by the NSTA of the country of
manufacture.
4. Routine test reports shall be completed for equipment and made available
before the inspection by KPLC representatives.
5. A detailed list & contact addresses of previous customers shall be submitted

with the tender. The manufacturer shall indicate the monthly & annual
production capacity and experience in the production of the type and size of
equipment he is offering. List of workshop tools and equipment shall also be
appended.
6. The Contractor shall prepare and execute a testing program which will
establish that specified requirements have been met and that the items
furnished and installed will perform as specified and required.
7. The Contractor shall submit to the Employer for approval, during or

immediately following the submission of drawings, testing programmes
describing each test to be performed during commissioning and performance
tests. The programme shall establish the sequence of the test, the equipment
preparation and operation procedures to be followed and the detailed
procedure for conducting each test. The programme shall also contain
performance guarantees, design values, technical particulars, or other criteria
and distributed in the same manner as the drawings.
8. A file containing a list of all the Commissioning Tests carried out and the
results obtained for all the Protection and Control schemes and the primary
equipment, including system balanced and unbalanced fault analysis for relay
coordination and scheme settings shall be submitted to the Employer prior to

the commissioning of the project. It is mandatory that these group tests shall
be witnessed by the Employer’s representative.
9. Three copies of the Commissioning Report shall be submitted to the

Employer.
2.25 ATTENDANCE OF EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE AT FACTORY TEST

AND TRAINING
The Contractor shall arrange for two Employer’s staff members to witness tests of
major items of equipment listed below in the manufacturer’s plant. All routine tests
shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer’s representatives. The
representatives shall approve shipment of the equipment if they are satisfied that the
requirements of the specification are fully met.
The Contractor shall arrange and meet the full cost of the air tickets, local
transportation, accommodation (at least four star class of hotel), meals and out of
pocket allowance for the two Engineers. The Engineers shall witness the tests on each
of the equipments below for a duration of at least 5 days (excluding the days of arrival
and departure).
(1) 132 kV and 33 kV circuit breakers

(2) 132 kV and 33 kV outdoor isolators and earth switches
(3) Control and Protection panels
(4) 132 kV and 33 kV Current transformers
(5) 132 kV Capacitive Voltage Transformers and 33 kV voltage transformers.
(6) 132/33 kV Power Transformers
(7) OPGW conductor
(8) Communication terminal equipment.
During the attendance, the Contractor shall give the Employer’s persons a brief
explanation on design, manufacture, operation and maintenance of the materials and
equipment. Protection Schemes philosophy and settings shall be explained.
TRAINING
(1) High voltage switchgear equipment

(2) Control and protection equipment
(3) Telecommunication Equipment
The training on the operation of the high voltage switchgear equipment, control,
protection and communication equipment shall be conducted for 2 Employer’s staff
for a duration of not less than 5 days.
2.26 PHOTOGRAPHS
The Contractor shall keep photographic records of the progress of each phase of the
work. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit three sets of colour
photographs with explanatory description adequately edited in book form to the
Employer’s satisfaction.

The Contractor shall provide himself with necessary access to the work and temporary
facilities to photograph his part of the work at any stage of construction or
manufacture.

3. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SUBSTATIONS
3.1 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Scope
This subsection covers the design, manufacture, testing before shipment, delivery to site,
erection and testing at the site of the following:
3.2 132kV CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
3.2.1 SCOPE
This specification is for three pole operated outdoor 132kV circuit breaker together with
controls and ancillary equipment.
3.2.2 REFERENCES
The following documents were referred to during the preparation of this specification, and
may be referred to, in case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
Unless otherwise specified, the latest revision, edition and amendments shall apply.
IEC 56: High – Voltage alternating current circuit breakers.
IEC 144: Degree of protection of enclosures for low – voltage switchgear and control
gear.
BS 5311: Specification for A.C circuit breakers of rated voltage above 1 kV.
3.2.3 CONSTRUCTION
The circuit breakers shall be single pole operated, out-door type, SF6 gas insulated and shall
comply with the requirements of IEC 56 and/or BS 5311.
The circuit breaker shall be live tank type.
All the three poles of circuit breakers shall be operated by local electrical and
remote/electrical from the mechanism in the housing.
The circuit breaker shall have SF6 gas for electrical interrupting medium.
The SF6 gas shall comply with the requirement of IEC 376 and be suitable for use in the
circuit breaker when it is operated under the service and system conditions.
Sufficient gas shall be provided for filling the circuit breaker at installation with additional
20% for any losses.

When the circuit breaker is in closed position a rapid fall in the SF6 gas pressure, to a level
below that at which safe operation is possible shall not result in tripping the circuit breaker.
A remote alarm indication to signal this condition shall be provided. A second stage drop in
gas shall block closing and tripping of the circuit breaker.
Insulation creepage distance shall not be less than 25mm per kV of rated voltage between
phases.
3.2.4 OPERATING MECHANISM
The operating mechanism shall be suitable for mounting at the circuit breaker supporting
structure, and below the circuit breaker in a weather-proof, dust-proof, vermin-proof and well
ventilated housing.
The degree of protection shall be class IP 54 as per the requirement of IEC 144.
Operating duty shall be standard and operating mechanism shall be trip free during the entire
closing sequence.
Operating mechanism shall be provided with either motor wound spring or pressure actuated
mechanism with provision for hand charge.
Motor operating voltage shall be 110 Volts D.C.
A set of at least ten normally closed and ten normally open spare potential free contacts shall
be provided for remote electrical indication as well as electrical interlocking and shall be
wired to a terminal block in the housing.
Potential free contacts shall be provided for alarming spring charge failure or control oil
pressure low. Potential free contacts shall be provided for alarms for SF6 gas low and SF6
Trip Block.
A minimum of twenty (20) spare terminals shall be provided for connection to the current
and voltage transformers.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with Local/Remote selector switch. The selection of
local operation shall inhibit the operation of the circuit breaker from any remote source and
selection of remote inhibits operation from local operation.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with a local switch for Open/Neutral/Close Operation.
Mechanically operated indication to show the status of the circuit breaker operations
(open/close and springs charged/discharged) shall be provided.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with suitable terminals for connecting clamps for up to
3” outside diameter copper tubes.

The circuit breaker shall be provided with means to prevent contact pumping while the
closing circuit remains energized, should be circuit breaker either fail to latch or be tripped
during closing due to operation of the protective relays.
Mechanical interlock key arrangement shall be provided on the mechanism such that it will
not be possible to withdraw the interlock key with circuit breaker in closed position.
For the two 132 kV line circuit breakers, the mechanical interlock keys from each pole
shall be such that they will be closed in a block of 4 keys so that the 4th key only
come out when the other three are on in the block . That 4th key will be used to inter
lock the 2 separately. For the 132kV transformer circuit breaker, the mechanical interlock key
will come out only when the circuit breaker is off and this key will be used to operate the
132kV transformer bay disconectors.
Circuit breaker shall be provided with duplicate trip coils in order to facilitate duplication of
protection tripping, where required.
The circuit breaker shall have separate operating mechanism for each pole.
From local position (only on middle phase) the operation of all the 3 poles should
be possible with CLOSE/NEUTRAL/TRIP Switch.
3.2.5 RATINGS
Parameter Value
1 Nominal Voltage 132 kV
2 Highest Voltage 145 kV
3 Frequency 50 Hz
4 Normal current 2000 Amps
5 Rated short circuit current 31.5 kA
6 Duration of short circuit 1 Sec.
7 Rated short circuit making current 80 kA
8 First pole to clear factor 1.5
9 Operating sequence 0-0.3 sec – CO – 3 min –
CO
10 Auxiliary D.C Voltage for closing & tripping coils 110 V d.c.
11 Auxiliary A.C Voltage 415/240 V, 50 Hz
12 Impulse withstand voltage 685 kV peak
13 One minute power frequency withstand voltage 290 kV r.m.s.
14 Minimum creepage distance of insulator 3988 mm
15 Minimum clearance between phases 1475 mm
16 Minimum clearance to earth 1270 mm
3.2.6 TESTS
The manufacturer shall be responsible for performing or for having performed all the
required tests specified in this specification. Tenderers shall confirm the manufacturer’s
capabilities in this regard when submitting tenders. Any limitations shall be clearly specified.
Type and routine tests shall be carried out as per the requirement of IEC 56.

Test certificates issued by a recognized short-circuit testing station, certifying the operation
of the circuit breaker at duties corresponding to the rated breaking capacities of the circuit
breaker shall be submitted.
Tender documents shall be accompanied by copies of Type test and Routine test certificates
for similar rated equipment. These certificates shall be certified by the National Testing or the
National Standards Institute of the country of origin.
A detailed list & contact addresses of previous customers shall be submitted with the tender.
The manufacturer shall indicate the monthly & annual production capacity and experience in
the production of the equipment he is offering.
3.2.7 DRAWING AND MANUALS
Two sets of operational manuals and drawing detailing dimensions, panel layout, wiring and
schematic shall be provided.
3.2.8 PACKING AND INFORMATION
The circuit breaker and associated components shall be packed in a manner as to protect it
from any damage in transportation and repeated handling.
Each assembly and package of items associated with the circuit breaker shall be suitably
marked.
Where an item includes a number of components to form a complete assembly, all

component parts shall be included in one composite package which shall be firmly strapped
and bound together.
Draft design and construction drawings shall be submitted to KPLC before the manufacturing
of circuit breakers commence. KPLC undertake to submit their comments or approval for the
drawings within three weeks of receiving the draft copies.
Sufficient relevant technical details and drawings shall be submitted for the purpose of
Tender Evaluation. Tenders which do not meet this requirement will be considered non-
responsive.
To facilitate comprehensive technical evaluation of the tenders, a clause by clause statement

of compliance with the specification shall be submitted with relevant manufacturer’s
specification sheets, catalogues and brochure.
3.2.9 TECHNICAL SCHEDULES
The appropriate Technical guarantees in appropriate Volume II Technical schedule section

shall be completely filled

3.3 132 KV THREE POLE DISCONNECTORS:
3.3.1 SCOPE
This specification is for 132kV, 1600 Amps Isolator for use on line disconnection, isolation
of substation apparatus.
This specification covers both the 132 kV isolators with and without earth switch.
3.3.2 REFERENCES
may be referred to in case of conflict; the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
Unless otherwise specified, the latest revision, edition and amendments shall apply
IEC 129: Alternating current disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches.
IEC 144: Degree of protection of enclosures for low - voltage switchgear and control
gear
IEC 60273: Characteristic of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with
nominal voltages greater than 1000V
BS 729: Hot dip galvanized coating on iron and steel articles.
3.3.3 CONSTRUCTION
3.3.3.1 The isolator shall be horizontal side opening, double side break rotating post type for
use on a 132kV, 50 Hz, 3 - phase system.
3.3.3.2 The isolator shall be complete with supporting base, phase coupling details, operating
rod, unions and guides.
3.3.3.3 The operating mechanism shall be provided with a universal joint to allow for a
reasonable degree of out-of alignment of the operating rod.
3.3.3.4 The isolator shall be motorised and also fitted with manual operation facility. There
should be a remote selection to allow for operation of the isolator from the control
room. The remote selection should block any local electrical or manual operation.
3.3.3.5 The supporting under-base shall be hot dip galvanized steel as per the requirement of
BS 729. The under-base shall be suitable for mounting on a steel structure.
3.3.3.6 All the three switches shall be arranged so that the phase units are mounted
independently and then finally interconnected with coupling tubes so as to ensure
simultaneous operation of all switches by drive rods and operating handle for both
manual and motor operation.

3.3.3.7 The operating mechanism shall be fixed at the base frame, in a weather proof, vermin
proof and dust proof housing. The degree of protection shall be class IP 54 as per IEC
144.
3.3.3.8 Auxiliary dry contacts, five normally open and five normally closed shall be provided
for electrical interlocks such that the isolator and associated 132 kV circuit breaker
can be interlocked with each other. The contacts shall be rated to continuously carry at
least 10Amps at voltages up to 500V dc/ac
3.3.3.9 Each phase shall be mounted on a spiral type solid core post insulator conforming to
IEC 60273, and shall be fitted with clamp connector for the suitable
conductor/connector.
3.3.3.10 The isolator shall be designed such that in fully open position, it shall provide
adequate electrical isolation between the contacts on all the three switches.
3.3.3.11 All current carrying parts shall be made of electrolytic hard drawn copper with
switch contacts silver plated.
3.3.3.12 The earth switch shall consist of a hinged type earthing switch fixed at the base
frame. The earth switch shall have the same rating as the isolator.
3.3.3.13 The isolator shall be provided with both mechanical and electrical interlocking
devices between the isolator and earth switch so that during operations, it is only
possible to operate the earth switch with the isolator in the open position and the
isolator with the earth switches in the open position.
3.3.3.14 Ten normally open and ten normally closed auxiliary contacts shall be provided on
the switch for future use.
3.3.3.15 Five normally open and five normally closed auxiliary contacts shall be provided on
the earth switch for future use.
3.3.3.16 The isolator and earth switch shall be provided with a padlocking facility such that
the mechanism can be locked in OPEN or CLOSED position.
3.3.4 RATING
The ratings of the isolator, including its operating devices and auxiliary equipments shall be
as indicated below.
Parameter Value
1 Highest system voltage 145 kV
2 Nominal voltage 132 kV
3 Rated lightening impulse withstand voltage 685 kV
4 Rated Power frequency withstand voltage 290 kV
5 Rated frequency 50 Hz
6 Rated normal current 1600 Amps

Parameter Value
7 Rated short time withstand current for 1 seconds 31.5 kA
8 Minimum creepage distance of Insulators 3988mm
3.3.5 TESTS
3.3.5.1 The isolator shall be inspected and routine tested in accordance with the requirement
of IEC 129.
3.3.5.2 Certified type test certificates issued by the relevant National Testing Authority
confirming compliance of the isolators on offer with the specifications shall be
submitted.
3.3.6 TECHNICAL SCHEDULES

3.4 132kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (CVTs):
3.4.1 SCOPE
3.4.1.1 This specification is for voltage transformers for use with electrical instruments and
electrical protective devices on system with maximum operating voltage up to 145kV.
3.4.2 SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
3.4.2.1 The voltage transformers will be connected to overhead system operating at a nominal
voltage of 132kV and a maximum voltage of 145kV which are generally of earthed
construction.
3.4.2.2 The voltage transformer will be connected between line and earth of a 3-phase 3-wire
system with the neutral point solidly earthed.
3.4.3 CONSTRUCTION

3.4.3.1 The voltage transformer shall be out-door oil-immersed capacitor type and shall
comply with the requirement of IEC 186.
3.4.3.2 The voltage transformer shall be suitable for installation on steel structure. The
voltage transformer shall be fitted with lugs.
3.4.3.3 The porcelain portion of the voltage transformer shall be made of high-grade brown
glazed porcelain. All other external parts shall be either inherently resistant to
atmospheric corrosion or hot-dip galvanised.
3.4.3.4 The voltage transformer shall have primary, secondary and earth terminals.
3.4.3.5 The primary terminal shall be tin-plated, suitable for both copper and aluminium
connectors.The secondary terminal shall be brought out to a separate terminal box,
complete with protection mcb. The mcb should have auxiliary contacts for indication,
alarm and distance relay input.
3.4.4 RATINGS
The voltage transformer shall be capable of continuously carrying 50% burden above the
rated capacity without damage.
The rating of the voltage transformer shall be as indicated herein:-
Parameter Values
1 Rated primary voltage 132000/√3 volts
2 Rated secondary voltage 110/√3 volts
5 Lightning impulse withstand voltage 685kV at 1500m above sea level
6 Power frequency withstand voltage 290kV
7 Rated burden 100 VA
a Rated voltage factor 1.5 for 30 seconds (1.2 continuous)
b Accuracy class 1.0
c No. secondary out put 2 (metering, protection)
3.4.5 MARKING
The voltage transformer shall be fitted with a rating plate indicating the following:-
· The manufacturer’s name or identification mark.

· The voltage transformer serial number or designation.
· The rated primary and secondary voltage.
· The rated frequency.
· The burden and accuracy class of each secondary output.
· The highest system voltage (e.g. 145kV).
· The insulation level.
· The rated voltage factor and corresponding rated time.

The terminals shall be marked clearly and indelibly.
The marking shall be in accordance with IEC 186.
3.4.6 TEST
3.4.7 REFERENCES
may be referred to. In case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
IEC 186: Voltage transformers.
BS 3941: Specification for voltage transformers.
3.4.8 TECHNICAL GUARANTEES

3.5 132 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
3.5.1 SCOPE
This specification is for current transformers for use with electrical instruments and
electrical protective devices on systems with maximum operating voltage of 145kV.
The current transformer will be connected to overhead system operating at a nominal voltage
of 132 kV and maximum voltage of 145kV (with aerial earth wire) construction.
3.5.3 CONSTRUCTION
The current transformer shall be outdoor, oil-filled, hermetically sealed and shall comply with
the requirement of IEC 185. The current transformer shall be suitable for vertical installation
on steel structure.

3.5.3.1 The porcelain portion of the current transformer shall be made of high-grade
brown-glazed porcelain. All external ferrous portions shall be hot-dip
galvanized.
3.5.3.2 The current transformer shall have primary, secondary and earth terminals.
The primary terminal shall be tin-plated, suitable for both copper and aluminium
connectors.
The secondary terminal shall be covered with removable plate. The terminal box
shall be capable of accommodating up to 12 secondary terminals suitable for
conductor of up to 4.0mm2.
3.5.3.3 The current transformer shall have four cores. The protection cores shall be
suitable for conventional overcurrent requirements and for true transformation of
the fully asymmetrical fault currents.
Measuring cores shall have high accuracy (low loss) and low saturation levels.
3.5.4 RATINGS
The short circuit rating of the current transformers shall be 31.5kA.
The current transformers shall be capable of passing rated primary current without damage
with the secondary open circuited.
The rating of the current transformers shall be as indicated herein:-
Parameter Values
1 Rated primary current (Amps) 600/400/200
2 Rated secondary current 1 AMP
3 Rated frequency 50Hz
4 Minimum Creepage distance of insulator 3988 mm
5 Lightning impulse withstand voltage 685kV
6 Power frequency withstand voltage 290kV
7 Rated burden and accuracy class
Core No. 1 20VA, 5P20
Core No. 2 20VA, 0.2
Core No. 3 20VA, X
The knee point voltage shall not be less than 250 volts at 8mA.
3.5.5 MARKING
The current transformers shall be fitted with a rating plate indicating the following:-

· The current transformer serial number or designation.
· The primary and secondary currents.


· The output and accuracy class of the cores.
The marking shall consist of letters followed by numbers.
The letters shall be in block capitals.
3.5.6 TESTS
3.5.7 REFERENCES
precedence.
IEC 185: Current Transformers.
BS 3938: Specification for current transformers.

3.6 132 KV SURGE ARRESTERS:
3.6.1 SCOPE
This specification is for 132kV metal-oxide type surge arresters without spark gaps for a.c.
system.

3.6.2 CONSTRUCTION
3.6.2.1 The surge arrester shall be metal-oxide type without spark gaps and constructor as per
the requirement of IEC 99-4.
3.6.2.2. The metal-oxide used shall be of quality to ensure thermal stability under service
duty of the surge arrester.
3.6.2.3 The completed surge arrester shall be housed in a silicone rubber. The silicone rubber
insulator shall be dimensioned to provide a leak free interface with the end caps. The
housing shall withstand the lighting impulse voltage of the arrester.
3.6.2.4 The surge arrester shall be sealed (end caps) with a controlled permanent seal to
ensure no moisture absorption or deterioration of the metal-oxide element for the
surge arrester.
3.6.2.5 The surge arrester shall be supplied with fixing accessories and fitted with pad type
clamp connectors suitable for both copper and aluminium tubes of up to 76.2mm
diameter.
The steel plates or straps shall be galvanized as per the requirement of BS 729.
The mounting brackets shall be suitable for both horizontal and vertical mounting on a
steel channel.
3.6.3 RATING
The rating of the surge arrester shall be as indicated herein:-
Parameter Rating
1 Rated Voltage………………………………. 108 kV
2 Nominal discharge current………………….. 10 kA
3 Long duration discharge class………………. 3
4 Creepage distance of insulator……………… 3630 mm
5 Continuous operating voltage………………. 84 kV
6 Rated frequency…………………………….. 50 Hz
3.6.4 MARKING
The surge arrester shall be fitted with a rating plate indicating the following:-

· The surge arrester serial number or designation.
· The nominal discharge current.
· The continuous operating voltage
· The rated voltage

3.6.5 TESTS
Type, routine and acceptance tests shall be carried out as per the requirement of IEC 99-4.
3.6.6 REFERENCES
The following documents were referred to during the preparation of this specification. In
case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall take precedence.
IEC 99: Surge Arrester.

Part 4: Metal-oxide surge arresters without gaps for a.c. systems.
IEEE Std.: C62.22 – 1991

IEEE Guide for application of metal-oxide surge arresters for
alternating – current systems.

3.7 132/33 KV POWER TRANSFOMERS:
3.7.1 SCOPE
This specification is for newly manufactured outdoor oil type power transformer as described
below:
23MVA, 132/33kV, 50 Hz, ONAN/ONAF three phase power transformer.
The specification also covers inspection and test of the transformer as well as schedule of
Guaranteed Technical Particulars to be filled, signed by the manufacturer and submitted for
tender evaluation.
The specification stipulates the minimum requirements for 23MVA, 132/33kV power
transformer acceptable for use in the company and it shall be the responsibility of the
manufacturer to ensure adequacy of the design and good engineering practice in the
manufacture of the transformer for KPLC.
The specification does not purport to include all the necessary provisions of a contract.
3.7.2 REFERENCES
The following standards contain provisions which, through reference in this text constitute
provisions of this specification. Unless otherwise stated, the latest editions (including
amendments) apply.

ISO 1461: Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles –
Specifications and test methods.
IEC 60076: Power transformers.
IEC 60044: Instrument transformers.
IEC 60296: Specification for unused mineral insulating oil for transformers and
switchgear.
IEC 60354: Loading guide for oil – immersed power transformers.
BS 171: Power transformers
BS 381C: Specification for colours for identification coding and special purposes
3.7.3 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
The terms and definitions given in the reference standards shall apply.
a) The primary HV system is 132,000 volts, 3 phase, 3 wire, 50Hz, with neutral
point solidly earthed.
b) The secondary MV system is 33,000 volts, 3 phase, 3 wire, 50Hz, with neutral
point solidly earthed.
c) The Transformer shall be operated at a high loading factor.
3.7.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.7.5.1 The transformer shall be outdoor, oil-immersed, of ONAN/ONAF classification and

core type (lamination stackings). All offers shall comply with the requirements of IEC
60076. Any deviations/additional requirements shall be as stated in this specification.
3.7.5.2 The transformer shall be a two winding type three-phase integral unit.
3.7.5.3 The transformer shall be of the free breathing type. A dehydrating cobalt free
breather of approved design shall be provided.
3.7.5.4 The transformer and accessories shall be designed to facilitate operation, inspection,
maintenance and repairs. All apparatus shall be designed to ensure satisfactory
operation under such sudden variations of load and voltage as may be met with under
working conditions on the system, including those due to short circuits.
3.7.5.5 The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety
of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the equipment keeping in
view the regulatory requirements in Kenya.

3.7.5.6 All material used shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working
under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperatures and
atmospheric conditions arising under working conditions without undue distortion or
deterioration or the setting up of undue stresses in any part, and also without
affecting the strength and suitability of the various parts for the work which they
have to perform.
3.7.5.7 Corresponding parts liable to be replaced shall be interchangeable.
3.7.5.8 All outdoor apparatus, including bushings insulators with their mountings, shall be
designed so as to avoid pockets in which water can collect.
3.7.5.9 All connections and contacts shall be of ample section and surface for carrying
continuously the specified currents without undue heating and fixed connections
shall be secured by bolts or set screws of ample size, adequately locked. Lock nuts
shall be used on stud connections carrying current. All leads from the winding to the
terminals and bushings shall be adequately supported to prevent injury from
vibration including a systematical pull under short circuit conditions.
3.7.5.10 All apparatus shall be designed to minimize the risk or accidental short-circuit
caused by animals, birds or vermin.
3.7.5.11 In tank on-load-tap changers shall be located such that the space above the diverter
switch chamber will be free of inter-connecting pipes etc. for lifting the diverter
switch unit for inspection and maintenance purposes.
3.7.5.12 Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot-dipped process to ISO 1461 and for all parts
other than steel wires shall consist of a thickness of zinc coating equivalent to not
less than 610g of zinc per square meter of surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth,
clean and of uniform thickness and free from defects. The preparation of galvanizing
and the galvanizing itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the
coated material. The quality will be established by tests as per ISO 1461.
3.7.5.13 All bolts, nuts, and washers exposed to atmosphere and in contact with non-ferrous
parts which carry current shall be of phosphor bronze.
3.7.5.14 If bolts and nuts are placed so that they are inaccessible by means of ordinary
spanners, suitable special spanners shall be provided by the supplier.
3.7.5.15 Except for hardware, which may have to be removed at site, all external surfaces
shall receive at least four coats of paint. The total dry film thickness shall be
between 100 and 130 microns.
3.7.5.16 Descriptive labels for mounting indoors or inside cubicles and kiosks shall be of
material that will ensure permanence of the lettering. A matt or satin finish shall be
provided to avoid dazzle from reflected light. Labels mounted on dark surface shall
have white lettering on a black background. Danger notices shall have red lettering
on a white background.

3.7.5.17 All interior surfaces of chambers or kiosks that are in contact with air shall receive at
least three coats of paint, of which the topcoat shall be of a light shade.
3.7.5.18 The design and all materials and processes used in the manufacture of the
transformer, shall be such as to reduce to a minimum the risk of the development of
acidity in the oil.
3.7.5.19 Every care shall be taken to ensure that the design and manufacture of the
transformers and auxiliary plant shall be such to have minimum noise and vibration
levels following good modern manufacturing practices. The maximum noise levels
shall be stated in the bid.
3.7.6 Ratings
3.7.6.1 The windings of the transformer shall be rated at 23MVA (ONAF), with a minimum
ONAN rating of 18 MVA. These ratings shall be for the operating conditions stated
in clause 1.5.
The rating specified in this clause shall be the continuous rating at the maximum
ambient temperature and altitude given in clause 1.5
3.7.6.2 (a) The transformer shall be capable of carrying its full normal rating continuously at
any tap under the conditions stated in clause 2.7.5.1 without undue stress, overheating,
or the temperature rise in the hottest region exceeding 55ºC and 60 ºC in oil and
windings respectively.
(b) The loading capabilities shall be demonstrated by a temperature – rise test. This
test shall be done in the presence of KPLC Representatives during factory visit.
3.7.6.3 The transformer shall be capable of withstanding the maximum fault level at its rated
voltage and impedance for 2 seconds. The design should cater for the expected
lifetime of the transformer.
3.7.7 Winding and connections
3.7.7.1 The transformer shall be wound Dyn11 with respect to the 132 kV and 33 kV
windings as per IEC 60076.
3.7.7.2 The transformers shall be capable of operation without danger on any particular
tapping at the rated MVA when the voltage may vary by ± 10% of the voltage
corresponding to the tapping.
3.7.7.3 The windings and connections as well as the insulating material shall not soften, ooze,
shrink or collapse during service. The materials shall be non-catalytic and
chemically inactive in transformer oil during service.
3.7.7.4 No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its
thickness. The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals to minimize
eddy currents and equalize the current and temperature distribution along the
windings.

3.7.7.5 The windings and connections shall be properly braced to withstand shocks during
transportation or due to short circuit and other transient conditions during service.
3.7.7.6 Adequate pre-shrinkage of the coil assembly using pre-compressed press board
material having low moisture content for the radial spacer blocks shall be ensured by
the manufacturers so that there is no displacement of the radial spacer blocks due to
frequent short circuits on the transformers.
3.7.7.7 All windings after being wound and all fibrous hygroscopic materials used in the
construction of the transformer shall be dried under vacuum and impregnated with
hot oil.
3.7.7.8 The coil clamping rings wherever used shall preferably be of flat insulated steel
laminations.
3.7.7.9 The radial spacer blocks must be made of pre-compressed pressboard material, which
will not soften while in contact with oil or fray out into fibers or edges. The slots
should be so dimensioned that the blocks will not come out of the slots.
3.7.7.10 All joints shall be brazed/crimped considering the vibrations due to short circuits and
load fluctuations.
3.7.7.11 KPLC will inspect built-up winding for its quality, weight of copper, insulation and
overall weight of coil assembly. The size of conductor used for different windings
shall also be checked during stage inspection to check the current density.
3.7.7.12 The transformer shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of
harmonic voltage, especially the third and fifth, so as to eliminate wave-form
distortion and from any possibility of high frequency disturbances, inductive effects
or of circulating currents between the neutral points at different transforming
stations reaching such a magnitude as to cause interference with communication
circuits.
3.7.7.13 The windings shall be designed to reduce to a minimum the out-of-balance forces in
the transformer at all voltage ratios.
3.7.8 Tapping
3.7.8.1 Tapping Range
The transformer shall be provided with tapping on the 132 kV winding for a variation
of no load primary voltage for parallel operation, with Tap No. 1 having the highest
voltage assignment, as follows:
132000 volts + 8 ´ 1.67%

- 8 ´ 1.67%

3.7.8.2 Tapping Method
Tapping shall be carried out by means of an on-load tap changer as described in

clause 2.7.13 below.
3.7.9 Core and flux density
a) Core
3.7.9.1. The core shall be constructed from the laminations of high grade cold rolled non-
aging, grain oriented silicon steel known as M4 High B Grade or superior grade
CRGO steels of maximum 0.27mm or less lamination thickness especially suitable
for transformer core. The grade of CRGO shall be stated in the bid.
3.7.9.2 The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges,
development of short-circuit paths within itself or to the earthed or to the clamping
structure and the production of flux components at right angles to the plane of the
laminations which may cause local heating.
3.7.9.3 Every care shall be exercised in the selection, treatment and handling of core steel to
ensure that as far as practicable, the laminations are flat and the finally assembled
core is free from distortion.
3.7.9.4 Adequate oil ducts shall be provided in the core for cooling. Tinned copper strip
bridging pieces shall be used for maintaining electrical continuity wherever the
magnetic circuit is provided into pockets by such ducts or insulating material thicker
than 0.25mm.
3.7.9.5 There shall be no movement of the core assembly relative to the tank during transport,
installation as well as in service due to sudden jerks caused by short circuits and
fluctuating loads.
3.7.9.6 All steel sections used for supporting the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted or shot
blasted after cutting, drilling and welding. Any non-magnetic or high resistance alloy
shall be of established quality.
3.7.9.7 Adequate lifting lugs shall be provided to enable core and winding to be lifted.
3.7.9.8 The supporting framework of the Cores shall be so designed as to avoid the presence
of pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through the drain
valve, or cause trapping of air during filling.
3.7.9.9 The insulation structure for the core to bolts and core to clamp plate shall be such as
to withstand a voltage of 2kV AC for one minute.
(b) Flux Density

3.7.9.10 The primary voltage variation, which may affect the flux density at every tap, shall
be kept in view while designing the transformer.

3.7.9.11 The transformer shall be so designed that the working flux density shall not exceed
1.6 Tesla at normal voltage, frequency & ratio. Tenders with higher flux density
than specified shall not be considered.
3.7.9.12 Tenderers shall indicate the continuous allowable maximum flux for one minute and
five seconds.
3.7.9.13 The limit of flux density at which core material used saturates shall also be stated in
the tender. The name and grade of core material shall be stated in the tender.
3.7.9.14 The successful tenderer shall be required to furnish magnetization curve of the core
material, design calculations and such other data/documents deemed fit by the
purchaser for being satisfied that flux density is as desired.
NOTE: The above flux density has been specified to meet with the over fluxing of the core
due to temporary over voltage of the orders of 25% for one minute and 40% for five
seconds that may appear in abnormal conditions such as the one obtained following
sudden loss of large loads.
3.7.10 Losses, Regulation and Impedance
3.7.10.1 Losses of the transformer shall be stated and shall be subject to tolerances in
accordance with IEC 60076. The fixed losses shall be as low as is consistent with
good design, reliability and economical use of materials.
3.7.10.2 Voltage regulation from no-load to continuous rated output at unity power factor, at
0.8 lagging and 0.8 leading power factor with constant voltage across the higher
voltage windings shall be stated in the bid.
3.7.10.3 The impedance voltage at extreme tappings and at principal tapping shall be stated
and shall be subject to tolerances in accordance with IEC 60076.
3.7.10.4 Terminals: Arrangement & Bushings
3.7.10.5 The 33kV and 132kV windings shall be brought out separately through open
bushings of outdoor, weatherproof design in accordance with the latest IEC
standard.
3.7.10.6 Bushings for 132kV terminals shall be of oil-filled condenser type construction,
draw-out type and shall each have a capacitance test point. Bushings for 33kV
terminals shall be of the solid porcelain type.
3.7.10.7 The neutral bushing of the transformer shall be identical to the corresponding phase
terminal bushings for 33kV Bushings.
3.7.10.8 Spacing and air clearances shall be so co-ordinated as to render the probability of a
flashover from the terminal of one winding to the terminal of another winding
negligible.

3.7.10.9 Leakage distance of bushings shall not be less than 25mm/kV, based on operating
phase to phase voltage.
3.7.10.10 Bushing terminals shall be clamp type suitable for both copper and aluminium
Bus bars of sizes up to 76mm diameter.
3.7.10.11 Each bushing of the 132kV windings shall be mounted on a turret. Each turret shall
be suitable for accommodating at least two sets of current transformers.
3.7.10.12 Each bushing of the 33kV windings shall be mounted on a turret. Each turret shall
be suitable for accommodating at least three sets of current transformers.
3.7.10.13 Terminal arrangement on the HV and LV sides shall be A, B, C and n, a, b, c

respectively.
3.7.11 Current Transformers to be fitted
3.7.11.1 Current transformers shall be installed in the bushing turrets and shall be of the
following quantities, ratios, ratings and class:
(a) 132 kV Phase Bushings CTs

CORE 1
HV side-line - ph 1A ; 15VA, 100/1A, cl.3 - for winding thermocopy.
HV side-line - ph 1B ; 15VA, 100/1A, cl.0.5 – for measurements.
HV side-line - ph 1C ; 15VA, 100/1A, cl.3 – for winding thermocopy
CORE2
HV side-line - ph 1A ; 15VA, 100/1A, Class X, Vk >250V – for differential
protection.
HV side-line - ph 1B ; 15VA, 100/1A, Class X, Vk >250V – for differential
protection.
HV side-line - ph 1C ; 15VA, 100/1A, Class X, Vk >250V – for differential
protection.
CORE 3
HV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 100/1A, 5P20 – O/C.
HV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 100/1A, 5P20 – O/C.
HV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 100/1A, 5P20 – O/C
CORE 4
HV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 600/1A, 5P20 – Bus prot.

HV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 600/1A, 5P20 – Bus Prot
HV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 600/1A, 5P20 – Bus Prot
(b) 33 kV Phase Bushings CTs

Core 1
MV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 400/1A, Class X, Vk >250V – Differential.

MV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 400/1A, Class X, Vk >250V – Differential.

MV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 400/1A, Class X, Vk >250V – Differential.
Core2
MV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 400/1A, cl.3 - for winding thermocopy
MV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 400/1A, cl.3– for AVR supply
MV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 400/1A, cl.3 - for winding thermocopy.
Core3
MV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 400/1A, 5P20 – O/C.
MV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 400/1A, 5P20 – O/C.
MV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 400/1A, 5P20 – O/C
Core 4
MV side-line - ph 2A ; 15VA, 400/1A, CL X – REF

MV side-line - ph 2B ; 15VA, 400/1A, CL X – REF
MV side-line - ph 2C ; 15VA, 400/1A, CL X – REF
33KV NEUTRAL
Core 1
Neutral side -; 15 VA 400/1 cl. x - for Restricted Earth fault.
Core 2
Neutral side -; 15 VA 400/200/1A cl. x - for Earth fault Protection.
3.7.11.2 Current transformers of suitable rating and class for winding temperature indicators
shall be installed to adequately cover the transformer as indicated above for
guidance.
3.7.11.3 Current transformers shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60044.
3.7.11.4 Full technical particulars of current transformers offered, including type test results
from an International reputable Testing Authority or a National Standards and
Testing Authority, shall be submitted with tender.
3.7.12 AIR CLEARANCE
3.7.12.1 When totally assembled, as in service, electrical clearances in air shall be adequate to
withstand the assigned impulse withstand test voltages.
3.7.12.2 Care shall be taken to ensure that all fittings are suitably positioned so as not to
interfere with the external connection to the bushing terminals.
3.7.12.3 Minimum external air clearances shall be as shown under.

NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE BETWEEN 33kV 132

PHASES kV
Minimum clearance phase-to-earth and phase-to- mm 485 1270
neutral
Minimum clearance phase-to-phase between mm 485 1475
phases of the same winding
Minimum clearance between a line terminal of mm 485 1475
the high voltage winding and a line terminal of a
lower voltage winding
Minimum clearance from live metal to oil pipe- mm 480 1630
work including conservator and pressure relief
device
3.7.13 INSULATION LEVELS
The complete transformer arranged for service, shall be capable of withstanding the
following voltages and shall comply fully with the requirements of IEC 60076 Part 3,
including the latest amendments.
Nominal system Highest system Lightning Impulse Power frequency

voltage voltage withstand voltage withstand voltage
(kV, peak)
(kV, rms) (kV, rms) (kV, rms)
33 36 210 95
132 145 685 290
3.7.14 ON LOAD TAP CHANGER AND MECHANISM BOX
3.7.14.1 The transformer shall be complete with vacuum type on-load, electrically driven tap
changing mechanism of the high-speed resistor transition type, and shall comply
with the requirements of IEC 214 and 512. The equipment shall be suitable for
remote operation from a control panel supplied with the transformer as well as `for
local operation from the Motor Drive Unit (MDU) mounted on the transformer body.
3.7.14.2 The mechanism shall be so designed as to ensure that when a tap change operation is
in progress, it shall be able to complete the task independently irrespective of
operation of any relays or switches.
3.7.14.3 Adequate means shall be provided to safeguard the transformer and its auxiliary
circuits from damage should a failure of the auxiliary supply or any other mal-
operation occur during the progress of tap changing that may prevent it from
completing its task.
3.7.14.4 Means shall be provided in the marshalling kiosk for mechanical isolation of the
supply to the Motor Drive Unit, and a suitable thermal overload device (details to be

submitted with tender) shall be provided in the MDU for the protection of the motor.
The possibility of over-running the mechanism at each end of the voltage range shall
be prevented by means of limit switches and mechanical stops. Other techniques
used to prevent tap changer runaway shall be indicated.
3.7.14.5 A mechanically operated device shall be provided to indicate the tap position locally,
and a suitable tap position transmitter shall be provided for the remote tap position
indication.
3.7.14.6 A counter shall be provided on the tap changing mechanism box to indicate the total
number of operations completed by the equipment.
3.7.14.7 Contactors and associated equipment for the control circuit for local/remote and
manual operations of the tap changer mechanism shall be housed in the mechanism
box.
3.7.14.8 The tap changer (diverter switch) shall be housed in a separate compartment and
shall be Vacuum Type. Sufficient documentation for the vacuum switch in form of
manuals, instructions, drawings, technical characteristics, certified type test
certificates and reports (from an International Testing/ Standards Laboratory),
manufacturing and export experience of the supplier shall be submitted with the
tender for technical evaluation.
3.7.14.9 The Motor Drive Unit shall have the following in addition to what has been stated
above:
(a) Isolating switch in the transformer marshalling box for the supply to the tap
changer Motor Drive Unit,
(b) Raise/lower contactors for tap changer motor operation, and associated single-
phase protection/overload relay,
(c) Switch for selection of local/remote tap changer control,
(d) Switch or switches for local tap changer operation,
(e) Provisions shall be made available for hand operation in the mechanism box.
3.7.14.10 The tap changer shall be of internationally reputable manufacture and proven
reliability in service. Detailed documentation and copies of certificates shall be
submitted with the tender for evaluation.
3.7.15 Remote Tap Changer Control Panel
The remote tap changer control panel shall contain the following devices:
§ Automatic Voltage Regulating Relay (to be of proven design and technical details
submitted with tender).
§ Off/Manual/Automatic switch for the Relay.
§ Raise /Lower control switch.

§ Raise , Lower, ‘out of step’ and tap change in progress indication lamps
§ Dial type Tap position indicator (technical details to be submitted with the tender).
§ Master/Follower/Independent Scheme and selector switch. The Tap Changer shall
employ, negative reactance or circulating current principle scheme for parallel
operation with other three similar transformers but of different rating.
§ Local /Remote switch
§ KV meter (technical details to be submitted with the tender)
§ Door operated lamp and anti-condensation heater.
§ Heater switch ON/OFF to control anti-condensation heater
§ Various control circuits controlled by Miniature Circuit Breakers
3.1.16 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATING RELAY
The relay shall be of proven design and shall incorporate the following features;
¨ Rated voltage 110V AC.

¨ Rated Current 1 Amp.
¨ Initial time delay range 5-100 seconds, and ability to select Integrated delay or
Definite time delay.
¨ Inter-tap delay 1-80 seconds
¨ Relay voltage setting, adjustable in steps of 1V from 85 - 130V
¨ Line drop compensation 0-20 V at rated current for both reactive and resistive
setting
¨ Under voltage inhibit range 70%-90% & over current inhibit range 150%-250%
¨ Bandwidth range 0.5-5 % of voltage level
¨ Over voltage inhibit
¨ The AVR should have a selector switch with OFF/Manual/Auto
¨ Should be of Numeric Design.
¨ The Relay shall be Designed to employ both Circulating Current Compensation or
Negative (Reverse) Reactance compounding to minimize circulating current for
Parallel Transformer Operation.
¨ Tap changer Maintenance, by maintaining Tap Operation count.
¨ Tap Changer Mechanism Failure.
Sufficient documentation in form of instruction manuals, drawings, technical

characteristics and test certificates from international/national testing/standards
laboratory of the country of manufacture shall be submitted with the tender to
facilitate technical evaluation.
3.7.17 PARALLEL OPERATION
3.7.17.1 A scheme for operating this transformer in parallel with other similar units of
different rating shall be provided and wired in the marshalling kiosk (box) by the
manufacturer ready for interphasing.
3.7.17.2 The scheme shall maintain the transformers in stable parallel operation and limit
circulating current to a minimum.

3.7.17.3 In the event of this transformer being disconnected from the system, its reconnection
shall not result in its tap changer failing to operate automatically because of tapping
discrepancy.
3.7.17.4 Suitable selector switch shall be provided, so that any one transformer of the group
can at a time be selected as “Master”, “Follower” or “Independent”.
3.7.17.5 Necessary interlock blocking independent control when the units are in parallel shall
be provided.
3.7.17.6 The scheme shall be such that only one transformer of a group can be selected as
“Master”.
3.7.17.7 An out –of- step device shall be provided for each transformer which shall be
arranged to prevent further tapchanging when transformers in a group operating in
“Parallel control” are one tap out-of-step.
3.7.18 MARSHALLING KIOSK (Box)
The marshalling kiosk shall be of outdoor, IP 55, weatherproof, vermin-proof type with a
hinged, lockable door fitted with a glass panel to facilitate reading of oil and winding
temperature gauges without opening the door. The kiosk shall be mounted so that its window
is approximately 1600mm above ground level; and shall accommodate at least the following
items:-
a) Winding temperature indicator for both HV and MV with a maximum pointer

drag hand type with a resetting knob and three separately adjustable mercury
contacts for alarm, trip and operation of cooler control circuits as required.
b) Oil temperature indicator with a maximum pointer drag hand type with a
resetting knob and two separately adjustable mercury contacts for alarm and
trip.
c) Mechanical isolating switch for the incoming 3 phase, 4 wire, 415V 50Hz
supply to the marshalling kiosk. 415 volts and 240 volts socket outlets (square
pins) shall also be provided in the kiosk.
d) A mechanical isolating switch for the outgoing 3 phase 4-wire 415V 50Hz
supply to the OLTC Motor drive unit.
e) Suitable starters for the cooling fan motors complete with thermal
overload/single phase protection relay and normally-closed electrical auxiliary
contacts for motor failure alarm/trip circuits.
f) A selector switch with ‘OFF’, ‘HAND’ and AUTO positions for cooling fan
motors
g) An internal standard screw type illumination lamp and heater for the kiosk
with respective switches. The lamp shall be door switch operated.

h) Wiring, fuses, links, terminal boards and cable glands for bottom entry of
multicore cables.
i) Anti-condensation heater with a switch.
j) Thermostat for anti-condensation heater control.
k) Hygrostat for anti-condensation heater control.
l) MCB control for each of the circuits.
m) Phase sequence relay for detection of wrong phase rotation for the supply to
the fans and the OLTC Motor Drive Unit.
Detailed technical details, drawings, and schematics shall be submitted with the tender
documents for evaluation.
3.7.19 AUXILIARY SUPPLIES
Equipment shall be rated for the following auxiliary power supplies:
(a) Cooler control circuits: 240 V, single phase, 50Hz

(b) Tap changer control: 240 V, single phase, 50Hz
(c) Cooling fan motors: 415 V, three phase, 50Hz
(d) Tap changer motor: 415 V, three phase, 50Hz
3.7.20 TRANSFORMER TANK AND TANK COVER
3.7.20.1 The tank shall be constructed of mild steel plates of sufficient thickness and strength
and shall be complete with all accessories. It shall be designed so as to allow the
complete transformer when filled with oil to be lifted by crane or jacks, transported
by road, rail or on water without overstraining any joints and without causing
subsequent leakage of oil.
3.7.20.2 The base of the tank shall be so designed that it shall be possible to move the
complete transformer unit in any direction without injury when using rollers, and/or
plates
3.7.20.3 The tank and its accessories shall be so designed as to prevent collecting or trapping
of gases. Where this cannot be avoided, pipes shall be provided to vent the gas into
the main expansion pipe. The vent shall have a minimum outside diameter of 19mm
except for short pipes which may be 6.35mm minimum inside diameter.
3.7.20.4 All joints, other than those that may have to be broken shall be welded. Caulking of
unsatisfactorily welded joints is forbidden.

3.7.20.5 The main tank body shall be pressure tested and a certificate issued by the national
standards and testing laboratory ascertaining the soundness of all welded joints. A
certified copy of the certificate shall be submitted with the tender for evaluation.
3.7.20.6 Tank shall be provided with lifting lugs suitable for lifting the complete transformer
with oil. Furthermore, a minimum of four accessible jacking positions shall be
provided to enable the complete transformer to be raised or lowered using jacks.
3.7.20.7 The transformer tank and all attachments normally under oil shall be capable of
withstanding full vacuum. The oil conservator shall withstand at least 35% full
Vacuum.
3.7.20.8 Tank cover shall be of such a design and construction as to prevent accumulation of
water and shall be bolted to the flange on the tank top to form a weatherproof joint.
3.7.20.9 Inspection openings shall be provided as necessary to give easy access to bushings,
tapping switch and for testing or general inspection.
3.7.20.10 Tank cover and inspection covers shall be provided with suitable lifting
arrangements. Inspection covers shall not weigh more than 25 kg apiece.
3.7.20.11 The tank cover shall be fitted with isolated pockets for oil and winding temperature
instrument bulbs. Protection shall be provided where necessary for each capillary
tube. The pocket shall be fitted with a captive screwed cap to prevent the ingress
of water. Detailed drawings shall be provided.
3.7.20.12 The pocket shall be located in a position of maximum oil temperature at continuous
maximum rating and it shall be possible to insert and remove the instrument bulbs
without lowering the oil in the tank.
3.7.20.13 Gaskets for weather and oil-tight joint faces shall be of synthetic rubber-and-cork
composition and shall have a minimum thickness of 5mm, except that where
jointing faces are precision-machined thinner gaskets may be used.
3.7.21 PAINT WORK
Cleaning and painting shall be in accordance with the following requirements. Any
deviations in methodology shall be stated and may only be those that will produce
demonstrably superior results.
A test report issued by the national standards and testing laboratory shall be produced at the
time of acceptance testing of the transformer.
3.7.21.1 Tanks and Accessories
(a) External and internal surfaces of all transformer tanks and chambers and other
fabricated steel items shall be cleaned of scale, rust and surface dirt by blast
cleaning or other suitable approved method. After cleaning, these surfaces
should be immediately covered with paint.

(b) The exterior shall be thoroughly cleaned by shot blasting or other approved
method and given priming coat followed by two coats of contrasting colours of
durable weather-resisting paint. The final coat shall be high gloss of shade No.
632 (Admiralty Grey) according to BS 381C.
(c) The interior of all transformer tanks and other oil-filled chambers shall be
cleaned of all scale and rust by shot blasting or other approved method. Hot oil
resistant varnish on white synthetic enamel/proxy paint is to be used for painting
the inside of all oil filled chambers, including transformer tanks. The final coat
shall be of a light-coloured anti-condensation finish.
3.7.21.2 Radiators
(a) Radiators shall be thoroughly degreased and treated externally by phospating

and/or other rust-inhibiting process.
(b) Radiators shall be flood-painted with a primer and two coats of durable weather
and oil resisting paint. The final external coat shall be high gloss of shade No.
632 (Admiralty Grey) according to BS 381C. The total paint thickness shall not
be less than 80μm at any point.
3.7.22 COOLING SYSTEM
3.7.22.1 Radiators shall be supplied in banks as suitable. Each bank shall be fitted with gate
valves with legible labelling for OPEN/CLOSED positions and used for full
isolation from the main tank. Each radiator shall have a top and bottom isolating
butterfly valve. The radiator design shall exclude accumulation of rainwater.
3.7.22.2 Radiator banks shall be mounted directly to the transformer main tank for best use
of space.
3.7.22.3 Each radiator shall have a bleeding facility (to allow escape of air) on top.
3.7.22.4 Separately mounted a-c motor driven fans fitted with wire mesh guards shall be
provided for the radiators. The fan motors shall be totally enclosed, weatherproof,
outdoor type suitable for continuous operation and shall be fitted with terminal
boxes and glands to accommodate multicore electric supply cables. Technical details
of the fan motor shall be supplied with the tender.
3.7.22.5 Suitable starters, protection/warning devices, contactors and switches for the motors
shall be provided as stipulated in clause 4.14 above.
3.7.22.6 Suitable lifting lugs shall be provided for removal and assembly of radiators.
3.7.22.7 The complete cooling system and the fittings shall be fully co-ordinated. Where
necessary, the cooling fan motors shall be fired in designed groups and in such
sequence as to achieve the desired control at maximum efficiency and safety.

3.7.23 FITTINGS
3.7.23.1 Conservator
The transformer shall be provided with a conservator having a filling orifice, an

isolating valve, a drain valve and a cobalt free dehydrating breather (with oil seal)
which shall be accessible from ground level. The drain pipe shall be located at the
lowest point in the conservator in its final installed position and welded such that it
can drain all the sludge in the conservator.
The conservator shall be partitioned proportionately to separate the main tank oil and
the tapchanger oil. Each compartment to be fitted with a breather and an oil level
indicator with electrical contacts for alarms. The conservator complete with drain
valve shall be in such a position as not to obstruct the electrical connections to the
transformer. An oil gauge shall be provided at one end of the conservator marked
with oil levels that can be read by a person standing on the ground. Expansion joints
may be provided in the inlet and outlet pipes to the transformer as necessary.
3.7.23.2 Gas and Oil Actuated Relay (Transformer main tank)
Transformers shall be provided with a gas and oil actuated relay (Buchholz relay) of
double float type with tripping contacts to detect accumulation of gas and sudden
changes of oil pressure. Shut off valves and flange couplings shall be provided to
facilitate easy removal of the relay without lowering oil level in the main tank. A
bleed valve for gas venting, a test valve and a terminal box suitably wired to the
marshalling kiosk shall also be provided. The gas venting pipe shall be brought down
to a height reachable from ground level and shall be fitted with a gas sampling device
at the end. Provision should be made on the relay for simulation of gas and oil surge
for testing purposes.
3.7.23.3 Gas and Oil Actuated Relay (Tap changer compartment)
Tap changer compartment shall be provided with a gas and oil actuated relay
(Buchholz relay) of double float type with tripping contacts to detect accumulation of
gas and sudden changes of oil pressure. Shut off valves and flange couplings shall be
provided to facilitate easy removal of the relay without lowering oil level in the tap
changer compartment. A bleed valve for gas venting, a test valve and a terminal box
suitably wired to the marshalling kiosk shall also be provided. The gas venting pipe
shall be brought down to a height reachable from ground level and shall be fitted with
a gas sampling device at the end. Provision should be made on the relay for
simulation of gas and oil surge for testing purposes.
3.7.23.4 Pressure Relief Device
A pressure relief device shall be provided for the main tank, complete with trip
contacts suitably wired to the marshalling kiosk. The device shall be resettable after
an operation. Details of the device shall be submitted with the offer.

3.7.23.5 Winding Temperature Indicator
(a) The transformer shall be provided with winding temperature indicator,

maximum indicator and associated current transformer. The temperature
indicator shall have a scale ranging from 20°C to 150°C, preferably uniformly
divided and its type to be stated in the bid. The indicator shall have two sets of
independently adjustable contacts as follows:
(i) Alarm Adjustable setting: 70°C to 150°C
Fixed differential: Not more than 5°C
(ii) Trip Adjustable setting: 70° to 150°C
Fixed differential: Not more than 5°C
(b) All contacts shall be adjustable to a scale and shall be accessible on removal of
the cover for dial type devices. For purposes of (i) and (ii) above, the contacts
shall be suitable for making or breaking 150VA between the limits of 30 and
250 V a.c. or d.c., and making 500 VA between the limits of the 110 and 250 V
d.c.
(c) Isolating and test links shall be provided in a control cubicle to allow for
measuring the oil temperature and testing the heater coil.
(d) The current transformer providing winding temperature indication shall be

located at the discretion of the manufacturer, in the best position for the duty.
(e) Calibration of indicator shall be related to the winding having the maximum
temperature rise.
(f) If the value on the winding temperature indicator varies by more than 3°C from
the values derived from the tests specified in clause 5, then adjustments shall be
made to the equipment to achieve these limits.
3.7.23.6 Oil Temperature Indicator
Transformers shall be provided with an oil temperature indicator with a maximum

pointer and contacts for alarm and trip signals, similar to winding temperature indicator
above.
3.7.24 ACCESSORIES
The following shall be provided:
3.7.24.1 Valves with blank flanges fitted at the top and bottom for oil filtration
purposes, having the following features:
(a) The valve located at the bottom of the tank shall also be suitable for draining oil
from the transformer tank.

(b) All valves shall close with a clockwise rotation. The main inlet and outlet
valves shall be provided with “open” and “closed” position indicators, visible
from ground level.
(c) All valves shall have provision for padlocking in the open and closed position
for operation purposes. The hole for the padlock shall have a clearance of not
less than 8mm and not more than 10mm. Locking pin shall be of anti-rattle
design to limit noise emissions. The locking padlocks shall be provided.
(d) Closed/Open positions of all valves must be clearly marked.
3.7.24.2 Oil sampling device appropriately located to obtain samples of transformer oil
from the top and bottom of the tank.
3.7.24.3 Two earthing terminals located at diagonally opposite corners of the tank.
3.7.24.4 Air release valves or plugs for the main tank, suitably located.
3.7.24.5Non-deteriorating detailed diagram and rating plates.
3.7.24.6 Other Fittings/accessories
Diagram plate
Plate of valves and oil piping.
Motor drive electrical and protection diagram.
Cooling control electrical and protection diagram.
Electrical scheme for operating this in parallel with other similar units.
Detailed list of the transformer equipment & fittings including their drawings,
brochures & instruction manuals.
Shipping data
Detailed erection, installation, operation and maintenance manuals in English
language.
Testing Plan.
Impact recorder for the whole duration of transit and a report provided afterwards.
2 Sets of keys for padlocking devices.
(all control boxes as well as valves to be padlocked)
3.7.25 TRANSFORMER OIL

The transformer and all associated oil immersed equipment shall be supplied oil filled. The
oil shall comply with all the requirements of IEC 296 (class 1: un-inhibited oil). Tenderer
shall provide the chemical composition and properties of the oil and the replacement cycle
over the expected life of the transformer.
3.7.26 CAPITALIZATION
3.7.26.1 Transformer losses shall be capitalized at the following rates to facilitate evaluation
and comparison of tenders.

Load (copper) losses US$ 2577 per kW

No load (Iron) losses US$ 4339 per kW
NB:- Where tenders are being compared, losses will be capitalized at the above rate
and added to the bid evaluated price of the transformer.
3.7.27 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3.7.27.1 The supplier shall include a quality assurance programme (QAP) that will be used to
ensure that the transformer design, material, workmanship, tests, service capability,
maintenance and documentation, will fulfil the requirements stated in the contract
documents, standards, specifications and regulations. The QAP shall be based on
and include relevant parts to fulfil the requirements of ISO 9001:2000.
3.7.27.2 The Manufacturer’s Declaration of Conformity to reference standards and copies of

quality management certifications including copy of valid ISO 9001: 2000
certificate shall be submitted with the tender for evaluation.
3.7.28 TESTS AND INSPECTION
3.7.28.1 The transformer shall be inspected and tested in accordance with the requirements of
IEC 60076 and this specification. It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer to
perform or to have performed all the tests specified. Tenderers shall confirm the
manufacturer’s capabilities in this regard when submitting tenders. Any limitations
shall be clearly specified.
3.7.28.2 Certified true copies of previous Type Test Certificates and Type Test Reports
issued by the relevant International or National Testing/ Standards Authority or
ISO/IEC 17025/ILAC accredited laboratory shall be submitted with the offer for
evaluation (all in English Language). A copy of the accreditation certificate for the
laboratory shall also be submitted. Any translations of certificates and test reports
into English language shall be signed and stamped by the Testing Authority.
Copies of type test certificates and reports for the transformer to be submitted shall
include:
· Dielectric tests to IEC 60076 (Lightning Impulse and Power Frequency Withstand
Tests).
· Short circuit withstand test to IEC 60076.
· Temperature rise test to IEC 60076.
3.7.28.3 The transformer shall be subject to acceptance tests at the manufactures’ works
before dispatch. Acceptance tests shall be witnessed by two Engineers appointed by
The Kenya Power and Lighting Company Limited (KPLC) and shall include the
following:
3.7.28.3.1 Routine tests to IEC 60076 (to be done during acceptance testing at factory)
· Measurement of winding resistance

· Ratio test
· Vector group

· Separate source voltage withstand test

· Induced over-voltage
· Insulation resistance
· Oil leakage test on fully assembled transformer for 12 hours
· Measurement of impedance voltage
· Magnetic balance
· Measurement of no-load loss and current
· Measurement of load loss (at normal & extreme taps)
· Tests on on-load tap-changer
· Tests on on-load tap-changer remote control panel
· Efficiency at 50%, 75%, 100% loading at unity p.f and rated terminal voltage
(Corrected to 75°C)
· Lightning impulse withstand test
3.7.28.3.2 Type Tests to IEC 60076 (to be done during acceptance testing at factory)
· Temperature rise test – To be performed on the two units during acceptance

testing.
3.7.28.3.3 Additional tests (to be done during acceptance testing at factory)
· Measurement of power taken by the fans

· Insulation dissipation factor
· Condenser bushing capacitance and tan delta
· DGA (dissolved gas analysis) of the insulating oil.- To be performed before and
after temperature rise test
· Acoustic and sound level
· Sweep Frequency Response Analysis
· Insulation tests on the auxiliary wiring in the marshalling boxes
· Measurement of zero sequence impedance
· Measurement of harmonics no-load current
· CT ratio and polarity
· Measurement of zero phase sequence impedance
· Paint thickness
· Tank pressure test
3.7.28.3.4 Testing Facility
The manufacture shall provide current e-mail address, fax and telephone numbers and
contact person at the International or National Standards and Testing Facility of the country
where the transformer is manufactured and tested.
3.7.28.3.5 Test reports for each transformer (including its individual components) shall be
submitted to The Kenya Power and Lighting Company for approval before
shipment.
3.7.28.3.6 On receipt of the transformer KPLC will inspect it and may perform or have
performed any of the relevant tests in order to verify compliance with the

specification. The manufacturer shall replace/rectify without charge to KPLC,

equipment which upon examination, test or use fail to meet any or all of the
requirements in the specification.
3.7.29 MARKING, LABELLING AND PACKING
3.7.29.1 The transformer and associated components shall be packed in a manner as to

protect it from any damage in transportation and handling.
3.7.29.2 Each assembly and package of items associated with the transformer shall be
suitably marked.
3.7.29.3 In addition to markings and labels required elsewhere in the specification, each
equipment and component shall be marked in accordance with the relevant IEC
standard. Each transformer shall be provided with a rating plate of weatherproof
material, fitted in a visible position, showing the appropriate details listed in IEC
60076. The entries on the plate shall be indelibly marked (either by etching,
engraving or stamping).
3.7.29.4 In addition, the name plate shall include load and no load losses for the highest,
lowest and principle tap positions, temperature class of insulation, connection
diagram and the inscription 'PROPERTY OF KPLC.' all marked indelibly as in 6.3.

3.8 SUB STATION LOCAL TRANSFORMER
3.8.1 SCOPE
This specification is for a 200KVA, 33000/433 volts three phase distribution transformer for
substation auxiliary supply.
A changeover control panel shall be installed in the control room to enable supply
changeover from either of the station transformer to the distribution boards.
3.8.2 GENERAL
3.8.2.1 The transformer shall be outdoor, oil immersed core type and shall be
manufactured and tested as per IEC 76.
3.8.2.2 The complete transformer shall be painted and the final colour shall be Dark
Admiralty Grey colour No.632 as per BS 381C. The inside of the tank shall be
coated with oil resisting varnish or paint so that oil cannot come into contact
with tank or metal at any point.
3.8.2.3 The 200kVA transformers shall be fitted with skids and provided with 40.0mm
diameter axle hole for jacking lugs and suitable for concrete plinth mounting.

3.8.3 CONSTRUCTION
3.8.3.1 The transformer tank shall be constructed of corrugated mild steel plates fabricated
by pressing or rolling.
The transformer tank shall be sealed by means of suitable gasket or welding and be
fitted with dial type thermometer and earth terminals.
3.8.3.2 The cores shall be constructed of high quality low loss grain oriented electrical steel
laminations. The design shall ensure no hot sections due to overfluxing or
circulating currents. The flux density at any point shall not exceed 1.65 tesla.
3.8.3.3 The windings shall be of electrolytic copper wires capable of sustaining short circuit
forces on the transformer.
3.8.3.4 The high voltage winding shall have tappings at ±2 X 2.5% operated by an off-circuit
switch with marked position indicators.
3.8.3.5 The three-phase transformer shall be wound to IEC vector reference Dyn11.
3.8.3.6 Outdoor weatherproof bushings, provided with screwed stem and nuts shall be
mounted on the tank cover, arranged to be changed without opening transformer. The
high voltage bushing shall be fitted with adjustable double-gap arcing horns set at 2 X
55mm gaps.
The minimum creepage distance of the bushing shall not be less than 990mm for
33kV.
3.8.3.7 Cooling of the transformer shall be by natural circulation of oil and natural circulation
of air (ONAN).
3.8.3.8 The transformer shall be filled with oil as per IEC 296.
3.8.3.9 The transformer shall be provided with a metallic name plate giving the required
rating and other particulars.
3.8.4 STANDARD SIZES
The standard size for the Substation local supply transformers shall be 200KVA; three
phase 33000/433 volts.
3.8.5 RATINGS
3.8.5.1 The transformer shall be capable of carrying its full normal rated current
continuously under the tropical conditions stated, and at any tappings without the
temperature rise in the hottest region exceeding 60oC and 65oC in oil and winding
respectively.

3.8.5.2 The transformer shall be capable for sustaining a three-phase symmetrical short
circuit on the low voltage side with power maintained on the high voltage side
without damage or distress for 2 seconds.
3.8.5.3 The impedance voltage measured at the normal tap shall not exceed the value
indicated in the following table.
RATING (KVA) PHASE HIGHEST SYSTEM Maximum %

VOLTAGE (KV) IMPEDANCE
200 3 36 4.0
The guaranteed losses shall be indicated in the following tables, subject to a tolerance of
10% on total losses.
RATING (KVA) PHASE HIGHEST NO LOAD FULL LOAD

SYSTEM LOSSES LOSSES $/KW
VOLTAGE (KV) $/KW
200 3 36 2577 4339
NB:- Where tenders are being compared, losses will be capitalized at the above rate
and added to the bid evaluated price of the transformer.
3.8.6 TESTS
3.8.6.1 Type and routine tests shall be carried out as per IEC 76.
3.8.6.2 All transformers shall be subjected to inspection and routine tests.
3.8.6.3 Test reports shall be completed for each transformer and made available after the tests
have been carried out.
The following spare parts shall be supplied for the transformer:

· 1 – bushing of each type with conductor and terminals
· 1 – set of gaskets
· 1 – dial type thermometer.
All other accessories necessary for full installation and maintenance shall be
provided for the Transformer.


33KV SWITCH GEAR
3.9 33kV CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
3.9.1 SCOPE
This specification is for three pole operated outdoor 33kV SF6 circuit breaker together with
controls and ancillary equipment.
3.9.2 REFERENCES
may be referred to, in case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
IEC 56: High – Voltage alternating current circuit breakers.
IEC 144: Degree of protection of enclosures for low – voltage switchgear and control
gear.
BS 5311: Specification for A.C circuit breakers of rated voltage above 1 kV.
3.9.3 CONSTRUCTION
The incomer circuit breaker shall be gang operated while the feeder circuit breakers shall be
single pole operated, out-door type, SF6 gas insulated and shall comply with the requirements
of IEC 56 and/or BS 5311.
The circuit breaker shall be live tank type.
All the three poles of circuit breakers shall be operated by local electrical and
remote/electrical from the mechanism in the housing.
The circuit breaker shall have SF6 gas for electrical interrupting medium.
The SF6 gas shall comply with the requirement of IEC 376 and be suitable for use in the
circuit breaker when it is operated under the service and system conditions.
Sufficient gas shall be provided for filling the circuit breaker at installation with additional
20% for any losses.
When the circuit breaker is in closed position a rapid fall in the SF6 gas pressure, to a level
below that at which safe operation is possible shall not result in tripping the circuit breaker.
A remote alarm indication to signal this condition shall be provided. A second stage drop in
gas shall block closing and tripping of the circuit breaker.

Insulation creepage distance shall not be less than 25mm per kV of rated voltage between
phases.
3.9.4 OPERATING MECHANISM
The operating mechanism shall be suitable for mounting at the circuit breaker supporting
structure, and below the circuit breaker in a weather-proof, dust-proof, vermin-proof and well
ventilated housing.
The degree of protection shall be class IP 54 as per the requirement of IEC 144.
Operating duty shall be standard and operating mechanism shall be trip free during the entire
closing sequence.
Operating mechanism shall be provided with either motor wound spring or pressure actuated
mechanism with provision for hand charge.
Motor operating voltage shall be 110 Volts D.C.
A set of at least ten normally closed and ten normally open spare potential free contacts shall
be provided for remote electrical indication as well as electrical interlocking and shall be
wired to a terminal block in the housing.
Potential free contacts shall be provided for alarming spring charge failure or control oil
pressure low.
Potential free contacts shall be provided for alarms for SF6 gas low and SF6 Trip Block.
A minimum of twenty (20) spare terminals shall be provided for connection to the current
and voltage transformers.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with Local/Remote selector switch. The selection of
local operation shall inhibit the operation of the circuit breaker from any remote source and
selection of remote inhibits operation from local operation.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with a local switch for Open/Neutral/Close Operation.
Mechanically operated indication to show the status of the circuit breaker operations
(open/close and springs charged/discharged) shall be provided.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with suitable terminals for connecting clamps for up to
3” outside diameter copper tubes.
The circuit breaker shall be provided with means to prevent contact pumping while the
closing circuit remains energized, should be circuit breaker either fail to latch or be tripped
during closing due to operation of the protective relays.
Mechanical interlock key arrangement shall be provided on the mechanism such that it will
not be possible to withdraw the interlock key with circuit breaker in closed position.

For the 33kV feeders, the mechanical interlock keys from each pole shall be such that
they will be closed in a block of 4 keys so that the 4 th key only come out when the
other three are on in the block . That 4th key will be used to inter lock the 2 separately.
For the 33kV incomer, the mechanical interlock key will come out only when the incomer
breaker is off and this key will be used to operate the 33kV transformer bay disconectors.
Circuit breaker shall be provided with duplicate trip coils in order to facilitate duplication of
protection tripping, where required.
The circuit breaker shall have separate operating mechanism for each pole.
From local position( only on middle phase) the operation of all the 3 poles should
be possible with CLOSE/NEUTRAL/TRIP Switch.
3.9.5 RATINGS
Parameter Value
1 Nominal Voltage 33 kV
2 Highest Voltage 36 kV
3 Frequency 50 Hz
4 Normal current 800 Amps
5 Rated short circuit current 25 kA
6 Duration of short circuit 1 Sec.
7 Rated short circuit making current 63 kA
8 First pole to clear factor 1.5
9 Operating sequence 0-0.3 sec – CO –
3 min – CO
10 Auxiliary D.C Voltage for closing & tripping coils 110 V d.c.
11 Auxiliary A.C Voltage 415/240 V, 50
Hz
12 Impulse withstand voltage 210kV peak
13 One minute power frequency withstand voltage 95kV r.m.s.
15 Minimum clearance between phases 435 mm
16 Minimum clearance to earth 385 mm
Transient recovery voltage 65 kV
3.9.6 TESTS
The manufacturer shall be responsible for performing or for having performed all the
required tests specified in this specification. Tenderers shall confirm the manufacturer’s
capabilities in this regard when submitting tenders. Any limitations shall be clearly specified.

Test certificates issued by a recognized short-circuit testing station, certifying the operation
of the circuit breaker at duties corresponding to the rated breaking capacities of the circuit
breaker shall be submitted.
Tender documents shall be accompanied by copies of Type test and Routine test certificates
for similar rated equipment. These certificates shall be certified by the National Testing or the
National Standards Institute of the country of origin.
A detailed list & contact addresses of previous customers shall be submitted with the tender.
The manufacturer shall indicate the monthly & annual production capacity and experience in
the production of the equipment he is offering.
3.9.7 DRAWING AND MANUALS
Two sets of operational manuals and drawing detailing dimensions, panel layout, wiring and
schematic shall be provided.
3.9.8 PACKING AND INFORMATION
The circuit breaker and associated components shall be packed in a manner as to protect it
from any damage in transportation and repeated handling.
Each assembly and package of items associated with the circuit breaker shall be suitably
marked.
Where an item includes a number of components to form a complete assembly, all

component parts shall be included in one composite package which shall be firmly strapped
and bound together.
Draft design and construction drawings shall be submitted to KPLC before the manufacturing
of circuit breakers commence. KPLC undertake to submit their comments or approval for the
drawings within three weeks of receiving the draft copies.
Sufficient relevant technical details and drawings shall be submitted for the purpose of
Tender Evaluation. Tenders which do not meet this requirement will be considered non-
responsive.
To facilitate comprehensive technical evaluation of the tenders, a clause by clause statement

of compliance with the specification shall be submitted with relevant manufacturer’s
specification sheets, catalogues and brochure.


3.10 33 KV THREE POLE DISCONNECTORS:
3.10.1 SCOPE
3.10.1.1 This specification is for 33kV, 800Amps Isolator for use on line disconnection,
isolation of substation apparatus.
3.10.1.2 This specification covers both the 33 kV isolators with and without earth switch.
3.10.2 REFERENCES
may be referred to in case of conflict; the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
Unless otherwise specified, the latest revision, edition and amendments shall apply
IEC 129: Alternating current disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches.
IEC 144: Degree of protection of enclosures for low - voltage switchgear and control
gear
IEC 60273: Characteristic of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with
nominal voltages greater than 1000V
BS 729: Hot dip galvanized coating on iron and steel articles.
3.10.3 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
3.10.4 CONSTRUCTION
3.10.4.1 The isolator shall be horizontal side opening, double side break rotating post type for
use on a 33kV, 50 Hz, 3 - phase system.
3.10.4.2 The isolator shall be complete with supporting base, phase coupling details,
operating rod, unions and guides.
3.10.4.3 The operating mechanism shall be provided with a universal joint to allow for a
reasonable degree of out-of alignment of the operating rod.
3.10.4.4 The isolator shall be motorised and also fitted with manual operation facility.
There should be a remote selection to allow for operation of the isolator from the
control room. The remote selection should block any local electrical or manual
operation.
3.10.4.5 The supporting under-base shall be hot dip galvanized steel as per the requirement of
BS 729.

3.10.4.6 The under-base shall be suitable for mounting on a steel structure.
3.10.4.7 All the three switches shall be arranged so that the phase units are mounted
independently and then finally interconnected with coupling tubes so as to ensure
simultaneous operation of all switches by drive rods and operating handle for both
manual and motor operation.
3.10.4.8 The operating mechanism shall be fixed at the base frame, in a weather proof,
vermin proof and dust proof housing. The degree of protection shall be class IP 54
as per IEC 144.
3.10.4.9 Auxiliary dry contacts, five normally open and five normally closed shall be
provided for electrical interlocks such that the isolator and associated 33 kV circuit
breaker can be interlocked with each other. The contacts shall be rated to
continuously carry at least 10Amps at voltages up to 500V dc/ac
3.10.4.10 Each phase shall be mounted on a spiral type solid core post insulator conforming
to IEC 60273, and shall be fitted with clamp connector for the suitable
conductor/connector.
3.10.4.11 The isolator shall be designed such that in fully open position, it shall provide
adequate electrical isolation between the contacts on all the three switches.
3.10.4.12 All current carrying parts shall be made of electrolytic high conductivity material
with switch contacts silver plated.
3.10.4.13 The earth switch shall consist of a hinged type earthing switch fixed at the base
frame. The earth switch shall have the same rating as the isolator.
3.10.4.14 The isolator shall be provided with both mechanical and electrical interlocking
devices between the isolator and earth switch so that during operations, it is only
possible to operate the earth switch with the isolator in the open position and the
isolator with the earth switches in the open position.
3.10.4.15 Two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary contacts shall be provided
on the earth switch for indication.
3.10.4.16 A similar number of auxiliary switches shall be installed as spares for future use.
3.10.4.17 The isolator and earth switch shall be provided with a padlocking facility such that
the mechanism can be locked in OPEN or CLOSED position.
3.10.5 RATING
The ratings of the isolator, including its operating devices and auxiliary equipments shall be
as indicated below.
1 Highest system voltage 36kV

2 Nominal voltage 33 kV
3 Rated lightening impulse withstand voltage 210kV

4 Rated Power frequency withstand voltage 95 kV

6 Rated normal current 800 Amps
7 Rated short time withstand current for 1 seconds 25 kA
8 Minimum creepage distance of Insulators 990 mm
3.10.6 TESTS
3.10.6.1 The isolator shall be inspected and routine tested in accordance with the requirement
of IEC 129.
3.10.6.2 Certified type test certificates issued by the relevant National Testing Authority
confirming compliance of the isolators on offer with the specifications shall be
submitted.

3.11 33kV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
3.11.1 SCOPE
This specification is for voltage transformers for use with electrical instruments and electrical
protective devices on system with maximum operating voltage up to 36kV.
3.11.2.1 The voltage transformers will be connected to overhead system operating at a

nominal voltage of 33kV and a maximum voltage of 36kV which are generally of
earthed construction.
3.11.2.2 The voltage transformer will be connected between line and earth of a 3-phase 3-
wire system with the neutral point solidly earthed.
3.11.3 CONSTRUCTION
3.11.3.1 The voltage transformer shall be out-door oil-immersed capacitor type and shall
3.11.3.2 The voltage transformer shall be suitable for installation on steel structure.
3.11.3.3 The voltage transformer shall be fitted with lifting lugs.
3.11.3.4 The porcelain portion of the voltage transformer shall be made of high-grade brown
glazed porcelain. All other external parts shall be either inherently resistant to
atmospheric corrosion or hot-dip galvanised.

3.11.3.5 The voltage transformer shall have primary, secondary and earth terminals.
3.11.3.6 The primary terminal shall be tin-plated, suitable for both copper and aluminium
connectors.
3.11.3.7 The secondary terminal shall be brought out to a separate terminal box, complete
with protection mcb with auxiliary contact for indication, alarm and distance
protection input.
3.11.4 RATINGS
The voltage transformer shall be capable of continuously carrying 50% burden above the
rated capacity without damage.
The rating of the voltage transformer shall be as indicated herein:-
Rated primary voltage 33000/√3 volts

Rated secondary voltage 110/√3 volts
Rated frequency 50 Hz
Minimum creepage distance of insulator 990mm
Lightning impulse withstand voltage 210kV at 1500m above sea level
Power frequency withstand voltage 95kV
Rated burden 100 VA
Rated voltage factor 1.5 for 30 seconds (1.2 continuous)
Accuracy class 1.0
No. secondary out put 2. (metering, protection)
3.11.5 MARKING
The voltage transformer shall be fitted with a rating plate indicating the following:-

· The voltage transformer serial number or designation.
· The rated primary and secondary voltage.
· The burden and accuracy class of each secondary output.
· The rated voltage factor and corresponding rated time.
The marking shall be in accordance with IEC 186.
3.11.6 TEST

3.11.7 REFERENCES
precedence.
IEC 186: Voltage transformers.
BS 3941: Specification for voltage transformers.

3.12 33 KV CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
3.12.1 SCOPE
3.12.1.1 This specification is for current transformers for use with electrical instruments and
electrical protective devices on systems with maximum operating voltage of 36kV.
3.12.2 System Characteristics
The current transformer will be connected to overhead system operating at a nominal voltage
of 33 kV and maximum voltage of 36kV.
3.12.3 CONSTRUCTION
3.12.3.1 The current transformer shall be outdoor, oil-filled, hermetically sealed and shall
3.12.3.2 The current transformer shall be suitable for vertical installation on steel structure.
3.12.3.3 The porcelain portion of the current transformer shall be made of high-grade brown-
glazed porcelain. All external ferrous portions shall be hot-dip galvanized.
3.12.3.4 The current transformer shall have primary, secondary and earth terminals.
The primary terminal shall be tin-plated, suitable for both copper and aluminium
connectors.
The secondary terminal shall be covered with removable plate. The terminal box
shall be capable of accommodating up to 12 secondary terminals suitable for
conductor of up to 3.0mm diameter.

3.12.3.5 The current transformer shall have four cores. The protection cores shall be
suitable for conventional overcurrent requirements and for true transformation
of the fully asymmetrical fault currents.
Measuring cores shall have high accuracy (low loss) and low saturation levels.
3.12.4 RATINGS
3.12.4.1 The short circuit rating of the current transformers shall be 25kA.
The current transformers shall be capable of passing rated primary current without
damage with the secondary open circuited.
3.12.4.2 The rating of the current transformers shall be as indicated herein:-
800/400/200
Rated primary current (Amps)
Rated secondary current 1 AMP
Rated frequency 50Hz
Minimum Creepage distance of insulator 990 mm
Lightning impulse withstand voltage 210kV
Power frequency withstand voltage 95kV
Rated burden and accuracy class
Core No. 2 20VA, 0.2
Core No. 3 20VA, X
3.12.4.3 The knee point voltage shall not be less than 250 volts at 8mA.
3.12.5 MARKING
3.12.5.1 The current transformers shall be fitted with a rating plate indicating the following:-
· The current transformer serial number or designation.
· The primary and secondary currents.
· The output and accuracy class of the cores.

The marking shall consist of letters followed by numbers.
The letters shall be in block capitals.
3.12.6 TESTS
3.12.7 REFERENCES
The following documents were referred to during the preparation of this specification,
and may be referred to. In case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall
take precedence.
IEC 185: Current Transformers.
BS 3938: Specification for current transformers.

3.13 33 KV SURGE ARRESTERS:
3.13.1 SCOPE
3.13.1.1 This specification is for 33kV metal-oxide type surge arresters without spark gaps
for a.c. system.
3.13.2 CONSTRUCTION
3.13.2.1 The surge arrester shall be metal-oxide type without spark gaps and constructor as
per the requirement of IEC 99-4.
3.13.2.2 The metal-oxide used shall be of quality to ensure thermal stability under service
duty of the surge arrester.
3.13.2.3 The completed surge arrester shall be housed in a silicone rubber. The silicone
rubber insulator shall be dimensioned to provide a leak free interface with the end
caps. The housing shall withstand the lighting impulse voltage of the arrester.
3.13.2.4 The surge arrester shall be sealed (end caps) with a controlled permanent seal to
ensure no moisture absorption or deterioration of the metal-oxide element for the
surge arrester.

3.13.2.5 The surge arrester shall be supplied with fixing accessories and fitted with pad type
clamp connectors suitable for both copper and aluminium tubes of up to 76.2mm
diameter.
The steel plates or straps shall be galvanized as per the requirement of BS 729.
The mounting brackets shall be suitable for both horizontal and vertical mounting on
a steel channel.
3.13.3.1 RATING
3.13.3.1 The rating of the surge arrester shall be as indicated herein:-
Rated Voltage………………………………. 27 kV
Nominal discharge current………………….. 10 kA
Long duration discharge class………………. 2
Creepage distance of insulator……………… 990 mm
Continuous operating voltage………………. 19 kV
Rated frequency……..................................... 50 Hz
Power frequency withstand ........................... 95kV
Insulation level of housing ............................. 210kV
3.13.4 MARKING
§ The current transformers shall be fitted with a rating plate indicating the
following:-
· The surge arrester serial number or designation.
· The nominal discharge current.
· The continuous operating voltage
· The rated voltage
§ The rated frequency.
3.13.5 TESTS
3.13.5.1 Type, routine and acceptance tests shall be carried out as per the requirement
of IEC 99-4.

3.13.6 REFERENCES
3.13.6.1 The following documents were referred to during the preparation of this
specification. In case of conflict, the provision of this specification shall take
precedence.
IEC 99: Surge Arrester.

Part 4: Metal-oxide surge arresters without gaps for a.c. systems.
IEEE Std.: C62.22 – 1991

IEEE Guide for application of metal-oxide surge arresters for
alternating – current systems.

3.14 CONTROL, MEASURING AND PROTECTIVE RELAYING EQUIPMENT
3.14.1 SCOPE
This subsection covers the design, detailing, manufacture testing before shipments, packing,
transport to site, erection and tests at the site of the following equipment:
Set of Protective relays, controls and accessories for 132kV switchgear
3.14.2 Requirements for Design
The equipment for the control system shall be highly reliable, durable and suitable for
continuous operation.
The equipment shall be designed to be fail – safe for the possible failure of any major circuit
during the operation and shall provide a safe guard against possible surges, fail – safe against
disrupted surges against disrupted signals due to outside interference that would normally be
associated with the cable communication lines and any other provisions necessary for the
efficient operation of the equipment.
All instrument scales, coils, relay contacts and other features shall be suitable for the
apparatus controlled or the purpose intended.
The control and relay panels provided under this subsection shall be located in the control
rooms of the substation.

It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to properly design the electrical control, protective
relaying, alarm and indication schemes related to all equipment to be provided under this
contract and to co-ordinate with the existing control and relaying system.
The Contractor shall prepare arrangement and detailed drawings, equipment lists and wiring
diagrams based on the requirements for meters, relays, control switches, indicating lamps and
other devices including those to be supplied under other subsections.
3.14.3 Protection and Alarm
General
Protection against electrical faults and abnormal conditions on 132kV switchgear shall be
conducted by the protective relays and switches.
3.15 ELECTRICAL PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND PANELS
3.15.1 General
The electrical Measuring protective relays for the 132 kV line shall be of Numeric Design
type suitable for operation with the current transformer secondary of 1A and the voltage
transformer secondary of 110V, as shown on the single line diagrams.
Auxiliary relays of Static or ELECTROMECHANICAL DESIGN are acceptable.
The protective relays and their auxiliary relays shall operate successfully for any value of the
DC supply voltage between 85% and 120% of the rated voltage of 110V without exceeding
the temperature rise limits for the operating coils.
The protective relays and necessary auxiliaries shall be housed in the metal – enclosed
cubicle.
Each protective relay shall be of the flush mounted, back connected, dustproof switch board
type with rectangular case. Each relay shall have a removable transparent cover or cover
with a transparent window, with provision for sealing. It is preferred that each measuring
relay shall be of a withdrawable type from the front of the panel with sliding contacts,
without opening the current transformer secondary circuits, disturbing external circuits or
requiring disconnection of leads on the rear of the panels. Each protective relay shall be
equipped with a red operation indicator and contacts for operation on 110volt DC for each
phase, and external, front operated, manual-resetting device.
Each protective relay shall be equipped with adequate electrically independent contacts of
adequate rating for trip and alarm functions. Test facilities shall be provided as an integral
part of each protective Switchgear relay panel for testing of current and voltage transformer
secondary circuits and trip circuit using secondary injection test equipment.
3.16 DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS FOR RELAYS, ENERGY METER, TRIP

BATTERY & CHARGER.
These specifications indicate the required performance characteristics.

3.16.1 PROTECTION RELAYS.
This must satisfy the requirements for distance, Three Phase Overcurrent and Earth Fault
Relay, Sensitive Earth Fault Relay and Autoreclose Relay facilities.
NB: See detailed specifications for each of the above protection functions, below.
Restricted Earth fault relay

· Relay must be of Numerical type
· Relay should reject harmonics produced by C.T saturation
· The offer should include the associated stabilising resistor and voltage dependent
resistor (metrosil)
· Current setting range 0.05-0.8In
· Operating time < 25ms at 5 times the setting
Three phase overcurrent and earth fault relay

Should incorporate the following Features;
· Relay must be of Numerical Type
· Current setting range for overcurrent relay 0.5In-2.4In
· Current setting range for earth fault relay 0.05In-0.8In
· I.D.M.T characteristics according to BS142 or IEC255 i.e. SI,VI,EI,LTI, including
definite time for the high-set Elements.
· Time setting multiplier 0.05 - 1.0
· Broken conductor protection feature
· Negative sequence Protection Feature
· High set Element for both overcurrent and earth fault
· Protection, with a setting range of 1-30In.
· Thermal Protection
· Dedicated Breaker Fail Protection.
· Circuit Breaker Maintenance
· Fault records, Event Records and disturbance records.
· Configurable output relays with ability to output starting elements to control Tripping
of other upstream Protection relays.
· Drop off /pickup ratio >90%
· Low transient overreach < 10%
Earth Fault Relay.

· Current setting range 0.05In-0.8In
· I.D.M.T characteristics according to BS142 or IEC255 i.e. SI,VI,EI,LTI, including
definite time for the high-set Elements.
· Highset Element with a setting range of 1-30In.


Sensitive Earth Fault Relay.

· Current setting range for earth fault relay 0.005In- 0.8In
· Definite time delay characteristic; setting range, 0- 30 Seconds.
Three- Phase Directional Overcurrent and Earth Fault Relay.

· Relay must be of Numerical design.
· Current setting range for overcurrent relay 0.5In-2.4In
· Current setting range for earth fault relay 0.05In-0.8In
· Quadrature connection for polarising voltage (Vn=110)
· Applicable on the LV side of a Dyn1 transformer
· High set Element, with a setting range of 1-32In
· The phase and earth directional elements should be individually selectable.
· I.D.M.T characteristics according to BS 142 or IEC 255 and Definite time
characteristic
· The normal operating boundary shall be +/-90 degrees from relay characteristic angle
Relay sensitivity should be 1% of rated value of current and current polarising voltage
at an angle equal to the relay characteristic angle.
· Broken conductor protection feature
· Negative sequence Protection Feature
· Highset Element for both overcurrent and earth fault Protection, with a setting range
of 1-30In.
· Thermal Protection.
· Dedicated Breaker Fail Protection.
· Incorporate Fault records, Event Records and disturbance records.
Trip relay
· High burden tripping relay, immune to capacitance discharge currents and leakage
currents
· At least 8 pairs of outputs contacts two of which should be normally closed (NC)
contacts
· Instantaneous operation, t <12ms

· Flag or target should be a red L.E.D or bulb and should be electrically reset
Trip circuit supervision Relay

· The relay should have the following features
· Continuous supervision of trip circuit for circuit breaker in both OPEN& CLOSE
position
· Trip circuit fail - Red L.E.D
· Trip Circuit Healthy – Green L.E.D
· Contacts should be available to wired for annunciation and scada
· Two normally closed and three normally open output contacts
· NB: The relay L.E.Ds should be visible from the front of the panel without opening
the panel door(s).
Annunciator unit
· Should have Silence, Accept and Reset
· Accommodate 18 alarm Elements
· Relay output for audible alarm and self supervision
· Integrated event register to provide analysis of the latest five (5) events
Discrepancy switch for circuit breaker control

· At least 2 pairs of contacts for CB closing
· At least 2 pairs of contacts for CB tripping
· For operation up to 110 V dc
Semaphore for isolator and earth switch position indication

· Preferably with Red L.E.D for ON indication and Green L.E.D for OFF Indication.
Autoreclose relay
· For 132 kV Line

· Selectable 1 - 3 autoreclose shots
· Independent set dead time for each shot
· Autoreclose inhibit after manual close
· Separate input for overcurrent high set element and I.D.M.T element
· Autoreclose inhibition for over current high set element.
· Synchro-check facility and single pole autoreclose and delayed autoreclose facility.
Transducers:
· MW Transducer:
· Connection shall be 3-Phase 3or 4-Wire
· Inputs 110V AC and 1Amp
· Output shall be 0 - +/- 20 mA
· Auxiliary power supply shall be 110 V AC, separately connected.
· MVAr Transducer:
· Connection shall be 3-Phase 3 or 4-Wire

· Inputs 110V AC and 1Amp

· Output shall be 0 - +/- 20 mA
· Auxiliary power supply shall be 110 V AC, separately connected.
· Current Transducer:
· Input 0- 1Amp
· Output 0 – 20 mA
· Auxiliary power supply shall be 110 V AC
· iv)Voltage Transducer:
· Input 0- 110 Volts
· Output 0 – 20 mA
Auxiliary power supply shall be 110 V AC, separately connected.
Distance Protection Relay (132kV line)

· Ratings: AC Inputs: 110v, 1 Amp (three phase) Power Supply Voltage range 80-260
VDC.
· The relays shall be of Numeric Design
· Under Impedance Starting criteria.
· Three zones phase – phase protection Mho/Quadrilateral characteristics.
· Three zones phase – earth protection, Mho/Quadrilateral characteristics with residual
current compensation.
· Additional Zone 4 Protection
· Automatic Zone 4 protection
· Permissive under-reach and permissive overreach tele-protection features.
· Automatic switch on to Fault Feature.
· Independent settings for each zone.
· Distance to fault measurement, with the display on the Relay LCD Screen, where the
distance can be read/seen by the system Operator.
· Display of Fault details on the LCD such as Fault Loop or Faulty phases, the Zone,
and the Relay Operate time.
· Power Swing detection Feature which can optionally be enabled or blocked.
· Scheme communication logic with Permissive and Blocking Inter-tripping Schemes.
· Back up IDMT Three phase/overcurrent & Earth fault Protection
· Fuse failure supervision Logic
· Auto-reclose logic 1 and/or 3 phases
· Voltage Memory Feature
· Disturbance and event records including software for disturbance analysis.
· Event and Trip record should be incorporated.
· At least six (6) Binary inputs.
· Mho/Quadrilateral characteristics.
· Stability against switching inrush currents and reverse faults.
· Clear faulted phase indication.
· Clear fault identification even for boundary conditions.
· Software for Programming the configuration and Relay Settings and also
downloading and analyzing the Relay Data.

· Three sets of Installation, Commissioning, Operation and Maintenance manuals shall

be provided.
Breaker Failure Protection Relay

The breaker fail protection relay should have the following features:
· Numeric design
· Circuit –breaker failure protection, single or three pole with or without current
· Three phase overcurrent detectors.
· Earth fault detector.
· 2 out of 4 check of current detectors
· Independently settable delay times for operation with and without current
· “No current” condition control using the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
· Two stage delay, hence two stages of operation
· Trip command input.
· Necessary logic to determine breaker fail condition.
· Operator keypad with display
· Display of line measured current values
· Serial Interface
· Annunciation and storage of previous events.
· Self monitoring
· Pole discrepancy
· Flush mounting
· LEDs to show phase and stage of operation.
Biased Differential protection for a two winding transformer
This should incorporate the following Features;

· Relay Must be of Numerical design
· Pick up setting range, 0.1 to 0.5In
· Should incorporate a high-set Element with a setting range of up to 20In.
· Magnetising current inrush restraint
· Integral CT ratio compensation(0.1-2) and vector group compensation
· Measurement and indication on the MMI, of phase (HV&LV) ,differential and
bias currents.
· Storage of Fault records and Event records; the Fault flags should be accessible
on the relay LCD screen without opening the relay cover.
· Separate function that performs ovefluxing protection with alarm and trip
functions.
· 5th harmonic restraint feature on the differential Element.
· Appropriate Dual Bias characteristic to ensure relay stability for heavy through
faults
· Should incorporate a disturbance recorder feature.
· Red L.E.D to indicate Tripping
· Relay Self diagnostic and Alarm feature
· Ability to Latch output contacts to prevent Transformer re-energisation before
carrying out investigations.

Other specifications
i) TESTING FACILITIES
Separate Test facilities for each AC current, voltage and voltage transformer
secondary circuit so as to give access for testing of each protective relay and its
associated circuits. This may consist of either test terminals blocks for the front of the
panel mounting with automatic short circuiting of the current secondary by means
of movement of links from their normal operating position, or a relay test block
mounted adjacent to each or any other suitable testing arrangement.
Each current transformer circuit shall be earthed through a removable link at one
point only. The common Protection trip and Alarm circuit for each Panel shall be
provided with an isolation link to facilitate Testing and Breakdown Maintenance.
ii) RELAYS
All measurement relays must be of Numeric design. Static relays can be offered
where there are no equivalent relays of Numeric design.
Electromechanical relays are acceptable only for use as Auxiliary relays and
contactors, NOT as Measuring Relays.
Relays contacts shall be suitable for making and breaking the maximum currents,
which they may be required to control in normal service. Where contacts of the
protective relays are unable to deal directly with the tripping currents, Auxiliary Trip
relays shall be provided.
Relays contacts shall make firmly without bounce and the whole of the relay
mechanism shall be as far as possible unaffected by vibration or external magnetic
fields.
Relays shall be provided with clearly inscribed labels describing their application
and to include the (IEC) Device Function number. To minimize the effects of
electrolysis, relay coils operating on DC shall be so connected that the coils are
not continuously connected from the positive pole of the battery. Relays shall be
suitable for operating on the station 110V DC supply without the use of dropping
resistors or diodes.
The relay thermal rating should be such that the fault current clearance times on any
combination of current and time multiplier setting shall not exceed the thermal
withstand capability of the relay (Maximum Fault current=25 kA)
The relays must be IEC 60255 and EMC 89/336/EEC compliant.
iii) RELAY PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE AND CONNECTION CABLES:

Software must be provided for Programming and downloading Data for all Numerical
Relays supplied. The software Users Guide shall also be supplied. The Numerical
Relays will be equipped with an RS232 Communication Port on the front to
facilitate connection to a Laptop. There shall be two extra ports on the back for
communication to regional control and National control independently. The
relevant communication cable, between the Relay and the Laptop shall also be
provided (3 cables). Also communication facilities shall be provided on each
Numerical Relay for Remote Interrogation and Programming of the Numerical
Relays. The Relays will also have an MMI to facilitate manual Relay programming

and Data access. Relay Operation due to system fault, shall be indicated by a Red
L.E.D. and the fault details (flags) shall be displayed on the MMI. Both the Relay
Fault flags and Red L.E.D will be reset without opening the Relay Cover.
3.16.2 Control
Any computer solution proposed shall be based on hardware and software well proven in HV
installations. All data storage media shall be checked for internal faults and virus before
delivery. All data and parameters specified to the individual distributed control units, shall be
stored in a non-volatile memory so no local logic or information will be lost due to power
supply failure.
Remote and Local Control

The substations shall be provided with a microprocessor based substation control and
signalling system (SCS). The system shall accommodate control, data acquisition, alarm
handling and trend analysis. The figure below illustrates the main principles. However, the
Employer wants to keep a conventional back up control facility with indication at bay level
(local control). I.e. control of motorised breakers and switches, status indication of all
breakers and switches, analogue or digital indication of measurands (I and Imax all phases,
MW and MVAr) and alarm annunciation shall be presented by discrete components.
The control of high and medium voltage circuit breakers, isolating switches and tap changers
shall take place in a hierarchy with four levels as described in Project Specific Data Section.
From each level one may block access from higher levels.The control units shall take
auxiliary voltage form the station battery and be equipped with self-supervision systems
giving alarm by internal faults.
The system shall be fail-safe keeping all equipment in the last status by loss of
communication to higher systems.
The system shall be of the state-of-art based on IEC 61850 for operation under electrical
conditions present in high-voltage substations, follow the latest engineering practice, and
ensure long-term compatibility requirements and continuity of equipment supply and the
safety of the operating staff.
Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a shut-down of the whole
substation automation system. Self-monitoring of single components, modules and communication
shall be incorporated to increase the availability and the reliability of the equipment and minimize
maintenance.
For safety and availability reasons the Substation Automation System shall be based on a
decentralized architecture and on a concept of bay-oriented, distributed intelligence.
Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as close as possible to the

process. The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed databases.
The typical SA layout shall be structured in two levels, i.e. in a station and a bay level.
To provide highest reliability the station HMI and the gateways shall work completely
independent meaning retrieving the process data directly from the bay level devices.

Additionally the gateway and the station HMI shall be configured fully redundant to ensure
full functionality in case of single point of failure.
The data concentrator and the station computer shall be connected to a redundant LAN.
Simplified Station Supervisory Control

Control RCC/NCC
(PC or Lap -Top) Data Concentrator
Communication Protocol:
IEC 870 -5-101
Communication Network. IEC 60870 -5-101
Control and relay panel/

Instrument Section
Local Control Unit Local Control Unit Local Control Unit Local Control Unit
Protection Protection Protection Protection
Cables Separate Control &

Protection
Primary Components Primary Components Primary Components Primary Components

- Transformers -Circuit Breakers - Circuit Breakers - Transformers
- OLTC - Disconectors - Disconectors - OLTC
- Circuit Breakers - Earth Switches - Earth Switches - Circuit Breakers
- Disconnectors - Measuring Transformers - Measuring Transformers - Disconnectors
- Earth S witches - Earth Switches
- Measuring tranformators Line 1 Line 2 - Measuring tranformators
Combined Control &
Transformer 1 Transformer 2
Protection
Micro Processor Based Control System, Architecture (Two alternatives)
3.16.3 Control Stations
Distributed Control Units

Outdoor switchgear shall have a control and relay panel in the control room with facilities for
Local Control. The local control for indoor breakers can be located in the instrument cabinet.
The protection and control functions can also be combined in one unit. Signals from
protection equipment can alternatively be hardwired to bay control unit.
The bay control unit shall handle position indications from circuit breakers, disconnectors,
earthing switches and transformer tap changer. It shall control closing and opening of circuit
breakers and receive time tag, store and display alarms and measurements.
The position indication from the on load tap changer shall be taken from a potentiometer
switch supplied and mounted on the transformer.

The alarm handling capacity must be sufficient to handle all normal alarms from the
switchgear, the protection, the transformer and the tap changer.
All commands from the remote and supervisory control can be given to bay control unit, which
execute the commands. Conventional interlocks should be retained.
All microprocessor based control equipment such as bay control units shall be galvanic ally
isolated from the environments outside panels, using opto couplers or interposing relays for
signals, galvanic isolated measuring transducers for measurements and relays or contactors for
commands.
All data and parameters specified to the individual distributed control units, shall be stored in a
non-volatile memory so no local logic or information will be lost due to power supply failure.
Editing and input of local data and parameters shall be performed locally by suitable
programming equipment to be included in the supply. Preferably it should also be possible to
edit any such local data at higher control level and download this information.
Interface with Supervisory Control and Data Facilities

In order to interface and achieve the desired functionality of the SCADA/EMS system, it
should be noted that data concentrators in substations shall be based on standard IEC 60870-
5-101 protocol. It should be noted that the following SCADA facilities shall be available
from the substation.
· Supervisory control of all circuit breakers and motorized line and bus bar
isolators. Remote control of on-load tap changers.
· Status Indications of all circuit breakers, isolators, positions of on-load tap
changers and ‘local/remote’, ‘Automatic/ Manual’, Main/Follower mode of
automatic voltage regulators where applicable. These shall be reported by
exception, but system shall allow scan by demand.
· Alarms; Bay alarms, Transformer alarms, Bus bar alarms, station alarms and
warning shall be collected by the SCADA.
· Measurements; bus bar voltages, frequency active & reactive power, 30, 48 &
110 V DC voltages and line currents.
· Energy measurements, this shall be at interconnection points and feeders.
Where data concentrators will capture and process data for transmission to the control centres
it is expected that the following functions shall be provided:
· Single command outputs, double command outputs for supervisory (on/off)
control of circuit breakers, isolators etc with check-before-execute function.
· Regulation command outputs e.g. raise/lower command outputs for transformer
tap changer control and set point transmission with validity check before
execution.
· Single and double state digital inputs. Each status (open/closed) of two state
devices such as circuit breakers or isolator position should be acquired
independent from each other and checked for validity. Undefined states like open
and closed or neither open nor closed shall be alarmed with run-time monitoring
adapted to the HV equipment operation parameters.
· Transformer tap changer position indication should be processed as coded
signals, by digital measurement input modules.

· Analogue measured inputs with pre-processing including validity check, local

limit supervision and measurement transmission on exception (only if a
significant individually selectable change occurs).
· Measurement transmission with a resolution of at least 10 bit plus sign as this is
the most economical way to increase the overall accuracy of the measurements.
· Metering pulse inputs for acquisition of energy values with internal storage to
allow cyclic acquisition of meter readings.
· Sequential event recording with time stamping of events (time stamp 10ms,
resolution 1 ms)
· Selectable priority levels for data acquisition to speed up the acquisition of circuit
breaker status changes and important measurements.
The Contractor shall as part of his supply fill in I/O lists for each substation on the format
specified by the SCADA supplier. The I/O lists will comprise the name tag, address tag
(fitted to the SCADA Contractor's system of addressing the information), ASDU type in
accordance with the agreed interoperability list and other information as required.
Protocols
The Station Controller shall be set up for communication with the Control Centre over a
serial interface with protocol IEC 60870-5-101 and network interface with protocol IEC
60870-5-101. Switching between the two must be allowed for at any time by changing
software parameters.
An international open and defined User Convention must be used (e.g. “Norwegian User
Convention or similar) and the Contractor shall inform on which convention he intends to
use.
Internally between bay controllers and station controller the Contractor may use an open (not
proprietary) protocol of his own choice. However, the station controller must be able to
receive and transmit information from future extensions on an IEC 60870-5-101 protocol.
Communication
All communication between bay units and between bay units and station
controller/workstation shall be on a bus structure, preferably by fibre optic cable.
Indicating and Metering Instruments and Metering Transducers (if used)

Remote indication of measurands shall take place on the station controller’s VDU. Local
instruments are used they shall be of the dial type which is easily legible, with black
graduations and numerals on a white background. The instruments shall have a dimension of 96
x 96 mm. The error of the instruments shall be maximum 1.5% reckoned on the total length of
the scale. All instruments shall be of a narrow frame type.
Preferably the measurements shall be performed directly in the SCS or in the protection
relays. However, if needed, the metering transducers (converters) shall be installed in the
boards and shall be suitable for connection to the potential and current transformers. The
cases shall be hermetically sealed against moisture and dust. Transducer output shall be an
impressed DC current of 0-10 mA output. The maximum meter reading at the receiving end
shall be equivalent to 30% overload of the source value. The permitted resistive load shall be
at least 1000 ohms. The accuracy class shall be minimum 1%. The auxiliary voltage, if
required (preferably not) shall be 110 V or 30 V DC.

The W and VAr measurements shall be of the three-element (three-wattmeter) type when
connected to primary systems with grounded neutral. W and VAr measurements for
transmission lines, shall be such that the direction of the power flow is indicated by negative
direction towards the substation and positive direction out of the substation. The voltage shall
be measured phase-phase voltage, one reading is sufficient.
The scale on the different types of instruments shall be proposed by the Contractor and be
subject to approval by the Project Manager.
Programming and Fault Finding

Editing and input of local data and parameters shall be performed locally by suitable
programming equipment to be included in the supply. Preferably it should also be possible to
edit any such local data at higher control level and download this information.
The programming equipment shall also be suitable for fault diagnostic.
3.16.4 THE ENERGY METER
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CLASS 0.2S ELECTRONIC ENERGY METERS
1. The meters shall conform fully to IEC 687 for class 0.2S Energy Meters and any other
relevant specifications.
2. The meters shall be programmable and relevant software and connection cable to laptop
shall be provided. Meters complying with IEC 61334-4-4-1(DLMS Standard protocol)
shall be preferred.
3. The meters shall have memory and be capable of storage of at least 12 months load
profile and other data.
4. The meters shall be capable of bi-directional metering so as to record faithfully, both

export and import quantities. The accuracy shall be as per IEC 687 in both directions.
5. The quantities to be displayed shall be determined by the user through use of software
that shall be provided. The meters shall be configurable for use in three phase 3 /4-wire
networks systems as follows:-
3x240/415 V, 10 (100) A
3x240/415 V, /5 (1) A
3x /110V, /5 (1) A
6. The meters shall be usable on phase voltages of magnitudes ranging from 100V to 500V,
50 Hz. Meters shall be with voltage-surge protection that meets IEC 687 specifications.
7. The meters shall be for flush panel mounting.
8. The meters shall have a non-volatile memory so as to ensure no loss of data during power
failures. Security passwords and switches shall be provided to prevent unauthorized
programming of the meter.

9. The meters shall be suitable for operation in any part of the Republic of Kenya where the
climate varies largely from temperatures between -5 and 40 Degrees Celsius and relative
humidity reaching 95% in some parts. Operating altitudes ranging from sea level to 2200
metres above sea level.
10. The meters shall support multi-tariff metering.
11. The Meters shall incorporate instrumentation for the following measurands:
MW, MVAR, MVA, p.f., Phase Currents, Phase voltages and the angle between
individual Phase Voltage and corresponding phase current. This measurands shall be
visible on the Meter display.
12. The meters MUST have a capability of freezing billing readings on any selected date of
the month.
13. The meters will measure maximum demand for MW, MVAR and MVA and these will be
accessible on the Meter display. The Demand integration period will be programmable.
14. The CT and VT ratios shall be programmable.
15. The meters shall have an accurate internal quartz controlled clock. It should be possible to
reset the clock without loss of billing data.
16. The supplier shall show proof of ISO 9000 and ISO 14000 standards compliance.
17. The meters shall be provided with adequate sealing facilities to prevent tampering.
18. The nameplate and meter details shall be clearly marked using materials and colours that
are durable and indelible.
19. In addition to requirements of IEC 687 the name-plate shall carry the following
particulars :
(a) The inscription “The property of K.P.L.Co. LTD.”

(b) Owner’s serial numbers as directed with a minimum 5mm figure height.
(c) Year of manufacture.
20. The meter base cover shall be of non-metallic, non-hygroscopic, flame retardant, polished
material having high impact-resilience and low dirt absorption properties.
The front cover may be of translucent material with a clear transparent front.
21. The meter shall have a minimum of three sealing - provisions for the meter body, terminal
cover and front cover (where applicable).
22. The meter terminal cover shall be the normal short length with provisions of easy bottom
breakage for cable entry. The terminals shall be of bottom entry, and the arrangement
shall be:-
L1 L 1: L2 L2: L3 L3: N or
I1 V1 I1: I2 V2 I2: I3 V3 I3: N

23. The accuracy shall be Class 0.2
25 The meter errors shall comply with the requirement IEC 687 and shall be adjusted at the
manufacturer’s works to be within 0.2% between low and high load and shall exhibit
good stability.
26 The meter shall have a warranty against any defects, which may develop due to faulty
material, calibration, transportation or workmanship for a period of not less than eighteen
months from the date of delivery. All defective meters shall be replaced at the supplier’s
cost.
27 The following drawings and information shall be required with the tender:
(a) Meter drawing giving all the relevant dimensions.
(b) Wiring diagrams.
(c) Description leaflet including details of programming of the meters
(d) User’s and service manuals.
3.16.5 BATTERIES & CHARGER (110 & 48 Volts)
I) PROTECTION AND CONTROL BATTERIES.

The Batteries should be Valve Regulated maintenance free with the following Specs:
1. Capacity 400 Ah at 10 hour discharge rate to 1.85V minimum @20 oC.

2. Cells should be complete with all corrosive resistant terminals, links fasteners and
terminal covers and cell record book and labels. Terminals also clearly indicated
positive (+) and negative (-). Specifications data are to be attached to each cell.
3. 2.0 Volts nominal voltage per unit
4. Cells should be capable of delivering 100% capacity at 20oC.
5. Container need not to be transparent.
6. Each cell should be of robust construction all round, having fire and mechanical shock
resistant lid/cover assembly.
7. Documentary evidence of the Design Service life at 20oC of the batteries must be
attached. Those under 12 years service life will not be considered.
8. All cells of a bank should be of the same dimensions, weight, make, voltage and
ampere hour capacity.
9. The Batteries to be used for protection and control in power stations whose standby
requirement is 10 hours minimum.
10. The chargers to be used with the batteries are constant potential chargers.
11. Supply should be accompanied by a set of detailed instruction manual on
maintenance, Design and operation in English and should include any special
instructions. The manuals to include operational curves and data limits.
12. The Units should have low internal resistance which should be indicated in the
manuals.
13. The batteries should have low gas emission whose volume should be indicated in the
manual.
14. A list of previous supply to power utilities with quantities for the same battery
function should be included in the tender as documentary proof.

II). BATTERY CHARGER 110 VOLTS
Type
Automatic constant voltage float/boost battery charger
Input
i. Input Voltage – 240V Single phase +/- 13%
ii. Frequency – 50 Hz +/- 5%.
DC Output
i. Nominal – 110V
ii. Current – 75A min.
iii. Float setting – 129V
iv. Boost setting – 156V
DC Output Voltage Regulation (RMS)

i. Float mode: +/- 1%
ii. Boost mode: +1%; -4%
iii. For 0- 100% full load and within the input supply limits
iv. 7% of the battery capacity
Operation
i. Altitude: 0 – 1500m a.s.l
ii. Temperature: 0 to 40 oC
iii. Humidity: 20 – 90%
iv. Natural air convection
Fault Protection
i. AC mains input MCB
ii. DC output fuse for reverse polarity protection
iii. Automatic current-limiting into load fault condition
Current Limit
i. Set at 100% of full load current
Instruments
i. DIN 72 flush mounting DC output ammeter scaled 0 – 75A
ii. DIN 72 flush mounting DC voltmeter scaled 0 – 160V
iii. DIN 72 flush mounting AC voltmeter scale 0 – 250 V
Controls
i. Illuminated AC on/off mains input MCB fitted on the front panel
ii. Manual float/boost selection switch fitted on the front panel
iii. Alarm cancellation push button
Alarms
i. Mains failure
ii. DC failure
iii. Positive E/fault
iv. Negative E/fault

v. All the above to have LED indication fitted on the front panel
Distribution
i. At least 4 pairs of unfused terminals for the protection circuits.
General
i. The charger should be of free standing type
ii. Technical specifications data, and detailed instruction manual on erection,
commissioning, operation, maintenance, trouble shooting, spares catalogue and including
any special instructions shall be provided. The manual must be in English.
III) BATTERY CHARGER 48 VOLTS
Type
Automatic constant voltage float/boost battery charger
Input
iii. Input Voltage – 240V Single phase +/- 13%
iv. Frequency – 50 Hz +/- 5%.
DC Output
i. Nominal – 48V
ii. Current – 45A min.
iii. Float setting – 54V
iv. Boost setting – 60V
DC Output Voltage Regulation (RMS)

i. Float mode: +/- 1%
ii. Boost mode: +1%; -4%
iii. For 0- 100% full load and within the input supply limits
iv. 7% of the battery capacity
Operation
i. Altitude: 0 – 1500m a.s.l
ii. Temperature: 0 to 40 oC
iii. Humidity: 20 – 90%
iv. Natural air convection
Fault Protection
i. AC mains input MCB
ii. DC output fuse for reverse polarity protection
iii. Automatic current-limiting into load fault condition
Current Limit
i. Set at 100% of full load current
Instruments
i. DIN 72 flush mounting DC output ammeter scaled 0 – 55A
ii. DIN 72 flush mounting DC voltmeter scaled 0 – 75V
iii. DIN 72 flush mounting AC voltmeter scale 0 – 250 V

Controls
i. Illuminated AC on/off mains input MCB fitted on the front panel
ii. Manual float/boost selection switch fitted on the front panel
iii. Alarm cancellation push button
Alarms
i. Mains failure
ii. DC failure
iii. Positive E/fault
iv. Negative E/fault
v. All the above to have LED indication fitted o the front panel
Distribution
i. At least 4 pairs of unfused terminals for the communication circuits.
General
iii. The charger should be of free standing type
iv. Technical specifications data, and detailed instruction manual on erection,
commissioning, operation, maintenance, trouble shooting, spares catalogue and including
any special instructions should be provided. The manual must be in English.

3.17 TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT
It is proposed to have a 48 fibre OPGW on the line its associated Terminal equipment, RTU
for SCADA and a telephone extension.
3.17.1 OPGW, COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT AND SCADA REQUIREMENTS
The Scope will include Supply and Installation of communications, telephones, tele-
protection and SCADA equipment for the efficient supervision, control, operation and
maintenance of the transmission system.
3.17.2 SCOPE OF WORK
The Scope will include Supply and Installation of communications, telephones, tele-
protection and SCADA equipment for the efficient supervision, control, operation and
maintenance of the transmission system. Optical fibre communication link with its associated
terminal equipment is required from the tee off at Sagana to the new Kutus Substation. At
Masinga the signals from the terminal equipment shall be integrated into the existing
communication System to the National Control Center.
The contractor shall include detailed system design, manufacture, supply, installation, testing,
commissioning, remedying of defects, maintaining the works during the defects liability

period and any incidental work necessary for the proper completion of the work in
accordance with this contract.
FATs shall be carried out for fibre, OLTE and RTU as per cls 1.24. Training shall be carried
out for RTU and SDH equipment.
Detailed requirements are as follows:-
System design – The system design and preparation of contractor's drawings to approval of
the Engineer
Supply and installation of fibre optic lead-in cables including mounting hardware and
splicing.
Supply and installation of lead in cables to the equipment terminals
Supply and installation of fibre optic terminal and multiplexing
Supply and installation of supervisory management system and cabling to the relevant
distribution frame(s)
Supply and installation of DC power supplies to the new substation.
Factory testing of the terminal equipment and supervisory prior to delivery.
Testing and commissioning of the systems up to the terminal equipment and integration to
existing SCADA system. The OLTEs shall be incorporated in the existing network
management system.
Multiplexed signals for permissive and direct inter-trips for the 132 circuits
3.17.3 OPTICAL GROUND WIRE (OPGW)

The transmission line earth wire integrating optical fibres shall be of design and construction
to ensure long service with high economy and low maintenance costs. It shall be suitable in
every respect for continuous operation at nominal parameters as well as in transient operating
conditions under the climatic conditions peculiar to the site.
The OPGW shall incorporate at least 48 optical fibres. The OPGW constitution shall be of
stranded aluminum-clad steel (ACS) wires or Galvanized steel wires (GS). Other OPGW types
are acceptable if the required performance characteristics are met.
All materials used shall be of the best quality and workmanship, and shall be of the highest class
throughout with the designs and dimensions of all parts such that the stresses to which the
OPGW are subjected to shall not render them liable to distortion or damage under the most
severe conditions encountered during installation as well as in service.
Special attention shall be paid to the OPGW stranding process to ensure the necessary tightness
between different layers in order to avoid slippage or relative movement of strands or cage
formation during stringing.

Stranding tolerances as well as inspection and testing shall be as per IEC 61089 as far as
applicable, and to the respective manufacturing standards.
The OPGW manufacturer shall have ISO 9000 quality assurance system certified and shall
prove a minimum experience in successful supply of similar OPGW in the last 5 years.
The OPGW installation shall include all cable fittings (tension and suspension spirals,
vibration dampers, earth connection etc.), joint boxes, termination boxes, fibre connectors
and other accessories required for a complete working fibre link.
3.17.3.1 Optical fibre parameter and performance
The OPGW, access cables and underground cables shall have at least 48 (forty-eight) single
mode optical fibres with following characteristics:
· Transmission wavelength: 1310 nm and 1550 nm
· Mode field diameter: 9.0 to 11.5 micrometers (mm), including tolerances
· Optical cladding diameter: 125 mm ± 2.4%
· Cable Attenuation: not greater than 0.38 dB/km for every fibre in every drum at optical
wavelength of 1310 nm; and not greater than 0.25 dB/km for every fibre in every drum at
optical wavelength of 1550 nm
· Joint attenuation: not greater than 0.1 dB at optical wavelength of 1310 nm and not greater
than 0.2 dB at 1550 nm for every fibre, measured on the fully installed joint
· Total dispersion: not greater than 3.5 ps/km.nm at optical wavelength of 1310 nm and not
greater than 19.0 ps/km.nm at optical wavelength of 1550 nm
· Core numerical aperture: less than 0.23
· Life span: greater than 30 years
The Contractor is required to supply a graph of attenuation versus wavelength over the range of
1200 nm to 1600 nm
No joints shall be allowed in any fibre in any drum length.
Discontinuities will be acceptable if:
· Less than 0.10 dB in magnitude measured at 1310 nm, and
· OTDR traces from both ends of the cable at 1310 and 1550 nm wavelength show a
difference of less than 0.05 dB/km for every fibre in every drum.
· Power Meter & Light source. The test shall be used to verify that the measured loss is in
average equal or less than the calculated link budget.
The Contractor shall state the refractive index of the optical fibres at 1310 nm and 1550 nm.
3.17.3.2 Splice Boxes
The OPGW shall generally be cut and jointed at angle towers, but not at all angle points. It
shall be continuously strung with OPGW sections as long as possible. At all angle points the
prescribed minimum bending radius shall be observed. If necessary, special tandem or
multiple stringing blocks have to be used for stringing the OPGW at angle points.

Bidders shall supply detailed information, including physical dimensions and weights, of
joint, gantry and termination boxes that they propose using. Joint boxes shall be used to join
sections of the OPGW together along the route.
The joint boxes shall be of the 'hood' type with encapsulated cable entry and they shall be
mounted within the framework of the transmission towers not less than 8 m above the base.
Note: All fibre jointing and testing shall be carried out at ground level, after which the
joint box shall be lifted into position and the cable loops carefully secured to the tower
members in such a manner that there is no risk of damage to the cable from persons climbing
the towers.
3.17.3.3 Cable Accessories
Contractors shall provide detailed specifications for all types of cable accessories (anchor and
suspension spirals, vibration dampers, earth connections and clamps, etc.) used in the
installation of the OPGW.
Optical ground wire suspension and tension assemblies shall be based on pre-formed spiral
armatures according to the OPGW cable manufacturer's specification so as to assure the
required minimum bending radius of the ground wire and to avoid concentrations of
mechanical stresses applied to the cable.
The suspension assemblies (armor grip suspension) shall be based on helical rods made of
high-tensile, corrosion-resistant aluminum alloy. For the tension assemblies the helical rods
shall be of aluminum clad steel for the ACS type OPGW.
It is understood that all other small parts, for instance for fixing the OPGW along the tower
structure from the earth wire peak up to the OPGW joint box and cable accessories are
supplied under the contract.
The safety factors for the OPGW suspension and tension assemblies shall be at least equal to
those prescribed for the earth wire as per VDE 0210.
The manufacturer of the spiral armatures shall have experience of at least 5 years successful
production of the offered type of fittings.
Fibre standard ITU-T G.652 - D
3.17.4 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
The terminal equipment shall be the type SDH STM-1 optical terminal equipment.
Communication equipment in Kutus Substation:
SDH (STM-1) multiplexer shall be installed in racks that are EMC compatible and suitable to
work in HV system environments.

The multiplexer shall be based on the SDH technology, working on the basic transmission Bit
Rate of 155.520 Mbit/s (STM-1). It shall be in accordance with the latest ITU-T SDH
recommendations such as: G.703, G.704, G774, G.783, G.784, G.785, G.811, G.812, G.813,
G.823, G.825, G.826 and M.3010.
The equipment shall be able to perform both, multiplexing and line terminating functions.
The SDH Equipment (Terminal Equipment, Add/Drop Multiplex, Synchronous Digital Cross-
Connect) to be offered shall meet the following requirements:
· It shall have at least all the functions outlined in ITU-T G.783.
· The PDH electrical tributary interfaces to the SDH equipment shall conform to ITU-T
G.703.
· The SDH electrical and optical interfaces shall conform to ITU-T G.703 and G.957.
· The cross-connect offered shall be capable of providing non-blocking connection between
virtual containers.
· The Optical Power to be offered shall be such that under normal operating condition, the
BER of the system at the receiver is better than 1x10-10. Error performance versus the
receive signal shall be verified during the factory acceptance tests.
The multiplex structure shall conform to ITU-T G.707. Details of the Multiplex structure for
the offered equipment including the usage of the overhead bits shall be detailed with the
offer.
The synchronous optical interface protection shall be achieved by having 1+1 protection.
The laser shall automatically cut-off when the link is disturbed. Redundant cross connect,
where failure on either one shall not cause link outage, and path protection on the traffic
interface and the 2 Mbit/s levels shall also be provided.
Timing and synchronization shall conform to ITU-T G. 783, G.811, G.812 and G.813.
Timing references, number of timing references available, switching time to a different
timing reference, type and level of clocks shall be stated in the offer.
The equipment shall automatically switch to another clock if the reference timing is lost and
automatically revert back upon restoration. The accuracy of the internal clock as well as the
details of the clock signal distribution shall also be stated in the offer.
The equipment shall be capable of diverting timing references between the STM-1, 2 Mbit/s and
a G.703 tributary interfaces.
The SDH equipment shall be wired for the full STM-1 capacity, however equipped under the
scope of this specification to receive at least four (4) PCM tributaries as specified below.
However, if higher PDH signals other than the 2 Mbit/s are required to be routed through, the
same shall be possible just by adding the respective interface cards and no extra wiring needed.
It shall have 2 Mbit/s outputs where it can directly be connected to digital telephone exchanges
or teleprotection equipment.
The jitter and wander tolerance for PDH and SDH interfaces shall conform to ITU-T G.823 and
G.825. Jitter and wander characteristics of SDH multiplex and line equipment shall conform to
ITU-T G.783.
The Contractor shall submit the details of the power budget calculations stating the following
(based on 0.25 dB/km optical fibre attenuation at 1550 nm):
· Transmitter Power

· Minimum receive Signal @ BER 1x10-10

· Connector Loss
· Repair Splice Loss
· Power Penalty (Chromatic dispersion and LD reflection Loss)
· Maintenance Margin (> 2dB)
· Other Loss
· System Margin
· The SDH equipment to be offered shall provide the followings:
· A data communication channel to the Telecommunication Management Network, in
accordance with ITU-T G.773 for the purpose of integration of the new equipment into
the Telecommunication Network Management System.
· A Craft interface in accordance with ITU-T G.773 to allow a local terminal to access the
network element.
· An engineer order–wire which shall have conference and selective calling features.
· Performance monitoring in accordance with ITU-T G.784 and G.826.
· Optical safety as per ITU-T G.783.
The alarm functions shall include but not limited to:

· Alarms classified as critical, major, minor, and information.
· Indications of loss of incoming signal.
· Visual and audible indication of alarms.
· Test function of alarm indicators to ensure workability of alarm indicators.
Alarm functions shall be detailed by the Contractor, e.g. if implemented in
Telecommunication Network Management System.
Test functions of the equipment shall include as a minimum:

· Transmit output
· Receive Sensitivity
· BER
· Protection switching
· Engineer Order-wire
· Alarms
· Supply Voltages
· Test loops
The Contractor shall give details of all other functions available on the equipment / system.
The equipment shall have a proven record by submitting a reference list, that it has been
installed and operated in similar environment.
§ The power supply voltage and range shall comply with the characteristics of the DC
system, the rated voltage being 48 Volt DC ±15.SCADA and voice communications,
including all necessary interface cards. This will provide for new protection. SCADA

and voice signals installed under this project as well as any existing services which
the client required to be carried on the optical fibre.
Lead in cable shall be provided at the new Substation to connect the OPGW to the terminal
equipment.
DC power supplies will be provided at the new substation.
Optical Distribution Flames (ODF)
Each Optical Line Terminal Equipment (OLTE) or SDH multiplexer shall include an optical
distribution frame, installed in a own wall mounted fixed cubicle .
Assignment between station fibre cable and OLTE's shall be made by using patch cords between
the termination box and the optic distribution frame. Capacity of the optic distribution frame
shall allow free assignment between each individual fibre of the station fibre optic cables and the
relevant optical I/O ports of the OLTE's.
The optic distribution frame shall be equipped with low loss optical connectors (< 0.3 dB
including the loss in the bulk head, loss in the connector splice & the loss in the pig tail) of
the screw-on type. Auxiliary connectors shall be provided to facilitate testing and
maintenance of the fibres/equipment. All spare fibres shall be properly terminated and spliced
on connectors of the same type within the frame.
3.17.5 SPEECH EQUIPMENT

It’s proposed to connect two remote extensions from this exchange to each of the new
substation through the proposed communication Link. Seller shall provide the Telephone sets
at the new substations
3.17.6 REMOTE TERMINAL UNITS
Remote Terminal Units (RTUs) shall be installed at the new substation, purposes of
Control/supervisory of the substation. New RTUs shall be equipped with a 25% spare
capacity.
The following signals if available, shall be collected via SCADA

Control of circuit breakers and isolators
· Supervisory control of all 132 kV, Circuit Breakers (CBs) as well as motorised 33 kV
and 11 kV CBs
· Supervisory control of all 132 kV, as well as selected 33 kV and 11 kV motorised line and
busbar isolators.
Voltage control / voltage regulation:
· Remote control of all on-load tap changers for all 132/33 kV transformers
Status Indications:
· Status indication of all 132 kV, 33 kV and 11 kV circuit breakers at substations equipped
with RTUs. For acquisition of and 132 kV CB status indications the auxiliary contracts of
only one pole shall be wired for CB closed position and for open position.

· Status indication of all 132 kV and line and busbar isolators as well as 33kV and 11 kV
isolators
· Position indication of on-load tap changers of 132/33 kV transformers,
· Status indication of "Local / Remote", "Automatic / Manual" and "Master / Follower"
mode of automatic voltage regulators where applicable
Alarms:
Bay Alarms: For each bay, the following protection signals shall be acquired individually if
available:
· "Main Protection 1 Trip" (MP1)
· "Main Protection 2 Trip" (MP2)
· "Backup Protection Trip" (BPT)
· "Permissive Trip Signal A Send" (PAS)
· "Permissive Trip Signal A Received" (PAR)
· "Permissive Trip Signal B Send" (PBS)
· "Permissive Trip Signal B Received" (PBR)
· "Blocking Signal Send" (BSS)
· "Blocking Signal Received" (BSR)
· "Direct Transfer Trip Send" (DTS)
· "Direct Transfer Trip Received" (DTR)
· "PT Fail A" (PTA)
· "PT Fail B" (PTB)
· "Trip Circuit Faulty" (TCF)
· "Protection A Faulty" (PAF)
· "Protection B Faulty" (PBF)
· "SF6 Low 1 st Step (SF1)
· "SF6 Low 2 nd Step (SF2)
· "CB Failure Protection Operated" (FPO)
· "CB Spring Charging Failure" (SCF)
· "Autorecloser Operated" (ARO)
· "Local Control Position of Selector Switch" (LCP)
· "CB Pole discrepancy protection" (CBD)
Depending on the type of bay (line, transformer, bus coupler), the voltage level and the
respective protection philosophy, the Main and Back-up Protection Alarms may be a
"Distance Protection 1 trip", "Distance Protection 2 trip", "Differential Protection trip",
"Overcurrent Protection trip", "Overload protection trip", "Directional earth fault protection
trip" etc.
Other alarms generated for the individual bays or circuit breakers shall be grouped at the
station level and then transmitted to the respective Control Centre
· "Circuit Breaker Faulty" (CBF) as one common (grouped) alarm for other failures that do
affect the operation of the circuit breaker and need immediate attention / repair.
· "Bay faulty" (BFY) as one common (grouped) alarm for all other failures that do not affect
the operation of the circuit breaker.
Transformer alarms:
· "Temperature Alarm" (TTA) oil and winding temperature as grouped alarm
· "Temperature Trip" (TTT) oil and winding temperature as grouped alarm

· "Buchholz Alarm" (TBA) tank and OLTC as grouped alarm

· "Buchholz Trip" (TBT) tank and OLTC as grouped alarm
· "Transformer Oil Level (Low and High)" (TOL)
· "Transformer Cooling fan Trouble" (TCT)
· "Transformer Bank out of Step" (TBS)
· "Transformer Bank Independent" (TBI)
· "Transformer OLTC Control/Supply Failure" (TCC)
· "Transformer OLTC Loss of Sensing to HS" (TCS)
· "General Alarm" (TGA) all other alarms except the above as one grouped alarm
· "General Trip" (TGT) all other trip signals except the above as one grouped alarm
Busbars Alarms:
· Busbar differential protection trip (BDT)
· Busbar voltage status (BVS)
· Busbar supervision operated
Station alarms and warnings:

· 110 V DC alarm (DA1)
· 110 V Battery Charger Trouble (BCT)
· 48 V DC alarm
· 48 V Battery Charger B Trouble
· Protection Panel Under voltage (PPU)
· Protection Panel DC Supply Trip (PPS)
· Auxiliary supply fault (AUX)
· Smoke detected in Control room (SCR)
· Station Control Disabled (SCD)
· RTU alarm (RTU)
· Communication alarm (COM)
The RTU shall be synchronised by use of a GPS.
The new RTU shall be programmable, with real time clock, synchronised by an external
source, process Input and Output (I/O) modules, CPU, memory and data transmission
equipment.
The new RTU to be supplied and installed under the project shall provide at least the
following functions:
· single command outputs, double command outputs
· regulation command outputs e.g. raise/lower command outputs for transformer tap
changer control
· analog setpoint transmission and output
· single, double and multiple state digital inputs
· analogue measured inputs
· metering pulse inputs for acquisition of energy meter values
· Sequential Event Recording (SER) with time stamping of events at the RTU
· RTU time synchronization
· self testing and diagnostic functions for detection and reporting of any error
· automatic re-starting function

· database and parameter setting by menu-controlled dialogues from a local PC and

remotely from the corresponding control centre with downloading function.
Bidders shall with their offer inform about the different types of data transmission protocols
available and for the proposed type of RTU.
Telecontrols
The RTU shall have the capability for the SCADA system master station to select and control
specified power system devices. The following power system devices will be controlled by
the RTU:
· two-state devices such as circuit breakers and isolators
· multi-state devices such as transformer tap changers
Telecommands
The RTU shall ensure that only the correct output is selected for two state devices before
command execution.
Operation of control outputs shall be via a select-check-execute command sequence.
The control sequence shall include the following:
· The SCADA system shall transmit a command message addressing the proper RTU and
the control point within the RTU, and indicate the control action desired.
· The RTU shall initialize its control logic, reassemble the command message, and transmit
the reassembled message to the SCADA system. The message sent to the SCADA system
shall be generated by the RTU's point selection logic.
· The SCADA system shall check the returned message for validity and, if valid, shall issue
an execute command to the RTU.
· The RTU shall operate the control point selected only after the execute command has been
received.
The control action shall be executed only if the select-check-execute sequence is performed
without error or interruption. The RTU shall reset its control logic upon any error in the
sequence or if the execute command is not received within a pre-defined time after the
command message is received at the RTU.
The impedance of the output circuit shall be measured to detect jammed contacts.
The point selection logic for the control output shall be designed to preclude operation of an
unselected output under single component failure conditions. That is, no single component
shall be capable of selecting and operating an output point by itself.
In no case, any unwanted telecommand shall be given to the process in case of an RTU power
failure.
The RTU communications protocol shall also support "immediate execute" contact outputs
(where an operation can be commanded without the validity check and execute message
exchange) for control output types such as On Load Tap Changer (OLTC) raise / lower
command outputs.

Teleindications
Teleindication refers to status information of operational equipment monitored by the system.

Such teleindications include status information of switching devices, event information,
alarms, etc.
The RTU shall report teleindications by exception but shall also allow the SCADA system to
demand - scan status data even if the data has not changed.
Status indications
The status (open / closed) of two state devices such as circuit breakers or isolators shall be
acquired by 2 independent, potential - free contacts or by 2 interposing relays, one for each
position. Position indications shall be checked for validity and undefined states like open and
closed (1 | 1) or neither open nor closed (0 | 0) shall be alarmed. The RTU shall provide for
run-time-monitoring, adjustable to the HV equipment operation parameters, to avoid
alarming of undefined states while the equipment (e.g. isolator) is operating.
Alarms
Alarms shall be acquired as single indications via potential - free contacts which are either
available at the initiating equipment or to be generated by paralleling relays to be provided
under the project.
Digital parallel input

The RTUs shall have the ability to handle digital measurands, e.g. four digits BCD.
Transformer tap position shall be coded by means of a diode matrix to a BCD code before
connecting to the digital parallel inputs of the RTU. The Tender shall include complete
functional and electrical specifications of possible input codes and input circuits in the
tendered system.
Telemeasurements
In analogue measurands the information to the RTU is given in the form of an analogue
current supplied by the output of an analog measuring transducer.
The analog signals shall be converted to digital mode by an analog-to-digital converter, to

which the inputs are connected. All inputs of a module shall be measured within one cycle,
regardless of the number of inputs in use. Thus new points can be added to the RTU without
reprogramming.
Analog measurements shall be transmitted to the master station with 12 bits or 11 bits + sign
bit.
Telemetering
The transmission of integrated totals refers to the transmission of measurable quantities

which are integrated over a specified period of time. The integration shall take place before
transmission.

The measured quantity such as active or re-active energy (kWh, kVarh), which is presented
as defined pulses which are read into an integrating register of the RTU from a pulse output
or a closing contact of an energy meter.
Transfers of the accumulated counts into a storage area shall be initiated every 1 minute by
the RTU clock. In case of a failure to scan, e.g. due to failure of the telecommunication
system, 1-minutes integrated totals over a period of not less than 1 day shall be stored at the
RTU
Pulse accumulator data shall be assigned to a scan group for scanning of the accumulated
values from the SCADA system.
Sequence of Event Recording (SER)
The RTU shall be capable of Sequence-of-Events (SER) data collection at a time resolution
less than the operating speeds of the power system devices. Any digital input points in the
RTU may be assigned, programmable as an SER data point. In general, a breaker position
change and any alarm from a protection device that has initiated a trip signal is defined as an
event for SER. Multiple transitions of a device, such as the tripping and subsequent reclosing
of a breaker, shall be considered as a series of separate events. Each time an event is detected,
the RTU shall time-tag the event and store it together with the time-tag of the event for
transmission to the SCADA system with the next scan.
The buffer shall be sized to store, as a minimum, a number of events equal to three times the
number of SER points implemented in the RTU.
The time-tag recorded with each event shall be generated from a clock internal to the RTU.
Separating capability
The RTU shall be capable of correctly determining the sequence of events for which their
occurrence is separated by >= 1 ms (separating capability class SP4 of IEC 60870-4)
Time resolution
The resolution of the time tag shall be 10 ms.
Common time base
The internal clock of each RTU shall be synchronized either from an internal, Contractor
supplied and installed time synchronization source, such as a Global Positioning System
(GPS) or an omega synchronizing signal.
The synchronization shall be done periodically such that the time-tags in each RTU shall be
within five milliseconds (5 ms) accuracy between all RTUs.
Tenderers shall clearly indicate the method used for time synchronization and describe in
detail how the required accuracy is achieved.
In the RTU there shall be a digital output from which time synchronization messages can be
forwarded to external devices. The frequency of the activation of the message shall be
adjustable.

Data transmission
The data transmission network will consist of dedicated data channels and/or TCP/IP network
utilizing fibre optic transmission media, power line carrier and radio transmission.
The new RTUs shall be capable of “dual port function”, utilizing different protocols on at
minimum 2 separate RTU communication ports simultaneously. Communication protocols
shall be implemented by modifiable firmware in the RTU. Reconfiguration of the RTU
database may be necessary when an RTU's communications protocol is changed due to the
difference in the functions supported by the protocol.
The Contractor shall provide and implement RTUs with standard IEC 60870-5-101
communications protocol as well as IEC 60870-5-104 communications protocol. Both
protocols shall be included and shall be selectable for each of the RTUs by parameterization.
The interfaces to the different communication media for IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-
104 shall be provided by the RTU hardware.
The RTU protocol shall be non-proprietary for use within KPLC. The Contractor shall
provide all details and parameter settings used under the IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 60870-5-
104 protocols. KPLC shall be authorized to disclose the RTU protocol to third party
suppliers.
3.17.6.1 Functional requirements for adaptation works

This Section is dealing with the interfacing equipment and works to be performed at
substations and power stations.
Analogue and digital input data to RTU
Power system analogue and digital input data shall be collected from the substation field
instrumentation and provided to the RTUs. Interfacing shall be designed to minimize
electromagnetic and electrostatic interference.
Analogue measurements
The interfacing shall consist of analogue transducers, isolating/test devices, wiring, cabling
and terminations to the secondary PT/CT circuit in the control or relay cabinets. The output
signal from the analogue transducer shall be transmitted to the appropriate input at the RTU.
This refers i.e. to MW/MVAr, Current and Voltage measurements.
Status indications
The interfacing shall use spare potential free contacts where available or auxiliary paralleling
relays to be provided under the Contract, (one independent contact / relay for each position)
actuated by the switchgear equipment, isolating and test devices, wiring, cabling and
terminations to the digital input point at the RTU.
Alarms
Input wiring to the RTU from alarm points shall use spare contacts available on the actuating
device wherever possible. Where spare contacts are unavailable, auxiliary "contact
multiplying" relays shall be supplied and wired to provide the required digital input signal to
the RTU.

Pulse accumulation
The pulse accumulation interfacing shall utilize potential-free pulse contacts or pulse outputs
of electronic meters if available, isolation and test devices, wiring, cabling and terminations
to the RTU. Where potential free pulse contacts or pulse outputs are not available, new
meters shall be provided under the Contract.
Supervisory control interface
The outstation adaptation works for device control will be required to take an output signal
from the RTU, actuate an auxiliary control relay, and have a contact from the control relay to
initiate a control action such as breaker trip/close, etc. on the substation equipment by the
appropriate connections to the substations equipment control circuits.
The supervisory control interface shall consist of outputs from the RTU, interposing relays,
isolating/test devices, and wiring, cabling and terminations to the appropriate control circuits
and control relays and switches in control cabinets.
Each RTU control output shall drive an auxiliary control relay, which shall be located in the
control panel or locally. The interposing relay shall be normally de-energized during normal
operation. A normally open contact of these interposing control relays shall actuate a breaker
tripping/closing coil. In no cases shall the relay contacts supplied in the RTU directly control
any equipment.
The circuit breaker close command in stations where separated networks / generation could
be switched shall pass through synchro-check relays to prevent CB closing under none-
synchronous conditions. Installation of synchrocheck relays under this contract is part of the
project tasks under the Contractors responsibility.
In no case shall the closing commands for circuit breakers by-pass any station internal
interlocking.
For OLTC devices, appropriate latching relays shall be utilized.
A key type selector switch shall be installed for each feeder equipped for remote control from
the corresponding Control centre. The switch shall allow selection of control from the
Control centre or from the substation and its position shall be indicated at the corresponding
Control centre.
The Contractor shall provide and install suitable test switches or isolating devices for all
control points, to allow for proper control isolation, testing, safety procedures.
Remote terminal units hardware
Enclosures
The Contractor shall provide enclosures meeting the following requirements:

· Swing racks supported by heavy gauge hinges shall be provided so that only front access
to components and wiring is required for routine maintenance and troubleshooting.
· Provisions for top and bottom cable entry. Cable entries shall be provided with protection
against insect and animal entry, and sealed to prevent dust and sand contamination.
· Protection class of the enclosures shall be

· for indoor cabinets IP52 minimum

· for outdoor cabinets IP64 minimum.
· Suitable signal and safety ground networks within the enclosure.
· Convenience outlets at 230 V AC, shall be provided.
Power supply
The Contractor shall supply any hardware required to convert the 48 V battery voltage to the
required internal voltages for the RTU hardware. The RTUs shall be capable of operating
with ungrounded or grounded (either polarity) input power.
In RTU DC distribution, Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBS) with alarm contact shall be
used, i.e. fuses are not accepted.
Interconnections
All connections between the RTU's termination facilities and signal wiring shall be through
barrier-terminal blocks with knife-switch isolation, mounted in the RTU panel or an adjacent
marshalling cabinet, if not already exist in the Substation. Terminal blocks shall be screw-
type, with full depth insulating barriers.
Distributed RTUs
RTUs shall have the capability to gather data from other smaller or distributed RTUs or local
intelligent substation instrumentation using directly connected RS-232C- or RS 485- channels
with or without modems. The distance between the different control locations may reach up
to 500 m.
Digital inputs
The digital inputs shall be opto-isolated, signal voltage 48 V DC. Other voltages shall also be
possible by changing the matching resistor in the input circuit.
Contact bouncing of the interposing relays shall be filtered. The bounce filtering time shall be
7 ms. Input circuits with selectable bounce filtering time setting are preferred.
The indications shall preserve the chronological order of events inside the RTU.
Oscillating inputs as a result of e.g. a faulty relay chattering shall be blocked locally at the
RTU.
Analogue inputs
In analogue measurements, the information to the analog input modules of the RTU is given
in the form of analog current supplied by the output of measuring transducers. Measuring
transducers shall normally be installed in the switch/control gear.
In analog input modules, the following current input ranges shall be available:
· unipolar 0-5 mA, 0-10 mA, 4-20 mA

· bipolar +/- 5 mA. +/-10 mA, 4-20 mA.
It shall be possible to change the input range for each individual input, preferably by software
means, instead of changing the input resistor.
The analog input circuit shall have a precise DC impedance less than 200 ohms for current
inputs. This impedance must not vary more than half of the accuracy of the Analog to Digital
Converter (ADC) with influence values such as temperature, etc.
In the input circuit galvanic isolation shall be provided from mechanical earth and electrical
earth, and, preferably, between different inputs.
The circuits of the analog input module shall be protected against disturbances caused by
switching transients and against disturbances from power and radio frequencies present at
outstations.
The scanning of each input shall not introduce any error on the analog information.
For each input it must be possible, without disturbing the other inputs,
· to isolate the input from the ADC and close the analog circuit,
· to connect, on the ADC side, a test set for maintenance or adjustments,
· to measure the analog input value without disturbing the measurement (addition of an
mA meter over a link which is then disconnected).
The analog information shall be converted into digital value by the ADC which can be
common for all inputs. Analog measurements shall be transmitted to the master station with
at least 11 bits plus sign bit.
The total accuracy must be better than 0.5% of the nominal range of a measurement
calculated from RTU's analog input up to Control Centre. A calculation of the total accuracy
in the wide sense as well as in the restricted sense as per IEC 870 - 4 shall be included in the
Tender.
The input circuits must withstand a permanent overload of 30% without any damage.
In case of input overload the output message shall be either
· the exact value corresponding to the input or
· the maximum value that is possible to code (with the correct sign).

Pulse inputs
The counter register shall be 16 bit. The maximum input frequency shall be 25 Hz.
In practice, the pulses will be dimensioned in a way that max. frequency is less than 5 Hz.
Interposing relays will not be used.
RTU firmware requirements
The RTUs shall meet the following characteristics of the firmware to support the functions of
the RTUs. The Contractor shall use standard firmware as much as possible.
All firmware shall be completely and consistently documented. It shall not be necessary to
perform modification to firmware, logic, or data for expansion within the sizing parameters
defined for the RTU.
At the time the RTU is accepted, all firmware delivered must be up to date and in final form,
including all standard firmware changes and field changes initiated by the Contractor or the
Contractor's suppliers prior to acceptance. The firmware documentation must reflect these
changes.
Firmware shall be loadable by service notebook locally at minimum, download of firmware

and parameter sets trough SCADA system, using the data communication links will be
preferable. In any case changing of EPROMs or similar devices shall not be necessary when
updating RTUs firmware.
Initialization / restart program
Firmware shall be provided to enable the RTU to restart itself upon manual request and
automatically under the conditions of power restoration, memory parity errors, and hardware
failures. The firmware shall initialize the RTU and begin execution of the RTU functions
without intervention by the SCADA system. All RTU restarts shall be reported to the
SCADA system.
Fail safe processing
In the case of irrecoverable faults such as power supply failures, firmware malfunctions, or
any other detected condition that may affect the security of indications and controls, the RTU
shall place itself in a secure state that prohibits the transmission of false indications or the
execution of erroneous control outputs. The detection of these error conditions shall be the
responsibility of the RTUs self-test and operations monitoring firmware.
Database maintenance
The Contractor shall supply software to configure each RTU's database where this
information is located in software and/or firmware at the RTU. The software shall completely
generate or modify the database of the RTUs. The database software shall have error
detection services and shall produce a printed listing of the input data and the resulting RTU
database configuration.

Down loading of database from SCADA system
The RTU shall support the change of the RTU's configuration and processing parameters by
messages from the SCADA system. These changes shall include, but not be limited to scan
group definitions, analog limits, SER point allocation and buffer definitions.
Diagnostic firmware
The Contractor shall supply diagnostic firmware for both off-line local tests and on-line self-
diagnostic capability built into the RTU. The RTU shall enter an off-line state during the
execution of off-line diagnostics, and this off-line state shall be reported to the
SCADA system.
The RTU shall include a remote diagnostics communication port and shall be capable of
executing off-line diagnostics from an external computer terminal connected to this remote
diagnostics port.
A SCADA interface Marshalling cubicle shall be supplied to interface all power system data
i.e. status indication alarms, analogues, interposing relays for control outputs etc. to the RTU.
This cubicle shall also house transducers for analogue inputs and interposing relays for
control outputs. 48 volts DC power supplies shall be supplied to power the RTU, interposing
relays, telephones equipment
Special Tools and Measuring Equipment
Special tools and measuring equipment which are used to set up the equipment properly and
which are essential for maintenance shall be provided. This includes service laptops Fibre
Optic and RTU.

3.18 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
3.18.1 SCOPE
This subsection covers the design, manufacture, testing before shipment, delivery to Site and
erection and testing at Site of the following materials.
(a) Electrical conductors, cables and fittings
(b) Insulators and fittings
(c) Steel structures
(d) Earthing materials
(e) Other material
(f) Lighting facilities for outdoor switchyard.

3.18.2 CABLES
3.18.2.1 600V Cables
Low-tension circuit from station local transformer to AC distribution panel: 600V

cable shall be copper conductor, polyvinyl chloride insulated PVC sheathed, 600V
300sqmm x 4-cores.
Low-tension motor circuit from AC distribution panel to each motor:

The sectional area of the 600V cables shall be ample for each motor capacity and
shall be decided by the Contractor taking into account the voltage drop for starting
current.
3.18.2.2 Control Cables
Control cables shall be copper conductor, of jacket type, 600V, polyvinyl chloride
insulated PVC sheathed, r multi-cores copper. The cross-sectional area of core shall
not be less than 2.5sq mm. and the cables shall be armoured.
The cross-sectional area of core for current transformer circuit control cables shall not
be less than 4 sq mm and shall be armoured.
3.18.2.3 Insulated Wire
600V PVC insulated wire shall be considered stranded copper conductors and used
for power and heater for indoor wirings.
3.18.2.4 Cables Drawn into Ducts
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide ducts and pipes.
Immediately before pulling the cables, the Contractor is to remove any loose material
from the ducts and prove them by drawing through a material of slightly less diameter
than the duct. The ducts shall be water and vermin proof sealed and for indoor
installations fireproof.
3.18.2.5 Cables Installed in Concrete Trenches
In substations concrete trenches and cable ducts shall be provided and installed by the
Contractor. These trenches shall not be filled with sand. All cable duct entries to
buildings, whether or not for cables, shall be protected against entry of water, oil and
vermin with a suitable filling material supplied and installed by the Contractor on the
approval of the Employer.
All cable routes in concrete trenches shall be suitably supported by means of cleats or
racks and raised from the trench floor by means of suitable spacers. All cables shall
be run in a neat and orderly manner and the crossing of cables within the trench shall
be avoided as far as possible.
The Contractor shall be responsible for removing and replacing the trench covers free
of charge during the execution of his work as directed by the Engineer.

3.18.2.6 Bus Conductors
Following conductors shall be provided as outdoor bus and jumper conductors:
For 132 kV bus bar and jumper
(i) Pipe bus: Copper pipe – 75mm (diameter) x 5mm (thickness)

(ii) Jumper and droppers: AAC. 400 mm2
3.18.2.7 Galvanized Steel Wires
Galvanized steel wires of 55 mm2 (7/3.2 mm) shall be used for overhead ground
wires, of which ultimate tensile strength shall be more than 90kg/sq.mm.
3.18.2.8 Fittings
Suitable compression clamps and spacers for conductors, suitable terminals for the
equipment to conductor, and suitable clamps for galvanized steel wire shall be
supplied and installed.
Connecting clamps shall be free from electrolytic corrosion and designed for bi-metal
against the connection between aluminium and copper.
The following tests, as applicable, shall be carried out at the Contractor’s plant:
(a) Construction test

(b) Tensile strength test
(c) Elongation test
(d) Resistance test
(e) Insulation resistance test
(f) Withstand voltage test
(g) Characteristics
3.18.3 INSULATORS AND FITTINGS
3.18.3.1 Substation Disc Insulator Units
Each suspension and strain insulator string shall be of 12 units for 132kV circuits
without arcing horn. The insulator unit shall be standard 254 mm porcelain, with ball
and socket, and have a spacing of 146 mm between discs, complying with IEC
publication 305-1974. The connection between units shall be such as to allow
sufficient flexibility for freedom of movement, and to prevent the possibility of
becoming separated accidentally either during or after the erection.
The interlocking sockets shall be designed to allow easy passage of the ball into the
socket and retaining or locking devices required to keep in the socket under all service
conditions.

The dimensions of socket and pin shall be in accordance with IEC. Recommendation
120, 16mm socket and pin.
The insulator units shall be brown glazed porcelain.

Each insulator unit shall have the following characteristics:
Withstand voltage:
Power frequency, dry 70kV
Power frequency, wet 40kV
Impulse voltage 110kV
Puncture voltage 110kV
Minimum breaking load 70 kN

Minimum creepage per unit 295mm
Minimum creepage for insulator string shall be 3988mm

Minimum breaking load of insulator string with fittings shall be 70 kN.
3.18.3.2 Station Post Insulators
Station post insulators shall be provided for supporting the connecting lead wires of
switchgear equipment to bus. The insulator shall be of brown coloured porcelain
rated as follows:
System voltage 145kV

AC withstand voltage (wet, 1 min.) 290kV
Impulse withstand voltage 685kV
The station post insulator shall comply with IEC.273-1968, IEC 720.
3.18.3.3 Fittings
All fittings shall be malleable iron hot dip galvanized to BS 729.
Suspension and tension clamps shall be as light as possible and of approved types.
All clamps shall be designed to avoid any possibility of deforming the stranded
conductors and separating the individual strands. Tension clamps shall be bolted
type, and shall not permit slipping off or damage to conductors or any part thereof.
Suspension clamps shall be free to pivot in the vertical plane containing the
conductor.
Clamps shall not exhibit excessive heating by magnetization or otherwise..
U-bolts, ball hooks, socket-eyes and other necessary fittings required for the above
insulators and clamps shall be provided.
The following tests shall be carried out before shipment:

(a) With stand and flashover voltage

(b) Mechanical strength
(c) Dimensions of insulators and fittings
(d) Galvanizing
3.18.4 STEEL STRUCTURES
3.18.4.1 General
The Contractor shall furnish all steel structures required, including framework of
outdoor equipment.
3.18.4.2 Details of Design
The steel structures shall be designed in accordance with the following requirements:
(a) Vertical loading

The weight of the conductors, ground wires, insulator strings, workers, the
structures themselves and equipment to be supported, if any, shall be considered.
(b) Wind pressure:

(i) On conductors and earth wires: 385 N/m2 on projected area
(ii) On insulators and all other circular: 385 N/m2 on projected area section
(iii) On lattice structures or beam structure: 590 N/m2 on projected area
(c) Working tensions of conductor and wire:
(i) Conductors for 132kV buses-700kg per conductor and for 132kV lines
700kg per conductor
(ii) Overhead ground wire- 500kg per wire
(d) Seismic co-efficient: 0.16
(e) Factor of safety: 2.5

The structures shall be designed so that no failure or permanent distortion shall
occur when the load equivalent to 2.5 times the maximum simultaneous working
loads are applied.
(f) Slenderness ratio:

The slenderness ratio shall not exceed 200 for main and web members and 250 for
nominal members.
(g) Member size

No leg members less than 5mm in thickness and 60mm in width of flange for
main, and 4mm in thickness and 45mm in width of flange for web and nominal
members shall be used.

(h) Bolts and nuts

All the members shall be connected by bolts and nuts. The size of the connection
bolts shall be not less than 16mm for leg member. The suitable anchor bolts shall
be provided. The size of step bolts shall be 16mm.
The Contractor shall submit full details and drawings for the steel structures to the
Employer for approval prior to commencing fabrication.
3.18.4.3 Foundation
The Contractor shall place the concrete foundation for steel structures and switchgear
equipment on the switchyard.
The Contractor shall supply installations drawing giving erection particulars.

The foundation shall be anchor bolt type.
Such members as to be buried in the foundation concrete block shall not be provided.
Size of block-out hole for anchor bolts shall be indicated on the drawing so that the
concerning work can be performed prior to the erection of supports.
Safety factor of concrete for up lifting force shall not be less than 2.5. The allowable
bearing strength of earth will be assumed to be 2.0 ton/m2, however, it shall be
confirmed by the Contractor. The weight of earth shall be assumed to be 1.6 ton/m3
and weight of concrete to be 2.3 ton/m3.
If required, pile foundation shall be provided, and the cost of piling shall be deemed
to be included in the Bid Price.
The angle of repose will be reckoned as 10 degree.
3.18.4.4 Materials
All steel employed for the structures have high yield point and high ultimate tensile
strength and shall be subject to the approval of the Employer.
Diameter of both holes shall not be more than 1.5mm larger than the diameter of the
bolts.
All members shall be stamped or marked in an approved manner with numbers and/or
letters corresponding to number and/or letters on drawings or material list approved
by the Employer.
The erection marks shall be stamped before galvanizing and shall be clearly legible
after galvanizing.
The following tests shall be carried out before delivery to site.

(a) Mechanical strength of materials
(b) Galvanized test
(c) Shop assembly

3.18.5 EARTHING MATERIALS
In addition to the conductors and fittings to be used for the works to be erected under
the contract, the Contractor shall supply and install the following materials for the
grounding system of each substation and complete the grounding system.
The Contractor shall submit full details and drawings for grounding systems to the
Employer for approval. Grounding resistance shall be 1-ohm at the maximum or the
value calculated and the Contractor shall be responsible for preparing the specified
value.
(a) Bare annealed high conductivity copper stranded wire:

95sq.mm for main grounding mesh, local transformer, arresters, etc. and sq.mm
and/or 35sq.mm for other equipment and materials.
(b) Copper plates of 3mm thick, 1 meter by 1 meter size, equipped with copper lead
conductor 95sq mm 3 meter long
(c) Grounding rod of 25mm diameter, 3 meter long, copper clad steel rod equipped with
copper led conductor, 35sq.mm, 3 meter long.
(d) Clamps needed for connecting each conductor shall be provided.
3.18.6 OTHER MATERIALS
All other miscellaneous materials, such as conduct pipes, steel plates, fabricated cable
ducts, cables supporting brackets sand/or cable racks, pipe hangs, angle steels,
channels steels, bolts and nuts and other items, required for putting into service the
works to be covered under this Contract, shall be supplied and installed by the
Contractor as required. These materials shall comply with the highest grade specified
in the relevant standards.
Coloured phase mark plates and bus identification marks shall be fitted on each beam
of steel structures of incoming feeders, outgoing feeders, main buses and transformers
buses.
Colour of phase marks shall be red, yellow and blue.
3.18.7 LIGHTING SYSTEM
A complete lighting system for the switchyard in Kutus substation shall be supplied
and installed by the Contractor.
Station lighting components of approved type shall be supplied and installed. These
shall include but not limited to:
(a) Lighting Fixtures
(i) Outdoor type mercury lighting fixtures for AC 240V shall be equipped with
screwed base lamp holders, and shall be of high-power factor suitable for
stable operation in tropical climate and weatherproof type.
(ii) Outdoor type incandescent lighting fixtures for DC 110V for emergency use
shall be complete with all fittings.

(iii) The type of lighting fixtures used should be available locally.
(b) Lighting supports

Lighting supports shall be steel poles painted with suitable colour, which will be
instructed by the Employer. Ballast, cut out, and terminals shall be equipped in
the pole and other attachments necessary for wiring and fixing of the lighting
fixtures shall also be provided with the pole. The ground level shall be marked on
the support for easy installation.
600-volt PVC insulated wires of 3.5 square millimetres in size shall be laid in the
lighting pole for connection from the terminal box to the lighting fixtures.
(c) Cabling and wiring shall be of approved type as well as all required installation
materials.
(d) Lighting panel for outdoor lighting system shall be installed in each station or
extended in the relevant stations. The lighting panel shall be indoor metal
enclosed, wall mounting type, dust and vermin proof construction and shall
contain the following equipment.
- Identification name plate

- Twenty single pole moulded case circuit breakers 600 V, 30A
- Pole moulded case circuit breakers 600V, 100 A
- Magnet contactor for emergency lighting
- Internal wirings
- Neutral links
- Terminal boards
(e) Spare Parts
The following spares parts shall be supplied for the station- 3 sets of each type of
complete lighting fixtures with all accessories.
Lighting for outdoor switchyard and access roads constructed under this contract
shall also be provided by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Employer for approval the
calculation sheets, the facilities drawings, the installation drawings and wiring
diagram.
The power shall be supplied from the low tension AC distribution panel in the
control building.
The mean illumination level of each location for AC power shall be as follows:
- Outdoor operating area 30 lux

- Outdoor switchyard 5 lux
- Street lighting 10 lux

3.18.8 MARSHALLING BOXES
Marshalling boxes shall be used for outdoor switch bays and control building for the
stations.
The boxes shall be of outdoor or indoor, metal enclosed, air insulated, self standing
type, dust and vermin-roof construction and containing the terminal blocks, internal
wiring, space heater with thermostat for moisture protection, and other necessary
equipment. Those for outdoor use shall be of weather-proof construction.
3.18.9 AC POWER OUTLETS
An AC power outlet shall be installed in the adjacent place of local service

transformer. The AC power outlet shall be of outdoor, metal enclosed, air insulated,
self standing or structure mounted type and dust, vermin and weather proof
construction and containing a 3 pole moulded case circuit breaker, 600V, 100A power
plug cable gland, and other necessary accessories.
3.19 CIVIL ENGINEERING AND BUILDING WORKS
3.19.1 GENERAL
The works comprise the topographical survey of site, subsoil investigations, detailed
design, production of working drawings, provision of labour, plant and materials, and
construction of the civil engineering and building works.
The works include site clearance and earthworks; Cabro (Minimum 80mm or
49N/mm2) paved Substation and access road, surfaced water drainage, switchgear and
structures, Drained indoor/outdoor cable trenches, perimeter fencing with 750mm
razor wire on top and gates, etc. The framed structure control buildings will be
completed with control and relay room, communications equipment room, office,
washroom, drainage infiltration tanks, septic tank, water supply with minimum head
3m tower tank and ground storage tank with pumping boost . The new Control
building at Kutus Substation shall have a minimum floor area shall be 384m2.
Gatekeeper’s house separately from the control building shall be masonry structure
with indoor washroom.
3.19.2 SITE SURVEY AND SUBSOIL INVESTIGATION
The Bidder shall visit the site to satisfy himself that information given in the Bid
Document is accurate and also to collect additional data, which he may require for
preparation of his bid.
(A) Site Survey
The Contractor shall survey the site of the switchyard associated with control
building, to obtain the following:
(1) Accurate volume of ground to be cut and levelled.

(2) Accurate positions of switchgears, structures, ducts, drainage, buildings,

fences, etc.
(3) Drainage pattern of the site
A site survey plan shall be prepared in the scale of 1:500 showing the survey
results and proposed layout of the work.
(B) Sub-soil Investigation
The Contractor shall ascertain for himself the nature of the sub-soil conditions
over the sites of the works for his design purposes, by means of sounding tester
and trial excavations, etc. The following should be considered as a minimum
requirement, but should be extended if many inconsistencies are encountered:
(1) Depth of sounding tests shall be less than 5 metres unless rock is encountered;
in which case the thickness shall be proved to be greater than 1.5 metres on
two boreholes. Where weak soils are encountered, the test shall be taken
down to a load bearing stratum and adequate thickness.
(2) Test records shall describe and indicate level of all soils encountered and
indicate the natural water table level. Rock core records should specify total
core recovery, solid core recovery and quality of the rock cored.
(3) Electrical resistivity of the soil shall be verified on four samples, in

accordance with approved practice. (e.g. British Standard Code of Practice CP
1013-1965):
3.19.3 DESIGN OF WORKS
(A) Design and Drawings
The Contractor shall design the civil engineering and building works and prepare design
report complete with working drawings in size A3 as necessary for the construction of the
works.
The Contractor is required to produce full design calculations for the foundations,
building structures, etc. and detailed working drawings. He shall be responsible for the
detailed designs, strength and safety of the structures, to meet the structural, acoustic and
environmental requirements of the buildings and other works. He shall be responsible for
ensuring that the design satisfies the requirements of all authorized local and natural
bodies. Design calculations and detailed drawings must be submitted to the Employer for
approval before the relevant construction work is carried out. Design calculations shall
be in accordance with an approved method of computation and should take into account
the most unfavourable combination of dead load, live load and wind load.
(B) Detail Requirements for Design
(1) Calculations
Calculations shall clearly identify the subject of the calculations and shall include but
not be limited to providing the following information:
(a) Assumption used for design purposes

(b) Codes or standards used

(c) Loading used
(d) Calculation
(e) Technical specification section and paragraph number
(2) Drawings
Drawings and data sheets prepared by the Contractor shall include complete
construction details.
The drawings shall include but not be limited to the following information or detail as
applicable: construction joints, reinforcement details and bar bending schedules,
details for unusual or special items of architectural, form work, trenching, structural
steel details, etc.
3.19.4 GENERAL SITE WORKS
A. Setting-out
The Contractor shall be responsible for all setting-out, irrespective of any checking by the
Employer. The accuracy of all setting-out is to be better than ±1part in 3,000.
The Contractor shall advise the Employer within 24 hours whenever a new setting-out
peg is established or an existing one destroyed, and shall regularly furnish the engineer
with layout plans showing all current setting-out and survey stations.
The tolerances shown below shall rule on site unless otherwise agreed upon by the
Employer and the Contractor.
Block work
(1) Position in plan

Fair-faced or specified side from the designed position ±15mm
(2) Length
Up to and including 5m ±15mm
Over 5m up to and including 10m ±20mm
Over 10m ±25mm
(3) Height
Up to and including 3m ±15mm
Over 5m up to and including 6m ±20mm
Over 6m ±25mm
(4) Thickness
More than one block ±15mm
(5) Level of bed joints

Length up to but not exceeding 5m ±10mm
Over 5m but not exceeding 10m ±15mm
Over 10m but not exceeding 20m ±20mm
Add for every 5m ±5mm
(6) Straightness
In any 5m (not cumulative) ±10mm max

(7) Verticality
In any 3m ±15mm
Permissible Deviation on In-site Concrete
(1) Plant and other foundations

(a) Position of centre line on plan from nearest building grid line ±10mm
(b) Dimensions on plan -5mm + 20mm
(c) Formation level ±25mm
(d) Surface level -5mm + 0mm
(e) Sleeved bolt location ±15mm
(f) Sleeved bolt vertically 1 in 100
(g) Cast-in bolt location ±2mm
(h) Cast-in bolt vertically 1 in 300
(i) Bolt levels 0mm + 20mm
NB: Where tolerances (e) and (f) conflict with (g) and (h) the latter shall govern.
(2) Components above foundation (excepting items in (c) below)
(a) Position of centre line on plan from

Nearest building grid line ±19mm
(b) Verticality: Plumbers in height of up to 0.5m ±5mm

Over 1.5m to 1.5m inclusive ±10mm
Over 1.5m to 3m inclusive ±15mm
Over 3m to 30m inclusive ±20mm
(c)Cross section and linear dimensions of beams, slabs, columns and walls.
Up to 300mm ±5mm
Over 300 to 600mm ±10mm
Over 600mm to 1.5m ±15mm
Over 1.5mm to 3m ±20mm
Over 3m ±30mm
(d) Level of specified surface relative to the nearest

Bench Mark ±10mm
(3) Overall dimensions of a concrete framed building

(a) Length and width measured at external ground level
For dimensions up to and including 15m ±15mm
For dimensions over 15m up to 30m ±50mm
For each subsequent 30m ±20mm
(b) Height of structural roof level with reference to the transferred

Bench mark ±40mm
The Employer may at his discretion alter or specify new tolerances as necessary.
The Contractor shall submit for the Employer’s approval, his proposed finished site
levels, road levels and building floor levels. Following approval by the Employer the
Contractor shall level the sites to suit.

B. Drainage
Drainage shall be designed in accordance with relevant Codes for Practice published by
authoritative Standards Organization such as the British Institution, e.g. BS 8301, BS
6031 and CP 2005.
A surface water drainage system covering the switchyard shall be installed. The number
of runs and outfalls and pipe sizing must be sufficient to cope with the severest
precipitation, with a factor of safety of 1.2. Within switchyard and other areas in which
maintenance will be carried out the drainage must allow uninterrupted access.
Embankments and cuttings are to have drainage facilities at their top or bottom. The
formation level of switchyard areas is to be formed with uniform cross-falls of about 1 in
300 in the same direction as the natural drainage path of the surrounding country.
Surface water from roofs of buildings shall be drained to down pipes, which connect with
the site drainage system.
C. Cable Ducts and Trenches
The Contractor is responsible for all civil engineering works required for the cable runs
between switchgear and buildings, in concrete cable trenches. Cable entries into
buildings shall be through ducts or in concrete cable trenches. Trench covers outside
buildings shall be of reinforced concrete, designed for the maximum likely imposed loads
appropriate to their location. Concrete cable trenches shall be adequately drained to
underground infiltration tanks of adequate capacity.
Power cables and control cables shall be laid on suitable cable racks in trenches.
Cable entries into buildings shall be sealed to prevent the entry of dust, vermin, etc., using
suitable materials.
D. Perimeter Security fencing and Gates
The perimeter of the site is to be fenced with galvanized chain link or equivalent fencing,
2.4 meters high above ground level, attached to reinforced concrete supporting posts and
struts. The posts shall have three strands of galvanized barbed wire attached to cranked
tops. Double leaf gates shall be provided at the entrance to the site.
E. Station Building
The reinforced concrete framed structure control buildings will be completed with control
and relay room, communications equipment room, furnished office with attached coffee
room, washroom, drainage infiltration tanks, septic tank, water supply with minimum
head 3m tower tank and ground storage tank with pumping boost. Control building
minimum floor area shall be 384m2 for Kutus Substation. Walls and partitions shall be
dressed stone masonry with minimum compressive strength of 12N/mm2. Control
building floor layout shall be approved by the employer before detailed drawings
production. The buildings shall have prefabricated steel roof, with walls of concrete
block-work, rendered outside and plastered inside. All walls and roofs shall be fully
insulated, to produce maximum thermal transmittance (U.) values of 1.14 (watts/m2.) for

walls and 0.57 for roofs. Architectural treatment of the buildings shall be in accordance
with the Employer’s usual standard or preference.
The buildings will have been designed with ease of operation and maintenance as a major
factor. Materials, workmanship and finish must be of an appropriately high standard. In
considering the various materials, details, and construction methods, Contractors must
investigate the availability, delivery and transportation to the sites of all materials, plant,
and labour, to enable the programme to be maintained.
Internal partition walls shall be generally for concrete block work with emulsion painted
smooth plastered finish. The equipment areas shall have screened floors finished with a
surface hardener. All finishes shall be fireproof or flame retarding. Floor finished shall
be sand-cement screed throughout. Room heights shall be governed by the criteria that
there should be 1-meter clearance between the top of cubicles or panels and ceilings.
Particularly, attention must be given in the design of the buildings to fire prevention and
safety of the personnel at all times. Access doors and escape doors shall be provided and
fitted with panic bolts where necessary, so that operating and maintenance staff can
always exit safely from the buildings in fire emergencies of any nature or location.
All windows shall be dustproof. A number of opening lights shall be provided in all
rooms, including air-conditioned rooms. Internal doors shall be flush-faces, solid-core,
timber doors, with painted timber frames and architraves. External doors shall be made
of steel as appropriate.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision and installation of a water supply
serving the station buildings with a water tank. Every cistern, sink, basin, etc. shall be
provided with a stopcock in the supply pipe adjacent to the fittings.
The water supply system for each site shall constitute a 10 cubic meters ground level tank
shaded from direct sunlight, supplying a 2.5 cubic meter 3m header tank, similarly
shaded. The ground level tank shall be properly ventilated and fitted with an
automatically operated electric pump. The shading structures shall be louvered and
architecturally pleasing the blend with the building elevations.
F. Site Clearance and Excavation
The Contractor shall clear from all areas required for the works all unwanted materials,
debris, etc., but shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent damage to existing road
construction and to existing surfaces, buildings and other facilities in the area which do
not need to be demolished.
The whole of the excavations shall be carried out to the widths, lengths and depths shown
on the approved drawings. No unlicensed or indiscriminate digging will be permitted.
The Contractor may excavate by any method he considers suitable, subject to the
Employer’s approval, and shall allow for the use of types of plant most suited for
excavation in any location and at any time.
The Contractor shall allow for risk of meeting and having to excavate through any sort of
material, which may be encountered, including rock.

Materials from the excavation may, if approved by the Employer, be used by the
Contractor in the construction of the Works. Other excavated material shall be backfilled
where required or deposited where directed anywhere on site. Surplus materials shall be
removed from the site by the Contractor to the approved place. Backfill material shall not
be borrowed from the site, site deterioration due to backfill borrowing on site shall be
restored to Employer satisfaction with no additional cost. Whereas Employer acquired
plot might be bigger than Substation site requirement, the Contractor shall only use the
Substation site as will be in the approved Substation layout drawing, use of land outside
this area will require Employer approval.
The Contractor shall at all times keep the site free from all surplus materials, rubbish and
offensive matter.
In excavations for foundations, a bottom layer of excavation 150mm in thickness shall be

left undisturbed and subsequently removed only when the concrete is about to be placed
in order that softening or deterioration of the surfaces of the bottom of the excavated area
by exposure may be avoided as far possible.
The bottom of all excavated areas shall be trimmed, levelled and well rammed. Concrete
shall not be deposited thereon until the bottom has been inspected and approved by the
Employer.
All excavation works are to be kept dry and clean, in order that work is not affected or
interfered with by water entering the excavations.
The arrangements made for dealing with water in excavations must be approved by the
Employer, and they must ensure that the de-watering of excavations can continue during
the placing of concrete or the execution of any other works that could be affected by
water in excavations. Adequate precautions must be taken against washing out of cement
and concrete or to prevent the work being disturbed in any way. No concrete, masonry,
brickwork or other materials shall be placed or built until the surfaces are properly
drained.
G. Filling and reinstatement

Filling for trenches, excavations and leveling for the Site shall be deposited in layers not
exceeding 250mm uncompacted thickness. Where excavations, whether in rock or other
material, are made to a greater depth than detailed, the intervening space shall be brought
up to the proper level in plain concrete.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of the embankments where formed
either by cutting or filling, and precautions taken to protect the earthworks from
deterioration under adverse weather conditions. Wherever applicable the
recommendations contained in the following codes of practice shall be followed in
calculations, detailing and performance of the earthworks and drainage:
(1) Earthworks – British Standard Code of Practice BS 6031 – 1981
(2) Civil Engineering Code of Practice No.2 on Earth Retaining Structures, Issued by
institute of Structural Engineers, U.K.
(3) Soils - British Code for Civil Engineering Soils BS 1377.

Embankments shall not be formed over inclined ground surfaces without previously
forming the founding surface, on which the fill material will be placed, to a benched
profile.
All earthwork top surfaces shall be finished off level and regular and the sides of cuttings
and embankments shall be properly trimmed to the detailed slopes as they become
consolidated.
The Contractor is to allow for embankments and cutting slopes to be well forked, raked
and stabilized as protection from erosion.
H. Explosives
Explosives may only used when specified. Their use shall comply with the following:
(1) Approvals required by CAP 115 Laws of Kenya on Mining.
(2) Blasting design to ensure controlled blasting as an excavation method.
(3) All local bylaws and regulations.
(4) The Contractor shall store explosives in a licensed store or magazine provided with a
separate compartment for detonators.
(5) Explosives shall be used in the quantities and manner recommended by the
manufacturers. The written approval of the Employer shall be obtained for each
location or series of locations where the Contractor wishes to use. Such approval
shall not in any way relieve the Contractor of his liabilities under the Conditions of
Contract.
(6) When blasting is carried out, the Contractor shall ensure, by adherence to proper
safety distances and by the use of heavy blasting mats where necessary, to prevent the
dispersal of material, that no damage is caused to persons, animals or property on or
off the Site. Special care shall be taken when blasting in wet ground to ensure that
individual explosions are reduced to such a size as to preclude damage to any
buildings or structures.
3.19.5 CONCRETING WORK SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Authoritative Standards and Codes Practice
The following authoritative standards are referred to hereinafter:
B. S. Date Title
A 12 1989 Portland Cement (Ordinary and rapid hardening)
.
B 812 Methods for sampling and testing of mineral
aggregates, sand and fillers
C 882 1983 Aggregates from natural source for concrete
(including granolithic)
D 1881 Methods of testing concrete
E 5328 1981 Method of specifying concrete
F 2499 1973 Hot applied joint sealants for concrete pavements
G 3148 1980 Tests for making concrete

H 3921 1985 Clay bricks

A 4251 1974 Trunk type concrete mixers
(1980)
B 4449 1988 Carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete
C 4466 1981 Bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for the
reinforcement of concrete (old edition )
D 4483 1985 Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete
E 5075 Concrete Admixture
F 6073:Pt.1 1981 Precast concrete blocks
G 8810.Pt. 1&2 1985 The structural use of concrete
H 5950 The use of structural steel in buildings
I KS 95 2003 Specification for Natural Aggregates for use in
Concrete
J 8007 1987 The structural use of concrete for retaining aqueous
liquids
K 3110 1972 Safe use of cranes (cranes, tower cranes and derrick
cranes)
MATERIALS AND SPECIFICATIONS

(a) Concrete for concrete foundation and pile shall have the minimum required
breaking strengths as specified in the technical schedules.
(b) Cement used shall be Portland or other approved composition obtained from an
approved maker. Portland cement shall conform in all respects o BS-12.
(c) Aggregates shall be clean and free from dust, earthy or organic matter or salt.
Coarse aggregate shall be approved grading to be retained on a mesh not less than
5mm square, and of a maximum size to pass a mesh not more than 40mm square,
subject to KS 95:2003. Where specially approved in writing by the Employer,
coarse aggregate of uniform size not larger than will pass a 25mm mesh may be
used throughout. Fine aggregate shall be coarse, sharp, clean and free from dust,
salt, clay, vegetable matter or other impurity and shall be screened through a mesh
not more than 5mm in the clear. It shall be a well-graded mixture of coarse and
fine grains from 5-mm gauge downwards.
(d) Water shall be clean and free from all earth, vegetable or organic matter, salt, soil,
oil acid and alkaline substances either in solution or in suspensions. Quality shall
be confirmed by lab test.
(e) At least four weeks before commencing any concreting work; the Contractor shall
make trial mixes using samples of cement and fine and coarse aggregates. The test
specimens for the trial mixes shall be of cube type. Preliminary test specimens
shall be taken from the proposed mixes as follows:
For each proposed mix a set of 6 specimens shall be made from each of 3
consecutive batches. Three from each set of six shall be tested at an age of seven
(7) days and three (3) at an age of 28 days. The test shall be carried out in a
laboratory approved.
Neither the mix proportions nor the source of supply of materials shall be altered
without the prior approval of the Employer except that the Contractor shall adjust
the proportions of mix as required, to take account of permitted variations in the

materials, such approval shall be subject to the execution, to the Engineer’s

satisfaction, of trial mix procedures set out herein.
(f) Concrete cubes are to be taken and tested to verify the concrete strength during the
concreting works. The Contractor shall provide the cube moulds at site for the
purpose, accordingly. The test specimens shall be 150mm cube and the mould
shall be of metal with inner faces accurately machined in order that opposite sides
of the specimen are plane and parallel. Each mould shall be provided with the
metal base having a smooth machined surface. The interior surfaces of the mould
and base should be lightly oiled before concrete is placed in the mould.
(g) Concrete strength
Grade ‘35’, ‘30’, ‘25’, and ’20’ concrete shall have the minimum strengths as given
by Works Cubes Tests shown below. The grade of concrete stated is concrete
characteristic strength below which not more than 5% of the test results may fall,
Concrete target mean strength Fcu.o = Grade in N/mm2+ 1.645ơ where Ơ = standard
deviation of the strength tests, 1.645 is the probability factor and 1.645ơ is the design
margin. Target mean strength shall exceed required characteristic strength by the
design margin value, and concrete production shall aim to attain this mean,
Minimum Crushing Strengths

Grade 35 Grade 30 Grade 25 Grade 20
7 Days 23.5 N/ sq. mm 20.0 N/ sq. mm 16.5 N/ sq. mm 13.5 N/ sq. mm
28 days 35.0 N/ sq. mm 30.0 N/ sq. mm 25.0 N/ sq. mm 20.0 N/sq. mm
The average strength obtained from cube tests shall be 10 per cent higher than
the Strength shown above. Subject to design the minimum grade for structural
concrete shall be Grade 25, Grade 15 will be allowed for blinding concrete,
precast concrete minimum grade shall be Grade 30.
(h) Tests required and Sampling
Þ Sampling of materials
§ Approved sources, graded aggregates, sampling and testing to BS 812,
Þ Workability
§ Fresh concrete slump test. Slump range 25 – 50mm,
§ mechanical vibration and maximum 1.5m fall method of placing.
Þ Strength/durability
§ Compression/cube (150mm) test, three after seven days and three at
twenty-eight days. Test to BS 1881.

Works cubes are to be made at intervals as required by the Employer. The cubes shall provide
a continuous record of concrete work. The cubes shall be made in approved 150mm moulds
in strict accordance with code of practice.
Three cubes shall be made on each occasion from different batches, the concrete being taken
from the point of deposit. Each cube shall provide a distinguishing number (numbers to run
consecutively and the date, and a record shall be kept on site, giving the following particulars
:-
(I) Cube number
(II) Date made
(III) Location in work
(IV) 7 –day Test
Date; ……………
Strength ………………
28 –day Test…………..
Strength……………
Cubes shall be forwarded, carriage paid for, to an approved Testing Authority in time to be
tested two at 7 days and one at 28 days and the remaining one at the discretion of the
Employer. No cube shall be dispatched within 3 days of casting. Copies of all work Cube
Test results shall be forwarded to the Employer within one week after test and one shall be
retained on site office file.
If the strength required above are not attained, and maintained throughout the carrying out of
the contract, the contractor will be required to increase the proportion of cement and/or
substitute better aggregate so as to give concrete which does comply with the requirements of
the contract .The contractor may be required to remove and replace at his own cost any
concrete which fails to attain the required strength as ascertained by Work Cube Tests.
The contractor must allow in his rates for concrete test cubes for all expenses in connection
with the preparation and conveyance to the Testing Laboratory and of test cubes and no claim
in respect of his failure to do so will be entertained.
Piling and Other Special works.
Piling will be carried out using an approved procedure throughout. The actual length and
numbers of piles required at any location will be approved by the Employer on the basis of
the final agreed design data; and payment made for departures form the assumed tender
design quantities on the basis of the difference of quantities times the schedule variation
rates. Tender Prices shall include for all necessary casings, pumping, depreciation of piling
machines, materials, transportation and others.
Where special ground conditions exist which do not allow for any of the designs in an
original or modified form special types of foundations may be employed which will be paid
for on the basis of schedule rates where applicable. To this extent the schedule variation rates
for concrete, steel and excavations shall apply throughout irrespective of special conditions.
Where ordered by the Employer, the contractor shall carry out pile bearing and uplift test for
all types of pile generally in accordance with the method given in the BSCP-2004. Such tests
shall be carried out to determine the ultimate uplift and bearing values.

Following special requirement shall additionally be considered:
(A) Construction Joints

Construction joints shall be permitted only at the position predetermined on the Drawings or
as instructed on the site by the Employer. In general they shall be perpendicular to the lines of
principal stresses and shall be located at points of minimum shear, viz. vertically at, or near,
mid-span of slabs, ribs and beams.
Suspended concrete slabs are generally to be cast using alternate bay construction in bays not
exceeding 15.000M in length. No two adjacent bays are to be cast within a minimum period
of 48 hours of each other. The joints between adjacent bays are to positions agreed with the
Employer.
Joints shall be water tight and use of water bars and appropriate sealant shall be specified in
all cases.
(B) Construction Bays

The Contractor shall agree with the Employer, prior to the commencement of concreting,
upon the sequence of placing concrete and the positions of vertical and horizontal joints,
whether shown or not on the drawings.
In general, slabs in excess of 6 meters in length and/or width and walls exceeding 6
meters in length shall not be poured in one operation and subsequent adjacent shall not be
concreted within 7 days. The maximum are of any pour shall be 100-sq mm.
In the light of experience the Employer may consider the above pour size limits to be
excessive and will have the authority to reduce them.
Expansion joints shall be fully detailed on construction drawings for approval.
Expansion joints shall be filled with bitumen-impregnated fiberboard to full depth and
width. The infilling will be permitted to be used as permanent formwork only for the
second casting. Where the fibreboard is exposed it shall be cutback for a depth of at least
2cm from the chambered edge, filled and pointed with a resilient liquid polysulfide
polymer sealant to the manufactures instructions.
Where dowel bars are indicated on the Drawings forming part of a joint, they shall be
held securely horizontal and perpendicular to the joint during concreting.
(C) Formwork
All, “forms, falsework or shuttering” shall include all temporary moulds forming the
concrete to the required shape and size together with any special lining that may be
required to produce the concrete finish specified.
A. All timber for formwork, falsework and centering shall be sound wood, well seasoned
and free from lose knots, shakes, large cracks, warping and other defects. Before use
on the work, it shall be properly stacked and protected from injury from any source.
Any timber which becomes badly warped or cracked prior to the placing of concrete
shall be rejected.

B. If the contractor proposes to use steel shuttering, he shall submit to the Employer
dimensioned drawings of all the component parts, and give details of the manner in
which he proposes to assemble or use them. Steel shuttering will only be permitted if
it is sturdy in construction and if the manner of its use is approved by the Employer.
C. Struts and props shall, where required by the Employer, be fitted with double
hardwood wedges or other approved devices so that the moulds may be adjusted as
required and eased gradually when required. Wedges shall be spiked in to position
and any adjusting devices locked before the concrete is cast.
D. All forms shall be wood and shall be built grout- tight and of sufficient rigidity to
prevent distortion due to the pressure of the concrete and other loads incidents to the
construction operations. Forms shall be constructed and maintained so as to prevent
warping and the opening of joints due to shrinkage of the timber.
E. All formwork shall be approved by the Employer before concrete is placed within it.
The contractor shall if required by the Employer provide the latter with copies of his
calculations of strength and stability of the formwork or false work but not
withstanding the Employer’s approval of these calculations, nothing shall relieve the
contractor of his responsibilities for the safety or adequacy of the formwork.
Form of construction joints
F. Where permanent or temporary joints are to be made in horizontal or inclined members,

stout stopping off boards shall be securely fixed across the mould to form a grouting joint.
The form of the permanent construction joints shall be as shown on the Drawings.
G. Where reinforcement or water stops pass through the face of construction joint the
stopping off boards shall be drilled so that the bars or water stop can pass through or the
board shall be made in section with a half round indentation in the joint faces for each bar
so that when placed, the board is neat and accurate fit and not grout leaks from the stops.
H. The forms shall be restrained and unyielding and shall be so designed that the finished
concrete will conform to the proper dimensions and contours. The design of the forms
shall take into account the effect of vibration of concrete as it is placed.
I. All sharp edges inside the forms shall be provided with 25mm triangular fillets, unless
otherwise shown on the drawings or directed by the Employer.
J. Openings for the inspection and cleaning of the inside of shuttering for walls, piers and
columns shall be formed in such a way that they can be closed conveniently before
commencing.
K. When concrete is to be deposited to a steeper slope than 45 deg. to the horizontal, top
forms shall be used to enable the concrete to be properly compacted.
L. Form, clamps, tie bolts and anchors shall be used to fasten forms. The use of wire ties to
hold forms in position during placing of concrete will not be permitted. Tie bolts and
clamps shall be positive in action and of sufficient strength and number to prevent

spreading or springing of the forms. They shall be of such type that no metal part shall be
left within the specified concrete.
M. The cavities shall be filled with grout mortar and the surface left sound, smooth, even and
uniform in colour, All forms form for outside surfaces shall be constructed with stiff
wales at right angles to the studs and all form clamps shall extend through and fasten such
wales.
N. The shapes, strength, rigidity, water tightness, and surface smoothness of re-used forms
shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged timber must be replaced. Forms,
which are unsatisfactory in any respect, shall not be re-used.
O. All forms shall be treated with approved mould or similar oil or be soaked with water
immediately before placing concrete to prevent adherence of concrete. Any materials
which adhere to or discolour concrete shall not be used.
P. All forms shall be set and maintained true to the line designed until the concrete is
sufficiently hardened. Forms shall remain in place for periods which shall be as specified
hereinafter. When forms appears to be unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during
the placing of concrete, the Employer shall order the work stopped until the defect have
been corrected.
Release Agent
Q. Only approved chemical release agents, mould creams (emulsions of water in oil) or oils
containing a proportion of surfactant not exceeding 2% will be permitted. Water-soluble
emulsion and oils without surfactant shall not be used. Oil based release agents shall be
applied at a ratio of 7m2/litre, 24 hours in advance of concreting, preferably by spray or
roller. Chemical release agents shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
R. The greatest care must be taken that all sawdust shavings, ships and debris is removed
from the formwork before concrete is placed in position and the necessary arrangements
must be made by leaving out a board in the bottom of the formwork or otherwise
required.
S. The erection, easing, striking and removal of all formwork must be done under the
personal supervision of a competent foreman, and any damage occurring through fault
formwork or its incorrect removal shall be made good by the contractor at his own
expense.
T. All projecting fins on the concrete surfaces after removal of formwork shall be chipped
off, and any voids or honey combing to any surface made good to the requirements of the
Employer.
U. No patching of the concrete is to be done before inspection of the concrete surfaces as

stripped.
V. Traffic or loading must not be allowed on the concrete until the concrete is sufficiently
matured and in no case shall traffic or loading be of such magnitude as to cause deflection
or other movement in the formwork or damage to the concrete members. Where directed

by the Employer props may be required to be left in position under slabs and other
members for greater period than those specified hereinafter.
W. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility that no distortion, damage overloading or undue

deflection is caused to the structure by the striking of formwork, but the Employer
reserves the right to delay the time of striking in the interest of the work. Formwork shall
not be struck until the concrete has sufficiently hardened. Approval of the Employer shall
not relieve the Contractor of his liability to make good any concrete damage by premature
removal or collapse of forms. In no circumstances shall forms be struck until the concrete
reaches cube strength of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at
the time of striking. The following times given in days (24 hours) are the absolute
minimum that will permitted:-
Striking Times
Forms Ordinary Portland Rapid Hardening

Cement Cement
Walls, Columns (unloaded 2 2
Beam sides
Slabs – props left under 7 2
Beams soffits – props left 14 5
under
Slabs – props 14 5
Beams – props 18 8
The time for removal of forms as set out shall not apply to slabs and beams spanning
more than 10 metres. For such spans appropriate times shall be recommended or
advised by the Employer.
The periods given above are based on the removal of all props and formwork using
ordinary Portland Cement under average weather conditions. Adverse weather
conditions or different cement may cause the above periods to be increased. Should
the contractor wish to make use of reduced striking time then he must satisfy the
Employer that the strength of the concrete at such time and the structural system is
adequate to withstand the dead and imposed loads applied to it. Before making use of
reduces striking times the Employer’s agreement must be obtained in writing.
Finishes
Saw finish- The shuttering shall consist of saw boards, sheet metal or other materials to give
a support to the concrete. Appearance is not of primary importance for this class of
formwork. It shall be used for surface against which backfill or further concrete is to be
placed. The treatment of the shuttering or concrete to provide a bond for the further surface
treatment of the concrete shall be directed or approval by the Employer. Masonry or similar
material used for facing concrete shall only be used as shuttering where directed by the
Employer.
The Employer’s approval shall be obtained to the use of blocks or slabs when used as
permanent forms in foundation and other similar location.

A. Wrought finish.
The shuttering shall be wrought with boards arranged in a uniform pattern. Alternatively,
plywood, metal panels or other approved materials may be used, subject to the
Employer’s approval. Joints between boards or panel shall be horizontal or vertical
unless otherwise directed. This shuttering shall give a good finish to the concrete and will
normally be used for all faces where a high-class finish is not necessary.
B. Fair-faced finishing.
Standard steel panels, hardboard and boarding will not be permitted for the face of this
shuttering. The shuttering shall be faced with resin-bonded plywood, faced with matt
finished plastic or equivalent material in large sheets, which shall be arranged in an
approved uniform pattern. Whenever possible, joints between sheets shall be arranged to
coincide with features such as stills, jambs or changed in direction or the surface areas of
formwork between features in walls, between beams in horizontal surface or other similar
arrangement, shall where possible, be divided into panels of uniform dimensions, without
the use of make-up pieces. All joint between panels on vertical or inclined surfaces shall
be vertical or horizontal unless otherwise directed by the Architect; those on horizontal
surfaces shall be at right angles and wherever possible they shall be parallel to walls and
beams. The shuttering shall give a high class finish to the concrete with no lips, fins, or
irregularities, and shall give a completely true and even surface, which will be
prominently exposed to view where good alignment is of special importance. It is for use
in both in-situ and pre-cast concrete.
C. Texture finish.
This is an all-over finish of high quality as may be directed by the Employer. Sample
panels may be constructed on site prior to commencement of the works, to compare
different textures. The shuttering shall be such that the concrete finish give a surface that
will be prominently exposed to view a good appearance and alignment are of special
importance.
D. Where other finishes, apart from the above are specified, the contractor shall provide a
sample panel at least 2.4m x 1.2m in vertical surface area including a typical horizontal
and vertical joint in the shuttering. The sample panel shall be construction techniques that
the contractor proposes for the actual works. This sample when approved will form the
standard for the entire works. All unsuccessful samples shall be removed from the site.
Floor Finish
E. Where “tamped finish” is specified it will be obtained by an edge board to the Employer’s
approval. Board works are so be made to a true pattern and will generally be at right
angles to the traffic flow. Haphazard or diagonal tamping will not be accepted.

3.19.6 STRUCTURAL STEEL
QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

(A) The quality of all materials and workmanship used in the execution of this
contract shall comply with the requirements of the most recent issues of the
following British Standards and code of practice, including all amendments.
B.S 4 (part 1) Hot Rolled Sections

B.S 4 (part 2) Hot Rolled Hollow Sections
B.S 449 The use of Structural Steel in Buildings
B.S 638 Arc welding plant equipment and accessories
B.S 639 Covered Electrodes for manual Metal Arch
Welding of Mild Steel and Medium tensile steel
B.S 916 Black Bolts, Screws and Nuts
B.S 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip
B.S 1775 Steel Tubes for mechanical, structural and General
Engineering Purposes
B.S 2994 Cold rolled Steel Sections
B.S 4190 ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts
B.S 4320 Metal washers for general engineering purposes
B.S 4360 Weldable structural steel
B.S 4848 Hot rolled structural steel sections
B.S 4872 Approved testing of welds when welding
Procedures approval is not required
B.S 5135 General requirements for the Metal Arc Welding
of Structural steel
B.S 5493 Protection of iron and steel structures from
Corrosion
BS 729 Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel.
TOLERANCES
All members shall be fabricated with a tolerance in length of + 0mm and -3 mm,
all shall not deviate from straightness by more than 1 in 400.
The allowance for angular twist shall be (3 + 0.6L) in the length of the member
under consideration in metres. Twist shall be measured by placing the member as
fabricated against a flat surface measuring the differences between the two corners
of the opposite end.
The above tolerances shall be adhered to unless otherwise specified on the

Engineer’s drawing.
(A) Materials
All metals and metal work components whether fabricated on or offsite shall conform to
the requirements of the relevant British Standards and other standards to the approval by
the Employer.
Metalwork articles shall have a first class finish, and be free from scale, rust, damage or
other defects.

Components shall be properly assembled and joined in a neat and functional manner.
Welded connections shall be ground off as necessary to present a clean smooth finish
without detriment to the strength of the connection.
Particular attention shall be given to the protection of metalwork from degradation caused
by the environment in which it is to be used. This shall be accomplished by galvanizing,
surface coating or such other treatment suitable for the metalwork under consideration.
(1) Mild Steel

Mild steel shall comply with the relevant standard and shall be galvanized for parts,
which are not accessible, or in open air, or come in contact with moisture. All other
parts, except reinforcement to concrete, shall be primed as described under the Clause
for painting.
(2) Copper
Copper and copper alloys shall comply with the British Standards and approved
standards and approved standards relevant to the form and use for which the material
is intended.
Copper components shall be placed so that in no case shall they come in direct contact
with aluminium nor shall it be possible for water or condensation to pass off copper
on to aluminium.
(3) Zinc
Zinc sheet shall be of good colour, free from cracks, dross, overlaps, scales and any
other defects, which might be detrimental to its working properties. All zinc shall be
at least 0.8 mm thick. No iron or copper shall be used in contact with zinc.
(4) Aluminium Sheeting

Aluminium for profiled roof sheeting and flashing shall be manufactured from alloy
in hard temper conforming to BS 1470 Ns3 Specification not less than 0.7 mm
thickness and with a colour coasted surface finish. Profiled sheeting shall conform to
BS CP 5427.
Fastenings shall be by means of aluminium hook bolts or other approved fixes in

accordance with BS CP 143 Part 1 and recommendations of the manufacturer.
Laps shall be sealed as necessary.
(5) Galvanizing
Where steel members are specified to be galvanized they shall be so treated after all
cutting, drilling, punching and removal of burrs has been carried out.
Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dip process and shall consist of a coating of
zinc weighing not less than 610 g/sq .m of surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth,
clean, of uniform thickness and free from defects. The preparation for galvanizing
itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the steel.
The testing of the zinc coating on galvanized articles shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 729.

(B) Steel External Doors

Steel external doors shall be fabricated from steel sheet covering a framework of steel
angles and galvanized after fabrication. Door frames shall also be galvanized steel. All
external doors shall be insulated and fitted with panic latches, which are lockable from
outside.
External doors shall be effectively sealed to reduce the ingress of dust as far as
practicable, using heavy duty seals which shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of
five years from date of commissioning. Doors and seals shall be designed so that
replacement of worn seals can be achieved easily on site.
(C) Workmanship
All plates and sections shall be true to form, free from twist and straightened before any
fabrication work is started on them. Each piece of work shall be distinctly marked before
dispatch in accordance with a marking diagram to be provided by the Contractor.
3.19.7 BLOCK WORK
A) Materials
(1) Cement
Cement shall be Sulphate–resisting and of a quality as described in the section for
concrete. The clause in that section referring to cement storage shall also apply.
(2) Sands an aggregates
Fine and course aggregates for forming blocks shall be aggregates from natural sources of
hard, durable material or other approved, free from deleterious substances. Sand shall be
graded 2 mm down and coarse aggregate shall be as specified for concrete.
(3) Lime
Lime for mortar shall be hydrated gray-stone lime in accordance with BS 890 for
hydrated calcium limes. Magnesia lime shall both be used in mortar for brickwork below
the damp-proof course.
The Contractor shall forward copies of Manufacturers certificates to the Employer, which
in addition to certifying compliance with BS 890 shall give details of the type of lime. If
lime is delivered as lime putty, the certificate shall state whether quicklime or hydrated
lime was used in its manufacture.
All lime shall be efficiently protected against deterioration during transport and whilst
stored on site. Different type or brands of lime shall be stored separately in dry
conditions in a manner that allows it to be used in the order of delivery.
When lime putty is to be used the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Employer of
his arrangement for transport handling and storage. Precautions shall be taken to prevent
contamination and drying out of lime putty stored on site. Lime putty made from
quicklime should mature for at least 14 days before being used. Where it is made from
hydrated lime (powder), lime putty should stand for at least sixteen hours before use.
(4) Concrete Blocks

Concrete blocks shall be solid or hollow blocks to comply with the relevant standard as
previously mentioned and shall be solid hard, true to size and shape and sharp arises in

accordance with Ministry of Works Standard Specification for Metric sized concrete
block for building dated September, 1972.
They shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer or manufactured on site in

approved block making machines. The mix used shall be less than (1:9) by volume and
maximum size of aggregate shall be 12mm size. The blocks on removal from the
machine shall be laid on edge or racks under sheds erected by the Contractor and left for
3 days during which period they shall be kept constantly wet.
After this initial period they shall be placed on edge in the open racks and protected by
sacking or other approved covering and kept wet for further 5 days.
Thereafter the blocks shall be left in the same position without wetting for a further 20
days. No blocks shall be used in the works until 28 days old and until samples have been
tested approved by the Employer.
The Contractor shall ensure that the blocks are stocked separately in their respective
categories in the structure in the position shown on the drawings.
Any stone for walling shall be good hard local stone equal in standard and quality. Stone
shall be squared, dressed and joints chisel dressed on the face. Stone to receive render,
shall be so dressed to reduce dubbing-out to a minimum.
The coursed stone shall both be less than 150mm deep and 305 mm long. All stone shall
be laid on their natural or quarry bed lines.
Block Laying
All blocks shall be kept completely filled with mortar. The thickness of the horizontal
mortar joints shall not exceed 40mm to every four joints. Where block work is to be
plastered or rendered, joints shall be struck off and left rough to provide a key.
Movement joints shall be provided where required. They shall incorporate a joint filling
strip and sealant Gaps in movement joints shall be left free from debris and shall not be
pointed with mortar.
Block work shall be built with three courses to 600 mm in a uniform manner, in truly
level courses and truly vertical or battered. Corners and other advanced work shall be
racked back and not raised above the general level more than one meter. Toothing shall
be used only where provision has to be made for a future extension. Both leaves of cavity
shall be built up simultaneously. Galvanized flat twist wall ties of an approved pattern
shall be bedded with a slight fall towards the outer face and shall be provided in alternate
courses at intervals of 900mm and staggered horizontally. Additional ties shall be used
near the sides of all openings at the rate of one for each 300mm of opening height. The
cavity shall be kept clear of mortar droppings and rubbish, and the inside mortar joints
shall be finished flush as the work proceeds. Cavities shall be 50-75 mm in width.
Both holes shall be built into the external skin of cavity walls in the form of sand filled
vertical joints at 1m centres and are to be racked out on completion. Weep holes shall be
laced over all lintels.
Walls shall be constructed with an approved metal reinforcement every second course.
Additional horizontal reinforcement shall be provided in bed joints in walls for each 2

courses above and below all openings greater than 300mm wide. The reinforcement shall
extend a minimum of 900mm beyond the opening on both sides.
Below ground level and at the jambs of all openings, the hollow concrete blocks shall be
filled with weak concrete, well taped down and carried from base slab to top of such
openings. Cavities shall be kept clear of mortar droppings or other debris, by the use of
lifting batters or other suitable means.
Where external block work abuts concrete surfaces and where indicated elsewhere, the
blocks shall be tied to the concrete every second course with adjustable galvanized steel
ties fixed in slots cast into the concrete.
Concrete abutting external block work shall be coated with two coats of bitumen paint.
Holes and chases shall be cut out or left in the walls as required and provision shall be
made for making good to the satisfaction of the Employer.
On completion, all block work shall be cleaned down and mortar dropping and other
marks removed. Defective blocks or workmanship shall be made good.
(5) Reinforcement
When required, vertical reinforcement for hollow concrete blocks shall be high yield
deformed steel conforming to BS 4449 requirements. The minimum to be provided shall
be 10mm diameter bars at 150mm centres.
Lap lengths for vertical reinforcement shall be a minimum of 50 diameters.
Horizontal bed joint reinforcement shall be made from hard drawn steel wire to
BS4482 consisting of two wires with diameter a minimum of 5 mm and separated by
cross wires welded at 304-mm centers. The main wires shall be at 50 mm centers and
160mm centers for 100 and 200mm block work respectively. Alternatively, approved
expanded mesh reinforcement may be used.
(6) Lintels
The block work over all openings in walls shall be supported on reinforced concrete
grade 25 lintels.
All lintels shall be the same width as the block work into which they are being built.
Building in Frames
Openings in masonry for doors, widows, air conditioning units’ ventilators and fans
etc. shall be properly marked out and built in as the work proceeds with approved
anchors. The fittings shall be propped and strutted where required.
The back surface of steel and galvanized fittings shall be coated with a bituminous
paint before fixing.
All fittings shall be bedded in 1:3 sand cement mortar 12mm thick.
Precautions during Inclement Weather

Newly laid masonry work shall be protected from the harmful effects of sunshine,
rain, drying wind, running or surface water and shocks. Any work that may be

damaged shall be taken out and pointed as directed by the Employer. Any costs
incurred in carrying out such remedial work shall be borne by the Contractor.
Damp Proof Course (DPC)

A damp proof course shall be laid in walls, above ground level so as to exclude rising
moisture.
Damp-proof courses shall be from one of the following materials:
(1) Lead and copper DPC complying with the requirements of BS 743.
(2) Asbestos base bitumen DPC complying with the requirement of BS 743 Type C.
(3) Asbestos base lead cored bitumen DPC complying with requirements of BS 743
Type F.
Damp-Proof Membrane
An approved bitumen/PVC waterproof membrane shall be placed on the blinding
under concrete floor slabs, to exclude rising moisture. The membrane shall be taken
up walls and lapped with the wall DPC.
All floor finishes shall be protected from damage by following trades and other causes
and any damage, howsoever caused, shall be made good by the Contractor at his own
expense to the satisfaction of the Employer.
3.19.8 FLOOR LAYING
(A) Screeded Beds

Concrete floors, which are required to be surfaced with screed, shall have a roughened
surface, produced by hacking and wire brushing. The roughened concrete floor shall be
cleaned, wetted preferably overnight, the surplus water removed and 1:1 cement/sand
grout brushed into the surface, keeping just ahead of the screeded bed. The screeded bed
shall be 40mm thick and shall be well compacted and leveled with a screeding board and
steel trowelled smooth. If the screed is the finished surface, it should be treated with an
approved silicate of soda solution hardener to prevent dusting. The screed shall be mixed
in the proportions of 1:2:4 (cement, sand, and 10mm-pea shingle) by volume with the
minimum quantity of water necessary to give a good hard smooth, steel trowelled finish.
The section hereof concerning concrete applies, but the sand shall satisfy the
requirements of BS 1199.
Rigid screed battens shall be fixed on continuous beds of mortar to prevent movement
when screeds are being laid and compacted. The screed batten shall be fixed to true lines
and levels.
The bay sizes shall not exceed 15 square meters and the length of any one bay shall be
limited to 1.5 times the width. The bays shall be laid alternately, ie. in chequerboard
fashion, a minimum of 24 hours being allowed to elapse between the laying of adjacent
bays.
The bays shall be separated by strips of hard plastic or other suitable material.
Screeded beds shall be cured for at least seven days, using polythene sheeting or other
approved method.

Floor finish shall be terrazzo, granito tiles and ceramic tiles mixture as approved
3.19.9 CABLE DUCTS, DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE DISPOSAL
(A) Cable Ducts

Cable ducts may be constructed of in-situ concrete or pre-cast concrete duct. In each
case, the material shall be in accordance with relevant sections of this Specification.
All cable ducts shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients between cable pits, as
directed. All ducts shall be kept clear from earth, debris and other obstructions during
and after laying.
(B) Drainage
All drainage shall be designed for common use with cable ducts, in accordance with
approved standards and Codes of Practice.
All drains shall be laid in straight lines and regular gradients as described or directed.
Great care shall be exercised in setting out and determining the level of the drains. All
drains shall be kept clear from earth, debris, superfluous cement and other obstructions
during and after laying.
Underground drains shall be provided with inspection well at appropriate sections and
connected to common underground infiltration tank.
C) Sanitary Fittings
Wash hand basins shall be supported on cantilever brackets cut and pinned to the walls or
screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards, which shall be plugged and screwed to
the walls. They shall be provided with 35mm bottle traps with brass cleaning eye and
lining soldered on, or alternatively, a similar PVC fitting.
Cistern supporting brackets shall be screwed to 30mm timber chambered backboards,

which shall be plugged and screwed to the walls. Overflow pipes from WC cisterns shall
be 20mm bore.
Glazed ware shall be of best quality and type and manufacture approved by the Employer.
Fittings shall be securely fixed in an approved manner. Cisterns shall be plastic wherever
possible.
D) Overhead Reservoir water tank

The contractor shall provide for an overhead plastic water tank with a capacity of not less
than 2,500 litres.
3.19.10 PAINTING AND DECORATING
Paints for priming, undercoat and finishing shall be ready mixed paints of the best quality for
the intended use and comply with BS 6150. Paint for use on concrete or block work shall be
of a type specially prepared for this purpose.
All work shall be properly cleaned and rubbed won between each coat in a way, and using
materials, recommended by the manufacturers of the paints concerned. No coat shall be
commenced until the Employer has passed the previous coat a dry, hard and satisfactory.

Each coat shall be of a distinct colour from the preceding one and all colours shall be
approved by the Employer. Spray painting will not be permitted except for internal faces of
walls and ceiling. All other paint shall be thoroughly brushed into and completely cover the
surface.
All timber required to be built into bedded or fixed against brickwork, masonry or concrete
shall be given two priming coats and one undercoat on the concealed surfaces.
All woodwork shall have knots treated with two coats of a knotting solution and then painted
with aluminium priming paint prior to priming the complete surface. The wood shall then be
primed, stopped and painted with two undercoats and one high gloss-finishing coat.
Hard wood, which is not required to be painted, shall be made perfectly smooth, prepared and
oiled twice with linseed oil. Alternatively, it shall be stained and wash-polished, or treated
with two coats of an approved varnish.
Bitumastic painted surfaces and coated pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove grease,
dirt or other deleterious matter, and then painted with one coat of sealer, one coat of leafing
aluminium, one coat of undercoating paint and one coat of high gloss finish.
When so described or directed, internal surfaces of fair-faced block work, plastered walls and
the soffits of concrete roofs shall be prepared and painted with one coat of antisuction primer,
followed by one undercoat and two finishing coat of PVA based plastic emulsion paint.
Exterior surfaces for fair faced block work walls and concrete columns at the new buildings
shall be prepared and painted with two coats of an approved stone paint.
At the completion of all works, the Contractor shall clean down the premises; wash paving
and steps; wash and leather down wall tiling, etc. Clean all sanitary fittings; touch up paint
work; examine all roofs and leave watertight; clean out all pipes and leave the whole of the
premises in a clean, sound and perfect condition ready for immediate occupation.
3.19.11 SECURITY FENCING AND GATES
(A) Security Fencing

Chain link gauge 8 or equivalent fences shall be constructed in accordance with BS 1722,
Part 10 and shall be of such manufacture that when any one segment is cut, remaining
segments within the pattern retain their rigidity. Overall height of the fencing shall be
2.4metrs above ground level, excluding barbed wire. Posts of the fences shall be of steel
structure with concrete block foundations. The perimeter fences shall be earthed
independently of the main switchyard earthing with an adequate earthing rod at every 5
supporting posts of the fences.
The posts shall have cranked tops set at 45 o to the posts, to which shall be attached three
stands of galvanized barbed wire to BS 4102. Barbed wires shall be strained between
straining posts with eyebolts and fixed to intermediate posts with stirrup wires. Intermediate
posts shall be provided at centres not exceeding 3 meters. Corner posts and struts shall be
provided at all ends, corners, adjacent to gate posts and at intervals not exceeding 35 meters.
All fence fittings shall be galvanized.

(B) Gate
A gate shall comply with BS 1722, Part 10 and shall be constructed of galvanized chain link
mesh on a galvanized extension arms. Separate man gate shall be provided beside the main
gate.
The gate shall be fitted with a vertical drop bolt on each leaf, a sliding bar lock with padlock
eyes and a padlock to prevent movement of the sliding bar lock. All these fittings shall be
galvanized. The vertical drop bolts are to drop into galvanized steel tubes cast into the road,
to secure the gate when in both closed and open positions. Gateposts shall be made from
galvanized steel RHS or tubular section shall be capped and set in concrete in the ground.
Gate hinges (pivots) shall be heavily galvanized.
3.19.12 ANCILLARY CIVIL ENGINEERING AND BUILDING WORKS
General
The ancillary civil engineering and building works for the Project are classified as follows:-
(1) Air conditioning and ventilating works.
(2) Fire safety facilities, and
(3) Control room at Kutus.
(1) Air Conditioning and Ventilating services
Air Conditioning
Supervisors’ office, Control room, Library, Communications equipment and battery
room shall be air-conditioned.
Air conditioning shall be provided in the form of self-contained air conditioning units,
in a designed capacity for proper operation and maintenance of communications
equipment proposed by the Contract.
The air conditioning units shall be individually thermostatically controlled to maintain

internal conditions at 20 to 22 degrees centigrade.
Mechanical Ventilation
Supply and extract ventilation shall be provided to serve the toilet/wash rooms.
Supply air handling plants shall consist of a fresh air intake louvers, insect screen,
filter and fan.
Extract ventilation shall be provided by means of wall mounted fans, roof extract units
or ducted systems with louvered discharges to atmosphere.
Design
All air conditioning and ventilation systems shall be designed for continuous
operation. Plant shall be arranged to facilitate maintenance and future replacement of
equipment.
The Contractor shall calculate heat gains and losses under the local conditions, taking
into account solar radiation, thermal transmittance through roofs, walls, floors and

windows, fresh air requirements, heat emission from installed electrical equipment
and lighting, personnel, infiltration and any other sources.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the heat transfer coefficients for
all materials used in building construction. In the event of any change in materials,
design or method of building construction, the Contract shall at all times be
responsible for rechecking the design of all system to ensure that they are capable of
meeting the specified design requirements.
Self contained room air conditioners shall be of the through-the-wall pattern and
complete with adjustable grilles, heavy gauze zinc coated stove enamelled sheet steel
casing with single or two colour decorative finish.
The casing and position shall be such as to protrude not more than 250mm into the
conditioned space and not external projection beyond the building line will be
permitted other than the fixing of the condenser cooling air grille.
Compressors shall be of the fully hermetic type, fitted with resilient mountings and
complete with thermal overload protection and starting relays.
Evaporators shall be manufactured of copper tube with copper or aluminium fins

mechanically bonded. The evaporator fan shall be of double inlet double width type
and complete with continuously rated totally enclosed electric motor.
Filters shall be of the washable type, suitably positioned for easy access for cleaning.
Automatic control by means of an integral thermostat shall be provided together with
the safety controls to prevent excessive cooling.
(2) Fire Safety Facilities
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided under this Contract. Portable, wall
mounted, hand held extinguishers shall be 5.5kg pressurized control discharge BCF
units.
The body of the extinguisher shall be seamless, welded and brazed as appropriate.
The extinguisher shall be capable of being released by means of a lever-operated
valve provided with a safety pin.
Extinguishers shall be capable of controlled partial discharge.
The type shall be of that recharge unit that is locally available.
The extinguishers shall be wall mounted and attached in a manner affording quick
release from the supporting bracket. They shall be installed so that the top of the
extinguisher is not more than 1.5meters above the floor. In no case shall the clearance
between the bottom of the extinguisher and the floor be less than 0.1 meter. The
extinguishers shall be positioned so that the instructions for operation face outwards.
Automatic control by means of an integral thermostat shall be provided together with

the safety controls to prevent excessive cooling.

(3) Control rooms
Kutus Substation Control Room
At the new Kutus Substation, the control room shall be at least 384m2; and shall house
the following;
§ Circuit breaker control and protection relay panels room

§ Battery room
§ Battery chargers and distribution boards
§ Communication equipment
§ Fully furnished Office with a television set complete with aerial
§ A washroom ,WC, Urinal and Bath
§ Equipment/Utility store
§ Fully furnished Kitchen
§ Library/Records room
3.20 TESTS AT THE SITE
During the construction and after the installation of each item of equipment under the Section
2, tests shall be performed, as specified herein, to establish the accuracy of the assembly and
to prove the adequacy of the materials and the workmanship. All tests and tests procedures
shall be approved by the Employer.
The Contractor shall perform the following tests of each subsection, for all items where
applicable, to ensure that the equipment has been correctly installed, all necessary
adjustments and settings made, and that the item is in sound condition to run under load.
(A) Inspection during erection of equipment
(a) Appearance check of all equipment

(b) Calibration of pressure gauges
(c) Protective relay check
(d) Oil tightness check and gas leakage tests
(e) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
(B) Test after the installation of equipment
1. Substation Switchgear.
a. Circuit breakers
i. Closing and opening operation test
ii. Trip-free operation test
iii. Manual operation test
iv. Remote operation test
v. Main Contact resistance test
vi. Breaker timing ( closing time and opening time )
vii. Measurement of insulation resistance

b. Disconnecting switches
i. Operation test (manual and remote)
ii. Check of interlock mechanism
iii. Measurement of insulation resistance
iv. Main Contact resistance
c. Lightning arresters
i. Measurement of insulation resistance
d. Current transformers
ii. Ratio test
iii. Polarity check
iv. Magnetisation curve to confirm knee point
e Voltage transformers
ii. Ratio and Polarity check.
2. Control, measuring and protective equipment
a. Control and measuring equipment

i. Relay tests
ii. Measurement of insulation resistance
iii. Sequential operation check
iv. Calibration of meters
b. Protective relaying equipment

i. Individual relay calibration and Functional tests
ii. Residual voltage (current) measurement
iii. Measurement of burden
iv. Current and voltage transformer circuits grounding point check
v. Sequential operation test at each station by primary and secondary
injection to check sensitivity and stability
vi. Station to station operation performance tests (transmission line
protective relaying equipment only).
vii. Test on Trip and alarm circuits
viii. Stability, Operation, and Sensitivity of transformer unit schemes
ix. Test of Autoreclose schemes
x. Calibration Tests on all Instruments
xi. Calibration Test on Energy meter
(3) Miscellaneous materials

a. Outdoor bus
b. Power cables
i. High voltage test
ii. Insulation resistance measurement

c. Control cables
i. Insulation resistance measurement
(C) ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall undertake to complete all works in accordance with statutory
requirements including those of:
i) The Kenya Agricultural Act - Concerning protection against soil erosion.

ii) Public Health Act – Concerning with noise, water and air quality as they relate to
human health.
iii) Chief Authority Act – Concerning the regulation of timber cutting and wasteful
destruction of trees and avoidance of damage to the public road or other
community facilities.
iv) The Local Government Act – Section 145 for preservation or protection of
wildlife and Section 163 regarding noise disturbance controls.
v) Environment Management and Coordination Act - EMCA”99, Kenya
Environmental Law and accompanying gazetted regulations.
vi) Energy Act 2007 Environmental provisions.
vii) Forest and Wildlife Act
viii) Clearance and disturbance of natural vegetation shall be kept to a minimum to
prevent habitat loss and to keep soil erosion in check.
3.21 SITE VISIT
In practising due diligence, the contractor is specifically advised to inspect the site &
terrain and be well acquainted with the actual working and other prevalent conditions,
facilities available, position of material and labour. The bidder is advised to visit and
examine the site where the plant is to be installed and its surroundings and obtain for
itself on its own responsibility all the information that may be necessary for preparing
the bid. The bidders shall ask for necessary clarifications required for clearly
understanding the scope & technical /commercial requirements of the tender from
Kplc before submitting their offer.

SECTION VI
TECHNICAL SCHEDULES

TECHNICAL SCHEDULES
PREAMBLE
1.1 The Technical Schedules shall be filled in and completed by the Bidder, and submitted
with the Bid.
1.2 All documentation necessary to evaluate whether the equipment offered is in accordance with
this Specification shall be submitted with the Bid.
1.3 All data entered in the Schedules of Technical Guarantees are guaranteed values by the
Bidder and cannot be departed from whatsoever.
1.4 All data entered in the Schedules of Informative. Data are also guaranteed values by the
Bidder. These data may only be altered following the Engineer's written consent.

SCHEDULE VI-1a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR

Sheet 1 of 4
OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR 132 kV 33 kV
Item Particulars Unit Guar. Fig Guar. Tolerance
Fig
A1 Circuit Breakers (Type __________)
Breaking Medium SF6/Vac
uum
Manufacturer
- Rated voltage kV
- Maximum service voltage kV
- Rated frequency Hz
- Rated continuous current A
- One minute power frequency
withstand voltage, dry and wet
- to earth kV rms
- across open breaker pole kV rms
- Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50

ms
- to earth kV peak
- across open breaker
- Breaking capacity at rated voltage
- symmetrical kA rms
- asymmetrical kA rms
- Making capacity kA peak
- Breaking capacity of capacitive A
current

SCHEDULE VI-1a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR Sheet 2 of 4

Item Particulars Unit Guar. Fig Tolerance
Circuit breakers continued
- Overvoltage factor for
disconnection of unloaded
transformers (without voltage
limitation by lightning arresters)
- Rated inductive current switching A
capacity
- Permissible 1 second short-time kA rms
current
- Dynamic short-time current kA peak
- Opening time, interval of time
between the instant of application
of tripping impulse to the instant
when the main contacts have m.sec.
separated in all poles
- Make time, interval of time
between the initiation of closing
operation and the instant when the
current begins to flow in the main m.sec.
circuit
- Total break time, interval of time
between the instant of application
of tripping impulse to the instant
of final arc extinction in all poles
- at 100% breaking capacity m.sec.
- under phase opposition m.sec.
- Rate of rise of recovery voltage
(RRRV) at 100% short circuit
current
- 3-phase kV/mse
c
- 1-phase
- RRRV out of phase duty kV/mse
c
- Minimum temperature rise at
rated current of main contact °C

SCHEDULE VI-1a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR Sheet 3 of 4

Item Particulars Unit Guar. Guar. Tolerance
Fig Fig
A2 Current Transformers
Manufacturer
- Rated voltage kV
- One-minute power frequency
test voltage of
- primary winding kV rms
- secondary winding kV rms
- Lightning impulse withstand kV
voltage peak
- Rated primary currents A
- Rated secondary current A
- Short-time thermal rating
- 1 second kA rms
- Short-time dynamic rating kA
peak
- Burden and accuracy class of
- measuring core
- protection core
- Instrument security factor of
the measuring core
- Accuracy limit factor of the
- protection core
A3 Voltage Transformers, Type

__________
Manufacturer
- Rated voltage kV
- Maximum service voltage kV rms
- One-minute power frequency
test voltage
- primary winding kV rms
- secondary winding kV rms
- Lightning impulse withstand kV
voltage peak
- Burden and accuracy class of
a. measuring winding
protection winding
- Ratio kV
A4 Country of Manufacture
- Cubicles
- Circuit breakers
- Current transformers
- Voltage transformers

SCHEDULE 1a: TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR

Sheet 1 of 3
Item Particulars Unit Guar. Fig Guar. Fig
A5 Disconnector (Type __________)
Manufacturer (state)
Applicable Standards (state)
Breaking Medium Air
- Rated voltage kV
- Rated continuous current Amps
- Contact Resistance (state)
-Max temperature rise under rated (state)
voltage and current
-Rated Power Frequency Withstand
Voltage
- to earth kV
- across open contacts kV
- Impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50
ms
- to earth kV peak
- across open contacts
- Breaking capacity at rated voltage
- symmetrical kA rms
Current density kA rms
-Moving Blade A/sq.mm
- Terminal pad A/sq.mm
- Contacts A/sq.mm
-Terminal connector A/sq.mm
- Breaking capacity of capacitive (state)
current
- Rated inductive current switching (state)
capacity
- Permissible 1 second short-time kA rms
current
- Dynamic short-time current kA peak

SCHEDULE 1a: TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR Sheet 2 of 2

Item Particulars Unit Guar. Fig Guar. Fig
- Auxiliary Supplies
- DC V 110 110
- AC V 240/415 240/415
- No. of spare auxiliary contacts
- disconnector 10 10
- earthing switches 5 5
- Auxiliary contacts’ current rating Amps 10 10
- Motor rating Amps
- Level of galvanisation
Padlocking facility in both open and (state)
closed position
- Tolerance (DC) % 85 - 110 85 - 110

- Degree of Protection for Control box IP 54 IP 54
- Thickness of silver coating µ
- Creepage distance mm 4495
- Operation
- Local (manual)
- Local (motorised)
- Remote (motorised)
- Interlocking with breaker (state)
(electrical/mechanical)
-Interlocking with earth switch (state)
(Mechanical)
- Position indication on control box (state)
Clearances
-between phases mm
-between phase and ground mm
Type of break (state)
Any special assembly tool (state)

SCHEDULE VI-1b INFORMATIVE DATA OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR

Sheet 1 of 3
Item Particulars Unit Data Toleranc
e
B1 Circuit Breakers
- Reference standard
- Type of breaker and designation
- Voltage drop across main contacts at mV
rated current
- Type of main contact mm
- Type of arch control device m/s
- Method of closing
- Method of tripping
- Max. percentage of recovery voltage %
across any break
- Minimum clearance between live parts
and earth, in SF6 or vacuum mm
- Min distances between phases

SCHEDULE VI-1b INFORMATIVE DATA, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR Sheet 2 of 3

Item Particulars Unit Data Toleranc
e
- Number of opening operations
permissible before inspection
and maintenance of contacts, gas
treatment etc.
- at rated current
- at maximum short circuit current
For SF6 breakers
- Normal gas density for SF6 circuit
breaker (represented by gas pressure)
- at 20°C Bar
- at 40°C Bar
- Minimum gas density for safe operation
- at 20°C Bar
- at 40°C Bar
- Quantity of gas required per 3-pole kg
breaker
- Operating pressure of relief device Bar
- Method of monitoring pressure and
temperature compensation
- Max. permissible dew point temp. °C
- Max. permissible acidity level
- Max. permissible leak rate %/year
For vacuum breakers
- Vacuum in break chamber torr
- Max. permissible leak rate %
For all breakers
- Control voltage V DC
- Type of operating device
- Motor voltage
- AC of DC
- Max. permissible service voltage V
- Min. service voltage V
- Starting current of motor
- Power consumption of motor
- When starting W
- When running W
- Power consumption of
- Closing coil W
- Trip coil W
- Heater W

SCHEDULE VI-1b INFORMATIVE DATA, OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR Sheet 3 of 3

Item Particulars Unit Data Tolerance
- Auxiliary switch
- Rupturing current at 110 V DC A
- Number of free NO contacts
- Number of free NC contacts
- Test voltage 50Hz, 1 min. V
Manufacturer's of:
- Support insulators
- Breaker insulators
- Operating mechanism
NOTE
- In addition to the characteristics listed
above, the following information shall
be given for all switchgear:
- Layout and overall dimensions
drawings
- descriptions
B2 Earthing Switches
- Type of isolating switch
- Min. creepage distance (live parts to mm
earth)
- Min. isolating distance (clearance mm
between open contacts)
- Material of contact surface
- Total contact pressure
- Type of operating device
- weight of earthing switch
B3 Current Transformers
- Type designation
- Overall dimensions
- Total weight of one current transformer kg
- Type of insulation
B4 Voltage transformers
- Type designation
- Overall dimensions
- Total weight of one current transformer kg

SCHEDULE VI 3a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, CONTROL SYSTEM

Sheet 1 of 1
SUBSTATION CONTROL SYSTEM (SCS)
Item Particulars Unit Guar. Fig
a.1 Control system response and update time under "moderate
load" conditions
The control system shall be designed to yield the following
response and update times under "moderate load" conditions
- Time taken to completely refresh data held with the SCS:
a. maximum s
b. average s
- Time taken to carry out a complete status check of all
indications and alarms
a. maximum s
b. average s
- The time between selection and display of a VDU
diagram fully updated from the existing main computer
data base shall not exceed s
- The time between selection of a control function and
check back shall not exceed s
- The time between execution of a control function and
successful completion being displayed at the Operation
Workshop shall not exceed for
a. Circuit breaker (operating time = 250 ms) s
b. Isolator (operating time = 10s) s
- The time between the occurrence of the first change of
state/alarm and display at the Operator Workstation shall
not exceed s
- The time between selecting display of analogue
measurements and the corresponding value in the database
being displayed shall not exceed s
- The time between successive updates of the data base with
analogue measurements shall not exceed s
a. Network MW measurements s
b. Other analogue measurements s
a.2 Equipment Reliability
Mean time between failure shall be not less that:
- Each computer h
- VDU h
- Logging printer h
- System console h
- Communication system h

SCHEDULE VI 3b INFORMATIVE DATA, CONTROL SYSTEM

Sheet 1 of 1
SUBSTATION CONTROL SYSTEM (SCS)
Item Description Unit Data
b.1 General System Considerations
- Software
- Package
- Which RTU communication protocols are
supported
- Real-time database
- Package
- Is an SQL interface supported
- Database Management Tool
- Package
- Is an SQL interface supported?
- Man-machine Interface
- Package
- State type of man-machine interface software
b.2 Operator Workstation

- Type designation
- Weight kg
- Mounting arrangement
VDU
- Type designation
- Diagonal screen size mm
- Usable display area max. mm
- Weight kg
Alphanumeric Keyboard
- Type designation

SCHEDULE VI 4a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, PROTECTION ETC.

Sheet 1 of 3
CONTROL, PROTECTION, METERING, SIGNALLING
a.1 Indicating Instruments
- To be filled in for each AC and DC
Ampere meter and Voltmeter and for each
Wattmeter, VAr-meter, Frequency-meter
and other indicating instruments:
- Instrument for:
(A, V (AC), V (DC), W, etc.)
- Error %
- Max. admissible current %.IN
- Max. admissible voltage %.IN
a.2 Meters
- To be filled in for each meter
- Meter for (MWh, MVArh):
- Error with 5% load %
a.3 Metering Converters (Transducers)

- Converter for (MW, MVAr, A, etc):
- Error %
- Linearity %
- Max. admissible current for 0.5 %.IN
seconds
continuously
- Max. admissible voltage for 0.5 %.IN
seconds
- Max. admissible voltage %.IN
continuously

SCHEDULE VI 4a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, PROTECTION ETC. Sheet 2 of 3

a.4 Protection Relays
- To be copied and filled in for each type of
relay as applicable
Relay for ____________________:
- Accuracy of the adjustable tripping time sec.
- Min. possible tripping time ms
- Drop out ratio %
- Directional sensitivity (dist. relay only) %.UN
- Max. admissible current during 0.5 sec. %.IN
- Max. admissible current continuously %.IN
- Relation between tripping coil current and %
holding coil current (diff. relay only)
- Limit value of the adjustable tripping %.IN
current (O.C.R.)
- Limit value of the instantaneous tripping %.IN
current (O.C.R.)
voltage (O.V.R.)
voltage (O.V.R.)
a.4 Protection Relays

- To be copied and filled in for each type of
relay as applicable
Relay for ____________________:
- Accuracy of the adjustable tripping time sec.
- Min. possible tripping time ms
- Drop out ratio %
- Directional sensitivity (dist. relay only) %.UN
- Max. admissible current during 0.5 sec. %.IN
- Max. admissible current continuously %.IN
- Relation between tripping coil current and %
holding coil current (diff. relay only)
current (O.C.R.)
current (O.C.R.)
voltage (O.V.R.)
voltage (O.V.R.)

SCHEDULE VI 4a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, PROTECTION ETC. Sheet 3 of 3

a.5 Auxiliary Circuit Breakers
- To be filled in for each type of AC and
DC breaker:
- Min. operating voltage %.UN
- Max. operating voltage %.UN
- Drop out voltage V
- Service life (min. number of
contact operation)
a.6 Manufacturer's Name

- Control room boards
- Local relay boards
- Protection relays
- Auxiliary contactors
a.7 Country of Manufacture

- Control room boards
- Local relay boards
- Protection relays
- Auxiliary contactors

SCHEDULE VI 4b INFORMATIVE DATA, PROTECTION ETC.

Sheet 1 of 2
b.1 Indicating Instruments
To be filled in for each type of instrument:
- Type (moving coil, iron type, etc.)
- Consumption of internal resistance VA/ohm
- Size mm
b.2 Meters
To be filled in for each type of meter:
- Type
- Consumption of internal resistance VA/ohm
- Size mm
b.3 Metering Converters (Transducers)
To be filled in for each type for converter:
- Type
- Consumption, current VA
- Consumption, voltage VA
- Time constant ms
- Size mm
b.4 Alarm Annunciators
To be filled in for each annunciator panel:
- Type
- Number of annunciators
- Size of each annunciator (area of the cap) mm
- Total size of panel mm
b.5 Control Room Board
- Height mm
- Width mm
- Length mm
- Relay boards
- Height
- Width
- Length

SCHEDULE VI 4b INFORMATIVE DATA, PROTECTION ETC. Sheet 2 of 2

b.6 Protection Relays
To be copied and filled in for each relay with the
applicable items of the data below:
Relay for ____________________:
- Consumption VA
- Limit values of the adjustable tripping sec.
time
- Limit values of the adjustable sensitivity %
- Limit values of the adjustable operating %
quantity (current, voltage, frequency, etc.)
in % of normal
- Limit values of the instantaneous %
operating quintet in % of nominal value
- Size mm
For distance relay only:
- Starting impedance adjustable between ohm/ph
- Earth fault tripping current adjustable x.IN
between
b.6 Protection Relays

To be filled in for each relay with the applicable
items of the data below:
Relay for ____________________:
- Consumption VA
- Limit values of the adjustable tripping sec.
time
- Limit values of the adjustable sensitivity %
- Limit values of the adjustable operating %
quantity (current, voltage, frequency, etc.)
in % of normal
- Limit values of the instantaneous %
operating quintet in % of nominal value
- Size mm
For distance relay only:
- Starting impedance adjustable between ohm/ph
- Earth fault tripping current adjustable x.IN
between

SCHEDULE VI 5b INFORMATIVE DATA, CABLES

Sheet 1 of 2
POWER CABLES, CONTROL CABLES, CABLE RACKS
b.1 Low Voltage Cables
- Conductor material
- Insulation material
- Armouring/screen
- Protective coating
- Overall diameter of cable of biggest cable mm
- Weight of heaviest reel, including cable kg
- Size of biggest reel, diameter/width mm/mm
b.2 Control and Measuring Cables

- Armouring/screen
b.3 Special Cables

To be used for:
- Relevant informative data

SCHEDULE VI 5b INFORMATIVE DATA, CABLES

Sheet 2 of 2
POWER CABLES, CONTROL CABLES, CABLE RACKS
11 kV Voltage Cables
- Armouring/screen
- Armouring/screen
- Armouring/screen
Special Cables, Optical fibre

- Relevant informative data

SCHEDULE VI 6a TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, EARTHING

Sheet 1 of 1
EARTHING SYSTEM
Item Particulars Unit Guar. Tolerance
Fig
a.1 Resistance to Earth of Earthing Electrode
System (for each substation)
- Under the control building max. ohms Nil
- Under the switchyard max. ohms Nil
- Complete earthing system ohms Nil

SCHEDULE VI 6b INFORMATIVE DATA, EARTHING

Sheet 1 of 1
EARTHING SYSTEM
b.1 - Reference standard
- Material of earth conductor
- Max. temp of any earth conductor during 1
sec. rated phase - ground fault
- Method of interconnecting earth grid
conductors

SCHEDULE VI 7a - TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, POWER TRANSFORMERS

Sheet 1 of 7
HV POWER TRANSFORMERS Guaranteed Data
Item Description Unit 23_MVA

1. Continuous maximum rating on any tapping
when operation under the ambient
conditions specified in Section VI, Clause
4.1.3.2.1 Design criteria:
With ONAN cooling;

HV winding MVA
LV winding MVA
TV winding MVA -
With ONAF cooling;

HV winding MVA
LV winding MVA
TV winding MVA -
2. Rated frequency Hz
3. Rated no-load voltage at rated frequency on:
HV, principal tapping kV

HV, extreme plus tapping kV
HV, extreme minus tapping kV
LV, kV
TV, kV -
4. Tapping ranges from principal tapping:
HV, no of plus tappings -

HV, no of minus tappings -
HV, steps in % of rated voltage %
5. No-load losses at rated voltage and

frequency kW
6. No-load current at rated voltage and

frequency A

SCHEDULE VI-7a - TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, POWER TRANSFORMERS Sheet 2 of 7
Item Description Unit 23 MVA

o
7. Load losses at 75 C at rated currents, the
third winding being open:
HV - LV, ONAN kW -
HV - TV, ONAN kW -
LV - TV, ONAN kW -
HV - LV, ONAF kW -
HV - TV, ONAF kW -
LV - TV, ONAF kW -
8. Cooling plant power consumption kW
9. Total losses at 75oC on principal tapping and

unity power factor and rated currents:
ONAN kW
ONAF including input to cooling plant kW
10. Impedance voltages at 75o referred to mutual

capacities at rated frequency and 100%
rating:
Principal tapping:
HV - LV, ONAN %
HV - TV, ONAN % -
LV - TV, ONAN % -
HV - LV, ONAF % -
HV - TV, ONAF % -
LV - TV, ONAF % -

SCHEDULE VI-7a - TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, POWER TRANSFORMERS

Sheet 3 of 7
Item Description Unit 23MVA

Extreme plus tapping:
HV - LV, ONAN %
HV - TV, ONAN % -
LV - TV, ONAN % -
HV - LV, ONAF %
HV - TV, ONAF % -
LV - TV, ONAF % -
Extreme minus tapping:
HV - LV, ONAN %
HV - TV, ONAN % -
LV - TV, ONAN % -
HV - LV, ONAF %
HV - TV, ONAF % -
LV - TV, ONAF % -
11. Temperature rise after continuous operation

with rated MVA, under the ambient
conditions specified in Section VI, Clause
4.1.3.2.1 and the rated conditions giving the
highest losses:
o
Top oil (by thermometer) C
o
Windings (by resistance) C
12. Efficiency on principal tapping max.

temperature of winding and unity power
factor and TV winding open:
- 120% load, ONAN %

- 100% load, ONAN %
- 50% load, ONAN %
- 120% load, ONAF %
- 100% load, ONAF %
- 50% load, ONAF %


Sheet 4 of 7

13. Inherent voltage regulation on principal
tapping, 75oC and unity power factor:
- TV winding open %
- 80% of full load on LV winding and 20%
on TV winding %
14. Inherent voltage regulation on principal

tapping, 75oC and 0.8 power factor lagging:
- TV winding open %
- 80% of full load on LV winding and 20%
on TV winding %
15. Vector group -
16. No. of phases per transformer -
17. Type of cooling -
18. Whether star connected windings shall be

fully insulated or graded
- HV winding -
- LV winding -
19. Insulation levels of star points
- HV winding kV
- LV winding kV
20. Method of system earthing:
- HV system -
- LV system


Sheet 5 of 7

21. Method of transformer earthing:
- HV windings - star point -

- LV windings - star point -
- TV winding - one corner of closed delta -
22. Whether TV windings are to be brought out -

to separate bushing insulators
23. Indoor or outdoor installation -
24. System highest voltage according to IEC:
- HV kV
- LV kV
- TV kV -
25. Maximum flux density at rated voltage on

principal tapping and rated frequency:
- Transformer legs T
- Transformer yokes T
26. Maximum flux density at most onerous

voltage and frequency conditions:
- Transformer legs T
- Transformer yokes T
27. Specific core loss W/kg

SCHEDULE VI-7a - TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, POWER TRANSFORMERS Sheet

6 of 7

28. Maximum current density in windings at
rated output:
HV, higher voltage, ONAN A/mm2

HV, lower voltage, ONAF A/mm2
LV, ONAN A/mm2
LV, ONAF A/mm2
TV, ONAN A/mm2
TV, ONAF A/mm2
29. Magnetising current at rated nominal

voltage on principal tapping A
o
30. Maximum hot spot temperature of winding C
31. Equivalent resistance referred to HV side ohms
32. Equivalent reactance referred to HV side ohms
33. Maximum current carrying capacity of

bushings:
HV A
LV A
TV A
34. Rated service voltage of bushings:
HV kV
LV kV
TV kV
HV, neutral kV
LV, neutral kV


Sheet 7 of 7

35. 1 minute, 50 Hz dry withstand voltage:
HV bushing kV
LV bushing kV
TV bushing kV
HV, LV neutral bushings kV
36. 1 minute, 50 Hz wet withstand voltage:
HV bushing kV
LV bushing kV
TV bushing kV
HV, LV neutral bushings kV
37. Impulse withstand voltage:
HV bushing kV
LV bushing kV
38. Maximum noise level
- Transformer and tap changing equipment

energised and at no-load with ONAN
cooling dB
- Same as above but with ONAF cooling

(fans running) dB

SCHEDULE VI-7b - INFORMATIVE DATA, POWER TRANSFORMERS
Sheet 1 of 9
HV POWER TRANSFORMERS

1. Type of transformer (core or shell type) -
2. Number of core legs -
3. Type of windings:
HV -
LV -
TV -
4. Type of insulation:
HV, winding -
LV, winding -
TV, winding -
Tappings
Tapping connection -
Core bolts (if any) -
Core bolt washers (if any) -
Core lamination designation -
Specific core loss w/cm3
5. Type of axial coil supports:

HV winding -
LV winding -
TV winding -
6. Winding conductor material -

HV -
LV -
7. Type of joints in the magnetic core (butt

type, interleaved etc.)
8. Calculated thermal time constant:

ONAN hours
ONAF hours

SCHEDULE VI-7b - INFORMATIVE DATA, POWER TRANSFORMER Sheet 2 of 9


9. Type of bushings:
HV -
LV -
TV -
HV, LV neutral -
10. Principal bushing insulator materials:
HV -
LV -
TV -
HV, LV neutral -
11. Total creepage distance over porcelain

externally:
HV bushing mm
LV bushing mm
12. Protected leakage distance over porcelain

externally (90o shadow)
HV bushing mm
LV bushing mm
13. Thickness of transformer tank:
Sides mm
Bottom mm
Top mm
14. Thickness of radiator plates mm
15. Number of radiators per transformer -

SCHEDULE VI-7b - INFORMATIVE DATA, POWER TRANSFORMER

Sheet 3 of 9

16. On-load tap changer:
Type (resistor type, reactor type, etc.) -

Total number of tappings including principal -
Rated currents of:
- Selector switch A
- Diverter switch A
- Resistors A
Maximum overcurrent of:
- Selector switch A
- Diverter switch A
- Resistors A
Driving motor input kW
Type of driving motor (3-phase etc.) -
Monitoring contact:
- Closing time in advance of parting of

diverter switch sec.
- Opening time after diverter switch
contacts have fully opened sec.
Diverter switch opening time sec.
Time from “point of no return” to parting of
diverter switch contacts sec.
17. Whether outdoor cabinets/kiosks are

provided with heaters -


Sheet 4 of 9

18. Forced air cooling system:
State if fans are blowing directly on -

radiators
Total number of fan units per transformer -
Cooling capacity of each complete cooling
system kW
19. Total oil quantity in completely filled

transformer kp
20. Total weight of oil in completely filled

transformer l
21. Total oil quantity in conservator l
22. Total quantity of oil in conservator between

highest and lowest level l
23. Volume of conservator tank l
24. Weight of copper in windings kg
25. Weight of core/winding assembly kg
26. Weight of each radiator:
Filled with oil kg

Empty kg
27. Total weight of bushings:
HV kg/each
LV kg/each



28. Total weight of complete transformer
erected at site tons
29. Weight of transformer as arranged for

transport tons
30. Filling medium during transport -
31. Overall dimensions of transformer

completely erected at site, including
bushings, radiators:
Length mm
Width mm
Height mm
32. Overall dimensions of transformer arranged

for transport:
Length mm
Width mm
Height mm
33. Maximum lift of core/winding assembly

incl. lifting beam, slings, etc. for untanking mm
34. Rated output per fan unit m3/min.
35. Speed of fan motors rpm
36. Continuous rating of fan motors Hp
37. Starting current of fan motors A


Sheet 6 of 9

38. Efficiency of fan motors %
39. Power factor of fan motors at rated output %
40. Material in rating and diagram plates -
41. Are on-load tap changing equipment

prepared for fully automatic operation -

prepared for local, remote control (control
room) and supervisory (NCC) operation and
indication -

prepared for fully automatic parallel
operation with similar transformers -
44. Whether first filling of oil is included -
45. Whether tap changer cubicle and wiring

cabinet are provided -
46. Whether winding, and top oil indicators are

provided -
47. Whether cooling fans are automatically

operated from the winding temperature
indicators -
48. Whether pressure relief device is to be fitted -
49. Whether Buchholz relay is fitted -



50. Whether all internal cabling/wiring on
transformer is supplied to form a complete
self contained unit -
51. Are the following alarms/trip signals

provided: -
Tap changer not operating, alarm -

Tap changers out of step, alarm -
Voltage transformer failure -
Fan failure, alarm -
Oil/gas flow transformer, alarm -
Oil/gas flow transformer, trip -
On load tap changer protective relay
operated, trip -
Oil gauge low level, alarm -
Oil gauge low level, trip -
Tap changer oil gauge level low, alarm -
Tap changer oil gauge level critical, trip -
Top oil temp. high, alarm -
Top oil temp. critical, trip -
Winding temp. high, alarm -
Winding temp. critical, trip -
52. Are the following temperature indicators

provided:
HV winding -
LV or common winding
TV winding


Sheet 8 of 9

53. Are the following oil level gauges provided:
- Main conservator tank -

- On-load tap changer conservator tank -
54. Tap change indicator provided -
55. Tap change in progress indicator -
56. Tap changer out of step indicator -
57. Potentiometer switch for remote/supervisory

on-load tap changer position indicator -
58. Will the tests specified in Section 3-II -

Clause 10 be adhered to? -
If deviations, please state underneath



59. State all Standards applied underneath:
60. State identity of transformer manufacturer

and all sub-manufacturers including the
parts manufactured below:
Transformer:
Cooling equipment
On-load tap changer
Current transformers
Bushings
Core steel
Oil
Buchholz relay
Breather
Thermometer
Other equipment to be listed by the Bidder:
-
-
-
-
-

SCHEDULE VI 8a - TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

Sheet 1 of 2
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER Guaranteed Data
Item Particulars Unit 11/0.4 kV
1. Continuous Maximum Rating C.M.R. kVA
2. Normal voltage between phases at no load
a) H.V. Volts
b) L.V. Volts
3. Tappings
a) Plus %
b) Minus %
4. Performance Data at Sea Level, corrected at 75%
a) No load loss at normal primary voltage watts

b) No load loss at 10% primary over voltage watts
c) Load loss at C.M.R. watts
d) Impedance volts at C.M.R. and normal ratio %
e) Regulation at C.M.R. and unity power factor %
f) Regulation at C.M.R. and 0.8 power factor %
g) Max temperature rise at C.M.R.:
o
i) Top oil by thermometer C
ii) Average winding by resistance
iii) “Hot Spot” corresponding to (ii)

SCHEDULE VI-8a - TECHNICAL GUARANTEES, DISTR. TRANSFORMERS Sheet 2 of 2

DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER Guaranteed Data
5. Type of insulation used on windings
a) H.V.
b) L.V.
6. Lightning Impulse Insulation level of:
a) H.V. winding kVpk

b) L.V. winding kVpk
c) Tap change equipment and connections
i) To earth kVpk
ii) Between contacts kVpk
7. Are test certificates supplied supporting the level

stated in Clause 6 Yes/No
8. Silica gel Breather
a) Make of unit fitted

b) Size of unit

SCHEDULE VI-8b - INFORMATIVE DATA, DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER

Sheet 1 of 2
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
1. Transformer type (sealed or breathing)
2. Type of windings
HV
LV
3. Type of insulation
HV winding
LV winding
4. Type of tap changer
5. Tap changer designation
6. Type of axial coil supports
HV winding
LV winding
7. Winding conductor material
HV winding
LV winding
8. Core laminations designation -
9. Specific core loss w/cm3
10. Type of bushings
HV
LV

SCHEDULE VI-8b - INFORMATIVE DATA DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

Sheet 2 of 2
DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
11. Bushing insulator material
HV
LV
12. Creepage distance across bushings
HV mm
LV mm
13. Type of cooling system
14. Total oil quantity k
15. Total weight
16. Volume of conservator tank l
17. Overall dimensions
Length mm
Width mm
Height mm
18. State all standards applied underneath:
19. State identity of manufacturer underneath:

SCHEDULE VI-9a- GAURANTEE DATA TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
UHF Link Radios

Type:
Employer's
Item Particulars Unit Tender value
requirement
1 Output Power W 1 - 25
2 Sensitivity (12dB SINAD) µV 0.35
3 Frequency Range MHz 403 - 420
4 Frequency Stability ppm +2
5 Channel Spacing kHz 12.5/20/25
6 Channel capacity
CCIR, ZVEI
7 Signalling standards
and EEA
Simplex/semi-
8 Mode of Operation
duplex/duplex
9 Antenna connectors N-female
10 Antenna impedance Ω 50
O
11 Temperature range C -30 to + 60
V
12 Voltage (nominal)
DC
13.2
13 Designed for continuous-duty cycle operation Y/N

14 Power consumption @ full power W
15 Power consumption, standby mode W
Rack or wall-
16 Mounting mounting
bracket

SCHEDULE VI-9b- GAURANTEE DATA TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM

UHF Link Antenna
Type:
Employer's
Item Particulars Unit Tender value
requirement
1 Antenna Type
2 Frequency band (minimum) MHz 400 - 420
3 Impedance Ω 50
Vertical or
4 Polarisation
horizontal
5 Gain dBi > 10
6 Front to back ratio db > 20
7 Half-power Beam Width, vertical deg. < 40
8 Half-power Beam Width, horizontal deg. < 50
9 Bandwidth MHz > 10
10 SWR < 1.5:1
11 Max. power W 150
12 Connection N-female
On 30-58 mm
13 Mounting
tube
14 Wind survival rating m/s
15 Wind surface m2
16 Wind load @ 40 m/s N
17 Weight kg
18 Dimensions mm

SECTION - VI
FORMS AND PROCEDURES

Kenya Power and Lighting Company 1-197 Technical Specifications and Drawing
Forms and Procedures

Form of Completion Certificate
Date:
Loan/Credit No:
IFB No:
______________________________
To: _________________________________
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen,
Pursuant to GC Clause 24 (Completion of the Facilities) of the General Conditions of the

Contract entered into between yourselves and the Employer dated _____________, relating to
the ____________________, we hereby notify you that the following part(s) of the Facilities
was (were) complete on the date specified below, and that, in accordance with the terms of the
Contract, the Employer hereby takes over the said part(s) of the Facilities, together with the
responsibility for care and custody and the risk of loss thereof on the date mentioned below.
1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof: ______________________________
2. Date of Completion: __________________
However, you are required to complete the outstanding items listed in the attachment hereto as
soon as practicable.
This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities in
accordance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.
Very truly yours,
Title
(Project Manager)

Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate
Date:
Loan/Credit No:
IFB No:
_________________________________________
To: ________________________________________
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen,
Pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 25.3 (Operational Acceptance) of the General Conditions of the

Contract entered into between yourselves and the Employer dated _______________, relating to
the ___________________________________, we hereby notify you that the Functional
Guarantees of the following part(s) of the Facilities were satisfactorily attained on the date
specified below.
1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof: _______________________________
2. Date of Operational Acceptance: _______________________
This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities in
accordance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.
Very truly yours,
Title
(Project Manager)

Change Order Procedure and Forms
Date:
Loan/Credit No:
IFB No:
CONTENTS
1. General
2. Change Order Log
3. References for Changes
ANNEXES
Annex 1 Request for Change Proposal

Annex 2 Estimate for Change Proposal
Annex 3 Acceptance of Estimate
Annex 4 Change Proposal
Annex 5 Change Order
Annex 6 Pending Agreement Change Order
Annex 7 Application for Change Proposal

Change Order Procedure
1. General
This section provides samples of procedures and forms for implementing changes in the
Facilities during the performance of the Contract in accordance with GC Clause 39 (Change in
the Facilities) of the General Conditions.
2. Change Order Log
The Contractor shall keep an up-to-date Change Order Log to show the current status of
Requests for Change and Changes authorized or pending, as Annex 8. Entries of the Changes in
the Change Order Log shall be made to ensure that the log is up-to-date. The Contractor shall
attach a copy of the current Change Order Log in the monthly progress report to be submitted to
the Employer.
3. References for Changes
(1) Request for Change as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CR-X-nnn.
(2) Estimate for Change Proposal as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered
CN-X-nnn.
(3) Acceptance of Estimate as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CA-X-

nnn.
(4) Change Proposal as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CP-X-nnn.
(5) Change Order as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CO-X-nnn.
Note: (a) Requests for Change issued from the Employer’s Home Office and the
Site representatives of the Employer shall have the following respective references:
Home Office CR-H-nnn

Site CR-S-nnn
(b) The above number “nnn” is the same for Request for Change, Estimate for Change
Proposal, Acceptance of Estimate, Change Proposal and Change Order.

Annex 1. Request for Change Proposal
(Employer’s Letterhead)
To: ____________________________________ Date:
Attention: ______________________________________
Contract Name: _________________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:
With reference to the captioned Contract, you are requested to prepare and submit a Change
Proposal for the Change noted below in accordance with the following instructions within
_______________ days of the date of this letter ____________________.
1. Title of Change: ________________________
2. Change Request No. __________________
3. Originator of Change: Employer: _______________________________

Contractor (by Application for Change Proposal No. _______1:
4. Brief Description of Change:

_________________________________________________
5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change:

_____________
6. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the request of Change:
Drawing No./Document No. Description
7. Detailed conditions or special requirements on the requested Change:

________________
8. General Terms and Conditions:
(a) Please submit your estimate to us showing what effect the requested Change will have on
the Contract Price.
(b) Your estimate shall include your claim for the additional time, if any, for completion of
the requested Change.

(c) If you have any opinion negative to the adoption of the requested Change in connection
with the conformability to the other provisions of the Contract or the safety of the Plant or
Facilities, please inform us of your opinion in your proposal of revised provisions.
(d) Any increase or decrease in the work of the Contractor relating to the services of its
personnel shall be calculated.
(e) You shall not proceed with the execution of the work for the requested Change until we
have accepted and confirmed the amount and nature in writing.
(Employer’s Name)
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)
(Title of signatory)

Annex 2. Estimate for Change Proposal
(Contractor’s Letterhead)
To: ______________________________ Date:
Attention: _______________________________
Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _____________________________
With reference to your Request for Change Proposal, we are pleased to notify you of the
approximate cost of preparing the below-referenced Change Proposal in accordance with GC
Sub-Clause 39.2.1 of the General Conditions. We acknowledge that your agreement to the cost
of preparing the Change Proposal, in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 39.2.2, is required before
estimating the cost for change work.
1. Title of Change: ________________________
2. Change Request No./Rev.: ____________________________
3. Brief Description of Change: __________________________
4. Scheduled Impact of Change: ___________________________
5. Cost for Preparation of Change Proposal: _______________2
(a) Engineering (Amount)
(i) Engineer hrs x rate/hr =
(ii) Draftsperson hrs x rate/hr =
Sub-total hrs
Total Engineering Cost
(b) Other Cost
Total Cost (a) + (b)
2
Costs shall be in the currencies of the Contract.
(Contractor’s Name)
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)

Annex 3. Acceptance of Estimate
To: ______________________________ Date:
Attention: ________________________________
Contract Name: _____________________________

Contract Number: ___________________________
We hereby accept your Estimate for Change Proposal and agree that you should proceed with
the preparation of the Change Proposal.
1. Title of Change: ___________________________
2. Change Request No./Rev.: _______________________________
3. Estimate for Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________
4. Acceptance of Estimate No./Rev.: _______________________________
5. Brief Description of Change: _______________________________
6. Other Terms and Conditions: In the event that we decide not to order the Change
accepted, you shall be entitled to compensation for the cost of preparation of Change Proposal
described in your Estimate for Change Proposal mentioned in para. 3 above in accordance with
GC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.
(Employer’s Name)
(Signature)
(Name and Title of signatory)

Annex 4. Change Proposal
To: _______________________________ Date:
Attention: _______________________________
Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________
In response to your Request for Change Proposal No. _______________________________, we

hereby submit our proposal as follows:
1. Title of Change: _______________________________
2. Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________
3. Originator of Change: Employer: [_______________________________

Contractor: _______________________________
5. Reasons for Change: _______________________________
6. Facilities and/or Item No. of Equipment related to the requested Change:

_______________________________
7. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:
Drawing/Document No. Description
8. Estimate of increase/decrease to the Contract Price resulting from Change Proposal:3
(Amount)
(a) Direct material
(b) Major construction equipment
(c) Direct field labor (Total hrs)
(d) Subcontracts
3
Costs shall be in the currencies of the Contract.
(e) Indirect material and labor
(f) Site supervision
(g) Head office technical staff salaries

Process engineer hrs @ rate/hr
Project engineer hrs @ rate/hr
Equipment engineer hrs @ rate/hr
Procurement hrs @ rate/hr
Draftsperson hrs @ rate/hr
Total hrs
(h) Extraordinary costs (computer, travel, etc.)
(i) Fee for general administration, % of Items
(j) Taxes and customs duties
Total lump sum cost of Change Proposal

(Sum of items (a) to (j))
Cost to prepare Estimate for Change Proposal

(Amount payable if Change is not accepted)
9. Additional time for Completion required due to Change Proposal
10. Effect on the Functional Guarantees
11. Effect on the other terms and conditions of the Contract
12. Validity of this Proposal: within [Number] days after receipt of this Proposal by the
Employer
13. Other terms and conditions of this Change Proposal:
(a) You are requested to notify us of your acceptance, comments or rejection of this detailed
Change Proposal within ______________ days from your receipt of this Proposal.
(b) The amount of any increase and/or decrease shall be taken into account in the adjustment
of the Contract Price.
(c) Contractor’s cost for preparation of this Change Proposal:2
2
Specify where necessary.
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)

Annex 5. Change Order
To: _______________________________ Date:
Attention: _______________________________
Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________
We approve the Change Order for the work specified in the Change Proposal (No. _______),
and agree to adjust the Contract Price, Time for Completion and/or other conditions of the
Contract in accordance with GC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.
1. Title of Change: _______________________________
2. Change Request No./Rev.: _______________________________
3. Change Order No./Rev.: _______________________________
4. Originator of Change: Employer: _______________________________

Contractor: _______________________________
5. Authorized Price:
Ref. No.: _______________________________ Date:

__________________________
Foreign currency portion __________ plus Local currency portion __________
6. Adjustment of Time for Completion
None Increase _________ days Decrease _________ days
7. Other effects, if any
Authorized by: Date:

(Employer)
Accepted by: Date:

(Contractor)

Annex 6. Pending Agreement Change Order
To: _______________________________ Date:
Attention: _______________________________
Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: [_______________________________
We instruct you to carry out the work in the Change Order detailed below in accordance with
GC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.
1. Title of Change: _______________________________
2. Employer’s
Request for Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________ dated:
__________
3. Contractor’s
Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________ dated: __________
5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change:

_______________________________
6. Reference Drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:
Drawing/Document No. Description
7. Adjustment of Time for Completion:
8. Other change in the Contract terms:
9. Other terms and conditions:

(Employer’s Name)
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)

Annex 7. Application for Change Proposal
To: _______________________________ Date:
Attention: _______________________________
Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________
We hereby propose that the below-mentioned work be treated as a Change in the Facilities.
1. Title of Change: _______________________________
2. Application for Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________ dated:

_______________________________
4. Reasons for Change:
5. Order of Magnitude Estimation (in the currencies of the Contract):
6. Scheduled Impact of Change:
7. Effect on Functional Guarantees, if any:
8. Appendix:
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)

DRAWINGS REFERENCE
The following drawings shall be referenced for protection, metering & layout of the sub-
station at Kutus and this drawing shall be read in conjunction with the “Technical
Specifications”

i. Single line diagram for Kutus 132kV substation

Note: This drawing is a guideline
TO KIGANJO
SUB STATION
EXISTING 132KV O/H LINE
PROPOSED DOUBLE CCT LINE

APPROX. 250 TO SAMSON CONER
FUTURE
ISOL. CB ISOL. ISOL. CB ISOL. ISOL. CB ISOL.
BAR
23MVA ISOL. ISOL.
ISOL. ISOL. CB
CB 132/33 KV
TX
BAR
BUS
ISOL. CB ISOL.
BUS COUPLER
132KV
ISOL. ISOL.
BUS
CB
PROPOSED
EXISTING 132KV O/H LINE
33KV
ISOL. ISOL. ISOL. CB ISOL. ISOL. CB ISOL.
CB
23MVA ISOL. CB ISOL.

132/33 KV
TX
ISOL.
50KVA
33/433KV
LOCAL TX.
FROM MASINGA
POWER STN.
DATE SIGN
APPROVED
CHECKED
ENGINEE I/C
CHECKED REF REVISON DATE SIGN

HEAD D'MAN 1
APPENDIX
DRAWN
TRACED
1 4/8/2010 S.M .Kim ani
2
3
4
KUTUS 132/33KV S/STN.
5

ii) Proposed Kutus substation control building layout.

Note: This drawing is a guideline
ENTRANCE
AIR CON. AIR CON. AIR CON. AIR CON.
DOOR
F U T U R E
KITCHEN SUPERVISORS
BATTERY ROOM U TILITY/ STORE
OFFICES
RELAY PANELS
EXTERNAL EXTERNAL
DOOR DOOR
Urinal
TRANSFORMER
METERING/
CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
LIBRARY/
WC WASH/
RECORDS WC SHOWER
Urinal ROOM
CONTROL DESK
AIR CON.
ENTRANCE
DOOR
DATE SIGN
APPROVED
CHECKED
ENGINEE I/C
CHECKED REF R EVISON DATE SIGN

HEAD D'MAN 1
APPENDIX
DRAWN
TRACED
14/8/2010 S.M.Kimani
2
3
4
132KV CONTROLROOM
5

Sagana Kutus 132kv Transmission Line and Substation

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Sagana Kutus 132kv Transmission Line and Substation

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

THE KENYA POWER AND LIGHTING COMPANY LIMITED

MT. KENYA NORTH SYSTEM REINFORCEMENT

BIDDING DOCUMENTS FOR

Design, Supply and Installation of Substation & Transmission

Part 1 Bidding Procedures

Part 2 Employer’s Requirements

Part 3 Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms

These Bidding Documents have been prepared following the

PART 1 – BIDDING PROCEDURES

Section II. Bid Data Sheet (BDS)

Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria

Section IV Bidding Forms

Section V. Eligible Countries

PART 3 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT AND SAMPLE FORMS

Section VII. General Conditions (GC)

Section VIII. Particular Conditions (PC)

Section IX: Contract Forms

PART 2 SECTION VI EMPLOYERS REQUIREMENTS

PART 2A: SPECIFICATION FOR TRANSMISSION LINE

5 Transport access and servitude

6 Survey, profile and geotechnical investigations

7 Conductors and fittings

8 Optical fibre ground wire

12 Method of Measurement & Payment

13 Schedules and Drawings

PART 2B: SPECIFICATION FOR SUBSTATION

2.0 General Specifications and scope of works

3.1 Switchgear and Control equipment

3.2 132kV Circuit Breaker specification

3.3 132kV Isolator specification

3.4 132kV Capacitive Voltage Transformer specification

3.5 132kv Current transformer specification

3.6 132kv Surge arresters specification

3.7 Power Transformer specification

3.8 Local supply transformer specification

3.9 33kV Circuit Breaker specification

3.10 33kV Isolator specification

3.11 33kV Voltage Transformer specification

3.12 33kv Current transformer specification

3.13 33kv Surge arresters specification

3.14 Control, protective relays specifications

3.15 Electrical Protective relays and panels

3.16 Detailed Relay specification

3.17 Telecommunication specifications

3.18 Miscellaneous materials

3.19 Civil works

3.20 Test at site

3.21 Site Visit

3.22 Technical Schedules

3.23 Forms and Procedures

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS AND

1 SCOPE OF WORK ................................................................................................... 13

1.2 SCOPE AND EXTENT OF DEFINITE WORK ............................................................................................... 13

2 SITE CONDITIONS ................................................................................................. 14

2.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS ......................................................................................................................... 14

3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................... 15

3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME..................................................................................................... 15

3.3 QUALITY PLAN ...................................................................................................................................... 16

3.4 RELATED STANDARDS ........................................................................................................................... 16

3.5 QUALITY CONTROL ............................................................................................................................... 16

3.6 NON CONFORMING PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 17

3.7 MONITORING OF QUALITY ASSURANCE AGREEMENTS ......................................................................... 17

3.8 SUPPLIERS AND SUB-CONTRACTORS .................................................................................................... 17

3.9 METHOD STATEMENTS ......................................................................................................................... 18